初中英语教科版八年级上全册学习指导及练习题

Unit 8 Review
一、单项选择（20分）
1. There were _______ in the Round Bright Palace in 1860.
A. fires B. a fire C. fire
2. Seven Bridges went ________ the Golden Stream.
A. over B. on C. above
3. Tom wasn't interested in Internet, so he never _______ my emails before.
A. replied B. replied with C. replied to
4. —What a big palace it is!
—Yeah, you may stand on the steps. I will ______ your picture there.
A. give B. get C. take
5. —Mike told his friends that some buildings of the postcards were ____ older than _________ buildings. —It’s true.
A. much, others B. very, others C. much, other
6. —What did Mike say
—He said that there were some bridges over the stream that _____ the palace.
A. runs through B. comes cross C. goes across
7. My friend will go to America. We will ______ in touch by e-mail.
A. get B. keep C. to keep
8. —Do you know there is a famous ______ in English about old friends and new friends —Yes. “Make new friends, but _____ the old. One is silver. The other is gold”
A. saying, keep B. saying, left C. word, leaves
9. Everyone thinks that new friends are almost ______ old friends.
A. as well as B. so good as C. as good as
10. —Oh, What is it —It’s a vacuum. It can ______ the dirt off the floor.
A. pulled B. suck C. push
11. It is said over one million Flowbees _______ in America over the next ten years.
A. sold B. were sold C. are sold
12. People say sometimes great ideas come from ______ places.
A. surprise B. surprised C. surprising
13. —I liked reading story books ______ when I was a student.
—So did I. My favourite books by Jin Yong.
A. wrote B. is written C. written by Gu Long
14. —How lovely the monkeys are! —It’s true. They ______ some bananas by the zookeeper.
A. are giving B. are given to C. are given
15. —Where did you buy the toy boat —It _____ in China.
A. was bought B. was brought C. is bought
16. — ________ your hair _______ with scissors or a machine — Scissors.
A. Did, cut B. Was, cutted C. Was, cut
17. I can’t imagine that you bought ______ much milk.
A. such B. so C. to
18. Look, they ______ kites.
A. are fliing B. are flying C. flied
19. You’d better not _______ about your brother, he is safe.
A. worry B. worried C. are worried
20. —Does Susan always ______ a silver ring —Yes. She likes it very much.
A. wear B. put on C. dress
二、完形填空（10分）
Every summer, not only boys and men but also girls and women try to swim from England to France or from France to England. The distance（距离）at the 21 point is about 20 miles, but because the waves are very 22 , the distance that swimmers must 23 is usually more than twice as far.
Captain Web was the first man to cross the English Channel between England and France. That was in August 1875. The Englishman stepped into the water from a 24 at Dover in England. He 25 21hours in crossing the English Channel and at last 26 the French mainland. Since then many swimmers have crossed the English Channel and made time much 27 . In 1960 a Canadian crossed in 10 hours and 23 minutes.
Because the sea is usually 28 , swimmers cover their bodies with grease（动物油脂）.This helps them to keep the cold out. They can also 29 something, because some men go with them in small 30 .
21.A.nearest22.A.small23.A.ride24.A.beach25.A.took26.A.got27.A.longer28.A.warm29.A.buy30.A.trains B. fastestB. strongB. runB. houseB. spentB. arrivedB. shorterB. hotB. eatB. cars C. tallestC. shortC. walkC. trainC. finishedC. leftC. easierC. coldC. sellC. buses D. highestD. goodD. swimD. roomD. paidD. reachedD. fasterD. darkD. borrowD. boats
三、阅读理解（20分）
(A)
Where is Love How can we find Love
Once a little boy wanted to meet Love. He knew it was a long trip to where Love lived, so he got his things ready with some pizzas and drinks and started off. When he passed three streets, he saw an old woman sitting in the park and watching some birds. She looked very hungry. The boy gave her a pizza. She took it and smiled at him. The smile was so beautiful that he wanted to see it again, so he gave her a Coke. She smiled once again. The boy was very happy.
They sat there all the afternoon, eating and smiling, but they said nothing. When it grew dark, the boy decided to leave. But before he had gone more than a few steps, he turned around, ran back to the old woman and gave her a hug. The woman gave him her biggest smile ever.
When the boy opened the door of his house, his mother was surprised by the look of joy(快乐)on his face and asked what had made him so happy. “I had lunch with Love. She has got the most beautiful smile in the world.” At the same time, the old woman,s son was also surprised at his mother,s pleasure and asked why.
“I ate a pizza in the park with Love,” she said, “and he is much younger than I expected.”
If the world is full of love, we can enjoy a better life.
31. When the little boy saw the old woman, she was .
A. looking for a seat in the park B. passing the street
C. looking at some birds D. having a pizza
32. The little boy gave the old woman a Coke because .
A. the old woman still felt hungry B. he wanted to see the smile again
C. he didn,t like the drink D. the old woman paid him for it
33. The old woman gave the little boy the biggest smile .
A. after the little boy went home B. before it grew dark
C. when she was drinking Coke D. after the little boy hugged her
34. The boy,s mother was surprised to see her son was very when the door opened.
A. pleased B. sad C. unhappy D. angry
35. Which of the following is TRUE
A. The little boy failed to find Love.
B. Both the little boy and the old woman found what they wanted at last.
C. The little boy decided never to go home.
D. The old woman gave the little boy a hug to thank him.
(B)
Harry is a boy of fourteen years old. He,s tall and strong. And he ran fastest in his class. So everyone was very proud of him in his class. A new student came to his class a month ago. His name is Mike. He,s thin and short. But his classmates found that he ran very fast while they were playing football. They wanted to know if Mike could run faster than Harry. Jack, one of Harry,s friends, told Harry about it. Of course, Harry didn,t believe it.
“Why not have a race with him ”said Jack.“That,s a good idea!”said Harry.“Go to tell the unlucky boy. I’ll have a race with him tomorrow morning.”
Early the next morning, Harry got ready for the race. He was sure that he could be first. Jack didn,t wake up on time and couldn,t go with him. That evening Jack went to see Harry. They began to talk about the race. Harry,s grandma heard them in the next room. She came in and asked,“What,s the result, Harry ”
“I was the second, Grandma, ” answered Harry.
“Congratulations to you!”the old woman said happily.“And how was Mike ”
“He was the last but one.”
36. Harry,s classmates were proud of him because .
A. he was tall B. he was the top student in his school
C. he ran fastest in his class D. he was strong
37. Harry didn,t believe Jack because .
A. Jack often made jokes with him
B. Mike was much shorter and thinner than he
C. Mike was new in the class
D. he didn,t know Mike at all
38. Jack didn’t go with Harry because .
A. he woke up too late B. he didn’t like to see the result
C. he was too tired D. he had some homework
39.The phrase “last but one” means .
A.第一名 B.倒数第二名 C.最后一名 D.第二名
40.In fact(事实上) .
A. Harry didn’t tell his grandma the truth
B. Mike won the race
C. Harry won the race
D. Harry was very proud of himself, too
(C)
2.26-meter-tall Yao Ming made his NBA debut（初次登台）on October23, 2002 and got 6 points（得分）for the Houston Rockets in the game. The next day, he got 13 points in another game.
Most people think that Yao Ming is a born basket-ball player. But Yao said, “When you watch it on TV, it looks very easy. But when you are playing in the NBA, it is really not so easy.” He said that joining the Houston Rockets was a new start and a new challenge. “I hope that through very hard work I can make everyone happy and help the Rockets win more games,” he said.
Yao Ming speaks some English. Both he and his teammates can understand each other. They don’t think there is a language problem. While Yao Ming faces this new challenge, the people of Houston have shown great interest in him and they hope Yao Ming will bring new energy（活力）to the Rockets. The team has started having lessons to learn more about China, and many people who work for the Rockets have learned to speak some Chinese.
41. Yao Ming got13 points on October , 2002.
A.22 B.23 C.24 D.26
42. Yao Ming said that .
A. playing in the NBA was difficult B. it was hard to watch NBA games on TV
C. he was an NBA star D. it was boring to play basketball
43. The people of Houston hope Yao Ming will .
A. speak excellent English B. bring new energy to the Rockets
C. make NBA games easy D. face new challenge
44. From the passage we can know that Yao Ming .
A. will work hard for his team
B. made the highest score in his first NBA game
C. can’t understand his teammates
D. teaches the Rockets workers Chinese himself
45. The passage is probably .
A. an advertisement B. a notice C. a news report D. an instruction
(D)
We,ve Moved!Please come to the party in our new house.8:00pm.on November 5Betty and JackAdd:31 Station StreetTel:342-1525E-mail:betty12@ Must Sell $275Best washing machineOnly 6 months oldOwner going abroadCall Mike GreenAdd:10 Park StreetTel:342-2691E-mail:mikegreen@ Smith,s Book ClubNew and old booksOver 1,000 kindsGood coffee and teaOpen every day 10:00 to 22:00Add:15 North StreetTel:342-7391 or 342-7350E-mail:smith15@
46. If you want to go to Betty and Jack,s party, you can call .
A.342-1525 B.342-7391 C.342-2691 D.342-7350
47. Mike Green has to sell his washing machine because .
A. he wants to buy a new one B. he will go abroad
C. he wants to buy a new house D. There,s something wrong with it
48. Smith,s Book Club is open a day.
A.8 hours B.10 hours C.12 hours D.20 hours
49. If you want to read some books, you can go to .
A.31 Station Street B.15 North Street
C. 10 park Street D.15 Apple Street
50. You can use the e-mail mikegreen@ if you want to .
A. read some books B. go to a family party
C. drink some good coffee D. buy a washing machine
四、任务性阅读（10分）
(A)
When we want to tell 51 people what we think, we can do it 52 the help of words. We can also do it 53 many other ways, too. Sometimes we move our heads up and down when we want to say “yes”, and we shake our heads when we want to say “no”. Some people can’t hear 54 speak. They talk with the help of gestures（手势）.People from other countries often have to do it 55 they don’t know your language.
(B)
(1)Daniel was always making excuses for forgetting to do things. His usual excuse was: “ I was too busy.” or “I didn’t have time.”
Daniel’s parents were worried about him. “ He shouldn’t go through life making excuses all the time.” his father said. “ No one will trust him to do anything. He won’t be able to keep a job. No sensible(明智的)girl will marry him.”
(2)“I don’t know what we can do.” his mother said.
“I have an idea.” his father said. “If this doesn’t work, nothing will.”
The next day was Daniel’s birthday. He was really looking forward to getting exciting presents. He woke up, expecting his parents to wish him a happy birthday. But all day what they said was “Good morning, Daniel. Hurry, or you will be late for school.” There were no presents, not even a card. He was really disappointed.
“Never mind.” he thought. (3) “There’ll be a surprise for me after school.” But there wasn’t. Sadly he said to his parents at dinner, “Today’s my birthday.”
“Oh,” his father said. “So it is. I forgot.”
“So did I.” his mother said.
“How could you forget ” Daniel asked. “There must be a reason.”
“Well, yes.” his father said. “We have a really good excuse for forgetting your birthday, Daniel. We didn’t remember your birthday because we were too busy.”
Poor Daniel! He never had a silly excuse for not doing something again.
56. 请把句(1)译成汉语。______________________________________________。
57. 请把句(2)改成同义句。I don’t know what _________ _________.
58. 请把句(3)改成间接引语。
He thought _______________________________________________________.
59. Did Daniel get his birthday present at last
__________________________.
60. What do you learn from the story
_________________________________________________________________.
五、交际运用（10分）
(A)
根据对话内容从方框内所给的选项中选出最佳答案，使对话完整，符合逻辑，句义通顺。注意：有多余选项。
A: Excuse me, 61
B: Yes, and you are……
A: 62 . This is my membership card. Would you please show me your passport
B: OK. 63
A: Welcome to Beijing, Miss White. I am so glad that you are the first guest I have received.
B: Thank you, Miss Chen. 64
A: Let me help you with your suitcase. Our car is waiting for us just at the entrance. 65
B: Thank you very much for your good service.
A: It’s a pleasure.
(B)
A: _________________________ (66)
B: I’m from….
C: Don’t tell him, Bruce. Let him guess.
A: Well, you are from Australia, aren’t you
B: Y___________________________ (67)
A: The way you speak. Bruce, you came here at a bad time of year, I’m afraid.
B:_____________________________ (68)
C: Because it’s winter now. The weather here is very cold, isn’t it
B: Yes. It’s very different from Australia at this time of year.
A: Really ________________________ (69)
B: It’s hot. It’s summer now!
C: Hmm, that’s interesting.
B: Would you like to go there
C: Yes, _________________. (70)
六、阅读表达（10分）
(A)
阅读下列短文，根据短文内容填写表格（每空限填一词）。
One of the most well-known directors of our time is Stephen Spielberg. He was born in Cincinnati on 18 December 1946. His father was an electric engineer and his mother was a performing pianist. His sister, Anne Spielberg, became a screenwriter who wrote the stories for many famous films.
Stephen had always wanted to be a director ever since he was a young boy. When he was just 13 years old, he made a 40-minute film. It won a local competition. Three years later, he produced a film called Firelight, which made one hundred dollars’ profit at the cinema in his hometown. Many of the ideas from this film were later used for one of his most famous films called Close Encounters of the Third Kind.
When he was 18 years old, he wanted to go to film school so that he could improve his skills and become an even better director. Unluckily, he was unsuccessful in getting a place at this school so he went to a university in California to study English. Even though he had failed to get into the school he wanted to go to, he didn’t let this stop him following his dream to become a great director.
Stephen Spielberg has directed many films since his first major film in 1976. He now owns many different businesses, most of which are involved in the film industry.
Year What happened
1946 71. Stephen Spielberg_________ ___________ in Cincinnati.
1959 72. Stephen Spielberg made a __________ film and it_________ a local competition.
1962 73. Stephen Spielberg produced a film called___________, from which many __________ were later used for Close Encounters of the Third Kind.
74. _______ Though he_____________ to get into the film school he wanted to go to, Stephen Spielberg didn’t give up his dream to become a great director.
1976 75. Stephen Spielberg____________ his ___________ major film.
(B)
请你根据某学校的一个广播通知，填写下面的海报。
May I have your attention, please I have an announcement to make．
Since the A/H1Nl flu is around us, we should pay great attention to our health and get some knowledge about the terrible disease．Our school has invited Doctor Li to give us a talk about how to prevent(预防)the flu．It will start at 4：00 on Friday afternoon in our school lecture hall. Students in Grade Seven are required to attend the talk．Please be there on time．
That’s all．Thank you.
七、书面表达（20分）
根据下面的4幅图画用英语写一篇短文,要求故事包括所有图画的主要内容,可以适当增加细节,使意思连贯。词数在100以上。
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Unit 8 Review答案
一、1. A句中谓语动词用了were，根据主谓一致原则，主语也应该是复数。
2. A on, above和over都表示“在……上方”. above指在上方的任意一点，表示在某物上的高低位置，不接触，其反义词是below；over一般指垂直方向，其反义词是under。on表示“在……上面”，且互相接触。
3. C reply to 回复。
4. C take one’s picture 给某人拍照。
5. C 比较级不能用very 修饰。Other后接可数名词复数； others后不接名词。
6. A across是指从表面穿过； through是指从内部穿过。
7. B keep in touch保持联系； 一般将来时的结构：will+动词原形。
8. A由题意知，是一个谚语。结交新朋友，不忘老朋友。
9. C be动词后接形容词作表语； as… as … 和……一样。
10. B 它可以从地板上吸走灰尘。
11. B由题意知应该用被动语态。主句是过去时，宾语从句的动词也变成过去的某种形式。
12. C令人吃惊的地方。
13. C过去分词作定语。
14. C由题意知应该用被动语态。
15. A由题意知应该用一般过去时的被动语态。Buy的过去分词是bought。
16. C由题意知应该用一般过去时的被动语态。cut的过去分词是cut。
17. B so much如此多的。
18. B由题意知应该用现在进行时。Fly的现在分词是 flying。
19. A you’d better (not) 后接动词原形。
20. A wear表示状态； put on表示动作； dress的宾语只能是人。
二、21 A结合上下文可知。
22 B由下文可知海浪很大。
23 D结合语境可猜出。
24 A结合语境可猜出。
25 B spend… in doing… 花费时间干某事。
26 D到达的三种说法：get to, arrive at/in, reach。
27 B结合语境可猜出。
28 C由下一句可知。
29 B结合语境可猜出。
30 D结合上下文可知。
三、 (A) 31 C由第二段第三句可知。
32 B由第二段第五行可知。
33 D由第三段最后一句可知。
34 A由第四段第一句可知。
35 B由最后一段可知。
(B) 36 C由第一段第三句可知。
37 B由第一段第三行可知。
38 A由第三段第二行可知。
39 B结合上下文可知。
40 B由最后三行可知。
(C) 41 C由第一段第二句可知。
42 A由第二段第三行可知。
43 B由第三段第四行可知。
44 A由第二段最后一句可知。
45 C结合上下文可知。
(D) 46 A由第一个广告可知。
47 B由第二个广告可知。
48 C由第三个广告可知。
49 B由第三个广告可知。
50 D看第二个广告可知。
四、 (A)51. other 52.with 53.in 54.or 55.if
(B) 56. 丹尼尔(Daniel)总是为忘记做事而找借口。（大意符合即可）
57. to do
58. (that) there would be a surprise for him after school.
59. No, he didn’t.
60. It’s not good to make excuses for doing something wrong. / Don’t make any excuses. / Tell the truth. / Don’t lie to others.(答案不唯一, 观点符合文章大意。)
五、 (A) 61-65 DBCEG
(B)66. Where are you from 67. How did you guess 68. Why do you say so 69. What’s the weather like in Australia now 70. I’d like to.
六、 (A) 71. was born 2. 40-minute; won 73. Firelight; ideas 74. 1964; failed 75. directed/ made/ produced; first
(B) 76—80 A/H1N1 flu; 4:00; hall; Doctor Li; Grade
七、One possible version:
One day, an old woman was crossing the street with a basket in her hand. She went to do some shopping. Just then a car came up and she was knocked down onto the ground. She was badly injured and couldn’t move a little. Luckily, a man, who was sweeping the street nearby, saw this. He ran quickly up to her and helped her stand up. Then he took her to the nearest hospital. There a doctor examined her carefully and gave her some medical care. After that, the dustman took her home. When the old woman’s daughter knew what had happened to her mother, she was moved deeply and thanked him very much.
if with in or other
A. Who are you
B. I’m an English guide from Beijing China Travel Service.
C. Here you are.
D. Are you Miss White from New York
E. I’m so lucky that I could meet my guide as soon as I got off the plane.
F. Can you help me
G. It will take us to the hotel.Unit 3 Never give up
单元词汇导学
1.give up放弃 2.next to紧挨着
3.learn/study online在线学习，网上学习 4.have/lose the ability to do sth.有……的能力
5.try to do sth.努力干某事 6.quit/give up doing sth. 放弃干某事
7.keep up with保持，赶上 8.happen to发生
9.harder and harder越来越难 10.become/be good at 擅长
11.at last/in the end/finally最后 12.admire sb. for …羡慕某人……
Lesson 1
学习点拨
当你用委婉的语气说“No”时，用下面用语交际：
I’m afraid not.
当你询问某人职业时，用以下用语交际：
What does she do /What is she /What’s your job
回答时用：sb +be+a/an+n.
例如：What does she do /She is a pilot.
名师授课
1. Wang Huansheng is ______ a headset.
A. wearing B. dressing C. putting on
解析 选A。 wear指“穿着……，戴着……”，表示状态；put on是“穿上……”，强调动作；dress有 “穿衣服，给……穿衣服，打扮”等含义。
2. Amy’s sister lives ______ her grandparents.
A. in B. / C. with
解析 选C。 live是不及物动词，所以live with sb.中的介词with不能省略。
课后作业
一、词汇
(A)根据英文及所给题意，填入恰当的词语
1. Wang Huansheng is sitting in a ______. (a chair with large wheels)
2. I ______ people who never give up. (to respect or like sb. Very much)
3. This term we will have a new _____.(a book used in schools)
4. You need great _____ to succeed in study. (firm decision to success)
5. Today many people study _____. (connected to and controlled by a computer)
(B)词形转换
1. She needs a lot of determination to ____ in studying. (success)
2. Tom has a ____, so he can’t hear. (handicapped)
3. Many people go shopping online by _____ the Internet. (use)
4. My father decided to give up _____ . (smoke)
5. The woman ____ son works in a computer company is Mrs White. (who)
二、单项选择
1. His sister got hurt in an accident, she lost the ability to walk, so she had to use the Internet _____.
A. to learning online B. study online C. to study online
2.—What’s the matter with Lucy
—During her trip to the Wild Animal Zoo, she happened to meet an accident and lost the ability _______.
—I’m sorry to hear that.
A. seeing B. to see C. see
3.—Though Ford didn’t get a good result, he didn’t quit _____.
—I’m glad to hear that. It’s never too late to learn.
A. study B. to study C. studying
4.—I hear Rock’s father has become very ill.
—I’m sorry to hear that. He smokes a lot, so I think he should give up _____.
A. smoking B. to smoke C. smoke
5.—Our English teacher said Helen Keller was a great woman with _____ determination.
—It’s true. My sister ______ her very much.
A. much, admires B. much, admire C. many, admire
6.—What do you often do _____ the Internet
—We often use computers _____ information.
A. in, to get B. on, to get C. through, getting
7.—Who is somebody ______ you admire
—My close friend Jim. I admire him ______ his honesty.
A. who, because B. that, for C. which, due to
8.—What does your father do
—________.
A. He is a pilot B. He often waters flowers C. He is very kind
9.—Would you like to play baseball with me
—_______. I have a lot of work to do.
A. No way B. No, I can’t C. I am afraid not
10. Wang Huansheng is a ______ student, he is sitting ______ a wheelchair.
A. handicap, on B. handicapped, on C. handicapped, in
三、交际运用
(A)
A: Hello! ( 1 )
B: Yes, what is it
A: (2 ) Could I use your bike again
B: Certainly. ( 3 ) Has your bike broken again
A: No, I've lost my key to the bike.
B: I see (4)
A: About four o'clock.
B: OK. Here is the key ( 5 )
A: Thank you. Bye!
A: What happened B. Is there anyone at home C: I'm sorry to trouble you. D. I hope everything goes well.E: Be sure to be there on time. F. What's the time G: Nice to meet you.
(B)
Jane: Mum, have you h (1 )the weather report today
Mum: Yes, what's wrong
Jane: What will the weather be 1 (2 ) tomorrow
Mum: The radio says there'll be r (3 ).
Jane: What a p (4 ) ! We can't go for a picnic.
Mum: You know sometimes the weatherman makes m ( 5 ) .
Jane: I hope he’s made a mistake a ( 6 ) this time.
Mum: Why not play computer games at home if it r (7 )
Jane: I'm afraid I p (8 ) reading to playing computer games.
Mum: OK. It's g (9) to do some reading o (10 ) rainy days.
Lesson 2
学习点拨
本课重点短语
1.have a handicap有残疾 2.get an education获得教育
3.have the ability to read Chinese有读中文的能力 4.try to stand up努力站起来
5.be/for free 免费 6.quit playing soccer 放弃踢足球
7.keep up with保持，赶上 8.give up放弃
9.happen to发生 10.a young man with a handicap一个身体有残疾的年轻人
11.become ill生病 12.lose the ability to walk失去行走的能力
13.at first起初 14.travel to and from school往返于学校之间
15.become harder and harder 变得越来越难 16.online schools网校
17.take classes online在线学习 18.help him with his classes 帮他补课
19.become good at 擅长 20.get good grades得到好成绩
21.finish school完成学业
名师授课
1.The baby boy is _________ up.
A. trying to stand B. trying standing C. tried to stand
解析 选A。try to do sth.和 try doing sth.意义不同。 try to do sth.意为“设法做某事，想办法做某事”； try doing sth.意为“尝试着做某事”。
2.______ computers, he got a good education.
A. Thanks for B. Thanks to C. Thank to
解析 选B。thanks to意为“多亏，由于”。
课后作业
1、 词汇
根据首字母和题意，填入恰当的词语
1. He has a good a____ towards his schoolwork.
2. If you keep on trying you will s_____ in the end.
3. It’s necessary to help the h________ children.
4. We al think she needs a p________ teacher.
5. The tennis star said it was time for him to q_____.
2、 单项选择
1.—My homework’s _______, but I hate it ______.
—Me, too. Never give up. There’s nothing impossible if you put your heart into it.
A. educational, terrible B. education, terribly C. educational, terribly
2. I need to make a new plan for the work. Could you tell me ______ I can do for preparation
A. how B. else what C. what else
3.—I think you have the ability ______ the hard work on time.
—I will try my best _____ it well.
A. to finish, to do B. finish, do C. to finish, doing
4.—My friend Tom failed in the Chinese exam, but he didn’t stop working hard and wanted to ______ his classmates.
—What a nice boy!
A. keep up with B. keep away from C. keep off
5.—________ your help, I succeeded in the concert.
—Congratulations.
A. Thanks to B. Thanks for C. Thanks
6.—What was the thing that you got ______
—A headset.
A. for free B. free C. in free
7. This is my private phone. ______ uses it.
A. Somebody else B. Anybody else C. Nobody else
8. It’s time ______ dinner, so we quit _____ soccer.
A. for, playing B. to, playing C. for, to play
9. She is going to the library to get _____ about flowers.
A. informations B. advices C. information
10.—Why do you admire Wang Huansheng
—I admire his “________” attitude.
A. never give up B. never-give-up C. never give-up
三、完型填空
Last month I went to New York. After I __1____ out of the station, I met a friend of ___2__ who works in a university(大学) in the town. Of course, we were very __3____. “What has happened to you, Eric ” I couldn’t help ____4__ out when I found that he was much ___5___ than before. “I’m twenty-five now, you know.” Eric said sadly. It’s time for me __6____. But I can’t find even one girl who can ___7__ my parents.” “Really ” I said____8__. “You’re an able(能干的) and good-looking man. And you are young. Most of the girls like you. I don’t think it __9____ to choose a good girl for you.” “But every girl whom I bring home to meet them, my mother doesn’t like.” “That’s easy,” I said to him. “You’d better ___10__ a girl who’s just like your mother.” “It was no use.” Eric said angrily. “My father did not like the girl who’s like my mother!”
1. A. went B. was going C. have gone D. has gone
2. A. me B. my C. mine D. myself
3. A. happy B. angry C. sorry D. sad
4. A. call B. to call C. calling D. called
5. A. thin B. thinner C. thinnest D. the thinnest
6. A. to have a wife B. to die C. to give birth D. to make a living
7. A. interest B. excite C. surprise D. please
8. A. happily B. angrily C. in surprise D. with a smile
9. A .interesting B. good C. difficult D. easy
10. A. find B. to find C. finding D. found
四、用方框中单词的正确形式填空
It was Sunday, Jim did not have to go to school. He _____ his father in the Garden. After two hours in the garden, He was _____. He went in the room and took out an ice cream from the fridge. He asked his father if he _____ thirsty. And if he said yes he would bring him a bottle of cola. But his father said no. And he told Jim _____ he was young he often helped his parents with the work on the farm. Sometimes the weather was hot and sometimes it was cold and windy. But he never gave up just because he was hungry or thirsty. He thought a real man could stand everything that others can’t bear.
Lesson 3
学习点拨
简单句的五种基本句型
绝大多数英语句子都是由这五个基本句式构成的，这五个基本句式如下：
1. S+V 此句型的特点是:谓语动词是不及物动词,本身能表达完整的意思,后面不需跟宾语,但有时可跟副词、介词短语等作状语。如:He laughed.
2. S+V+O 此句型的特点是:谓语动词是及物动词,不能表达完整的意思,必须跟有一个宾语。如:Our team beat all the others.
3. S+V+P 此句型的特点是:谓语动词是连系动词,不能表达完整的意思,必须加上一个表明主语特征、身份、状态的表语。常见的系动词有:be(是),become(成为),get(变得),turn(变得),grow(变得),look(看起来),feel(感到),smell(闻起来),taste(尝起来),sound(听起来),seem(似乎),keep(保持),stay(保持)等。如:The rose smells sweet.
4. S+V+INO+DO 此句型的特点是:谓语动词跟有两个宾语,这两个宾语都是动作的对象或承受者,其中指人的是间接宾语,指物的是直接宾语。当间接宾语放在直接宾语之后时,通常需要加介词for或to。可跟双宾语的动词有:answer,bring,buy,find,get,give,lend,make,pass,pay,send,show,sing,take,teach,
tell, write等。如:Mr. Li told us an interesting story.
5. S+V+O+OC此句型的特点是:谓语动词虽然跟有一个宾语,但意思还不完整,必须加上另外一个成分(宾语补足语)对宾语进行补充说明。可以用作宾语补足语的有:名词、形容词、不定式、动名词、分词、介词短语等。如:We must keep our school clean.
【注】S=Subject(主语); V=Verb(谓语动词);P=Predicative(表语); O=Object(宾语);
INO=Indirect Object(间接宾语);DO=Direct Object(直接宾语);
OC=Object Complement(宾语补足语)
名师授课
1. She studies online ______ the Internet.
A. through going B. by using C. with going
解析 选B。by和动名词连用， 表示通过某种手段、方式。
2. Wang Huansheng worked ______.
A. hardly B. hard C. harder
解析 选B。用作副词，hard意为“努力”。hardly是副词，意为“几乎不”。
课后作业
一、词性转换
1. He is a player of great _______. (able)
2. She is learning new computer ______. (skill)
3. Something is wrong with his legs. He can’t move around ______. (easy)
4. My school is _____ (education). I like my school very much.
5. My teacher is very good to us. She often helps us ____. (kind)
二、单项选择
1. We all admire his success, but we should learn from his _____ and action at the same time.
A. determine B. decision C. determination
2. I need to search some information on the Internet. Could you tell me ____ use the computer
A. how to B. how I can C. both A and B
3.—What do you want to do _____ the Internet
—I want to listen to some pop music, download the information I need and chat with my friends.
A. by use B. with using C. by using
4. It’s none of your business, it’s a ______ conversation.
A. private B. own C. myself
5. Wang Huansheng is a _____ man. We should learn his good attitude _____ study.
A. succeed, of B. successful, to C. success, about
6.—Did you have a _____ sleep
—Yes, I slept very _______ .
A. good, good B. well, good C. good, well
7.—Do you have computer class _______
—Of course not.
A. everyday B. every day C. perday
8.—Why does he often ______ a headset
—He has a handicap, so he can’t _______.
A. wear, hear B. put on, listen C. dress, listen
9.—Smoking is bad for our health. You should ______.
—I realize that it’s a bad habit. I have made up my mind to _____.
A. give up it, quit smoking B. give it up, quit smoking C. give up, quit to smoke
10. Maybe there is something wrong with my car. I can’t _____ it.
A. move B. begin C. start
三、完形填空
Thomas Edison wore 1 caps during his life, 2 thinking caps, the caps of many famous schools and colleges. But the most important cap was his thinking cap. It had saved his mother’s 3 . One day when he was a boy his mother fell ill. The doctor wanted 4 her an operation (手术). But the light in the room was not bright. Edison quickly 5 his thinking cap and he found a way 6 his mother. Edison was good at 7 his hands and his head. He was the most interested 8 electricity. We can see his 9 everywhere because they are very common. They were 10 by Edison’s thinking cap.
1. A. much B. many C. a lot D. lot of
2. A. as B. for C. such as D. was like
3. A. living B. life C. lives D. alive
4. A. give B. to give C. to gave D. give
5. A. take off B. put off C. put down D. put on
6. A. save B. to save C. saving D. saved
7. A. use B. make C. using D. making
8. A. at B. of C. in D. on
9. A. inventors B. invent C. invents D. inventions
10. A. inventing B. invented C. made D. making
四、阅读理解
（A)
阅读短文，判断正（T）误（F）
Three things are necessary for us to keep alive (活的). They are air, water and food. We eat food two or three times every day. We breathe (呼吸) air continually (不断地) day and night. If a man does not eat any food, he can live for about three weeks; if he is stopped from drinking, he can keep alive for about three days, but if he doesn’t breathe, he can keep alive for only about three minutes. So we see that breathing is more important than drinking, and drinking is more important than eating.
1. We can’t live without air, water and food.
2. A man can keep alive for about twenty-one days if he has water to drink and air to breathe.
3. He can live for about three days if he only drinks water.
4. If he is stopped from breathing, He’ll die in a moment.
5. Food is the least important of the three.
（B）
Many years ago, there was a family named Franklin. They lived in Boston. There were five girls and six boys in the family. On a January day in 1706 another baby boy was born. The boy’s mother and her husband gave the boy a name-Benjamin.
Benjamin was the brightest of all the children. He could read when he was five and he could write by the time he was seven. When he was eight, he was sent to school.
In school, Benjamin had been good at reading and writing but not good at maths.
He read all his father’s books. And whenever (无论何时) he had a little money, he spent it on a book. He liked books. They told him how to do something. At that time he invented the paddles (桨形工具) for swimming.
1. The Franklins lived in .
A. England B. America C. France D. Australia
2. There were children in the family.
A. five B. six C. eleven D. twelve
3. Benjamin was born in the month of the year 1706.
A. first B. sixth C. seventh D. fifth
4. Benjamin maths when he was in school.
A. did well in B. did well at C. didn’t do well in D. didn’t do well at
5. Benjamin much money books.
A. spent, on B. cost, buying C. took, buy D. pay, off
Lesson 4
学习点拨
中考英语作文常用句型举例
　　1. …是很容易证明的。 It can be easily proved (that)子句
例︰时间最珍贵是很容易证明的。
It can be easily proved that nothing is more precious than time.
　　2. 就我的看法…；我认为… In my opinion， … = As far as I am concerned， …
例︰就我的看法打电动玩具既花费时间也有害健康。
In my opinion， playing video games not only takes much time but is also harmful to health.
3. (A) 每个人都知道… Everyone knows (that)子句
(B) 就我所知… As far as my knowledge is concerned， …
例︰就我所知下列方法对我帮助很大。
As far as my knowledge is concerned， the following ways are of great help to me.
4. 毫无疑问地… There is no doubt (that)子句
例︰毫无疑问地近视在我国的年轻人中是一个严重的问题。
There is no doubt that near-sightedness is a serious problem among the youth of our country.
5. 根据我个人经验… According to my personal experience， …
= Based on my personal experience， …
例︰根据我个人经验微笑已带给我许多好处。
According to my personal experience， smile has done me a lot of good.
6. (A) 随着人口的增加… With the increase/growth of the population， …
(B) 随着科技的进步， … With the advance of science and technology， …
例︰随着台湾经济的快速发展许多社会问题产生了。
With the rapid development of Taiwan’s economy， a lot of social problems have come to pass.
名师授课
1. Who is a person _____ you admire 你敬佩的人是谁
A. what B. that C. which
解析 选B。that you admire是定语从句，对先行词person进行限定，说明是哪一个人。
2. It became harder and harder for him to go to school, _____ he didn’t quit studying.
A. so B. and C. but
解析 选C。本题考查并列连词的用法，根据语境应表示转折关系。
课后作业
一、词汇
根据首字母及题意，填入恰当的词语
1. This is an easy game to play. No s_____ is required.
2. I went to bed early because I was i____ yesterday.
3. I w_____ glasses for reading.
4. His jokes always make me l_____ .
5. Can you give me some i____ about evening classes in Canada
二、单项选择
1.—Doing homework with loud music is a bad hobby. You’d better ____ .
—I see. I won’t.
A. give up it B. give it in C. give it up
2.—I heard that you had quitted _____ computer games these days.
—Yes, I want to study hard from now on.
A. playing B. to play C. play
3.—My baby, don’t go ____ the street when the traffic light is red. It’s too dangerous .
—Sorry, I won’t.
A. across B. through C. over
4.—Who is a person _____ you admire
—One person that I admire is Yang Liwei.
A. who B. which C. that
5. This is the best book _____ I have ever read. I am deeply moved by the story _____ was written in the book.
A. which, that B. that, which C. who, which
6.—Is there _____ that you admire, Mike
—Of course. I admire Wang Liqin.
A. anyone B. someone C. any one
7.—I admire your father for his success _____ business.
—So do I.
A. on B. in C. to
8.—Can you tell me something about Hainan
—I think you can find information _____ the Internet.
A. with B. in C. on
9. Though the Internet is good for children, they shouldn’t __ lots of time ___ it.
A. spend, in B. take, in C. spend, on
10.—You look very ____today.
—Thank you. With the help of your medicine, I feel much better.
A. good B. well C. nice
三、句型转换
1.She also helps me with my homework.（同义句转换）
She also helps me ____ ____ my homework.
2.He could not have finished school without the online school. （同义句转换）
____ _____ the online school, he could have finished school.
3.We go to school every day.（对话线部分提问）
____ ____ do you go to school
4.She usually sleeps well. （对话线部分提问）
____ _____ she usually sleep
5.I finished my homework. （对话线部分提问）
____ ____ you finish
四、阅读表达
阅读下面短文，在表格内的空白处填入合适的答案(每格词数不限)
The Internet has changed our habits, including our habit of sending greeting cards. There are many e-card websites that make it so easy to find the right greeting cards. They have greatly changed the way we send greetings to each other.
Our lives have become so busy that we have limited personal time. These e-card websites have allowed everyone to easily share their feelings and emotions(感情) with the people they love. They contain(包括) plenty of greeting cards that can be used immediately. The users can choose any card they like, from festival greetings to birthday wishes. In fact, e-cards are perfect for any event. That’s why more and more people like to send e-cards. If the users are interested in making their own greeting cards on the internet, they can create a card within only a few minutes.
Another benefit(好处) of e-card websites is that they have made it possible for you to send top quality cards to your beloved (心爱的) ones and surprise them with cheerful greetings. They allow you to send your greetings on a specific(特定的) date. So you can plan for the occasion(场合)when you want to send the card. For example, you can send your e-card on a certain day and then visit the person with some flowers the next day. This will surely create a good impression(印象)on the person you love.
We have never forgotten the importance of saying sorry to our beloved ones. But sometimes we fail to do so because, we are not brave enough to face those we hurt. Some e- cards on these websites allow us to express our feelings in a more thoughtful way.
Although some people still would rather buy traditional cards in the shops for the persons they love, especially when they want the cards to last a long time, more and more people are choosing to send greetings on the Internet.
Title: Sending E-cards on the Internet
Introduction to the topic The way we send greetings to each other (1) because of the e-card websites.
Reasons why more and more people are using e-cards Plenty of greeting cards on the websites make it possible for people to (2) with others easily.Users can choose or make their own e-cards, and it doesn’t take (3)_____________time.Users can plan for the occasion and help create a good impression on the persons they love.E-cards can help you to say (4) to those you hurt in a thoughtful way.
Conclusion E-cards are becoming more and more (5) .
单元测试
一、单项选择(20分)
1. Winter is coming, the weather is becoming ______ and ______.
A. warmer, warmer B. cold, cold C. colder, colder
2. —I feel so sad that I almost lost the confidence with my study.
—Try your best. I’m sure you’ll ______ your classmates.
A. keep on with B. keep up on C. keep up with
3. Nowadays we can get knowledge in many ways. We can not only study from books, but also study ______.
A. at school B. from TV C. on line
4. She is a girl with a handicap, so she has to sit ______ and move with difficulty.
A. on bed B. in a wheelchair C. on the chair
5.—Mary’s father has changed his job, so she has to go to another school. Can she get on well with her new friends
—I’m sure she has the ability ______ the problem.
A. solving B. to solve C. solve
6. I often use my computer ______, while some of my friends prefer to play computer games.
A. play chess B. to take classes online C. go shopping
7. Jim was afraid of skiing, but after a year’s practicing, he became ______ skiing than before.
A. very good at B. better at C. the best at
8. —Let’s run! —Why
—Didn’t you hear the bell It’s time ______.
A. for us to begin the class B. for begin the class C. to class
9. Mother is the greatest woman in the world, she is very tired every day, so why not ______ some housework
A. help her do B. help her with C. A and B
10. If you don’t go to college, you will not get ______.
A. a good education B. an education C. good grades
11. —How can I learn English well
—If you want to learn English well, you should have listening, speaking, reading and writing ______.
A. ability B. able C. abilities
12. —We’ll have a picnic in the mountains tomorrow. Could you join us
—______. Tomorrow is my father’s birthday.
A. No, thanks B. I’m afraid not C. No, I can’t
13. —Who is Wang Huangsheng —He is a boy ______ a handicap.
A. who has B. who have C. who is
14. —What is your father —He is a ______ and ______ on a farm.
A. farmer, works B. good farmer, work C. farmer, working
15. —May I speak to you ______ private —Of course.
A. of B. in C. on
16. —I really ______ Liu Qian’s magic skills. —Me, too. ______ wonderful magic tricks!
A. admire, What B. like, How C. enjoy, What a
17. —Who is someone ______ you admire —Yao Ming. I admire his attitude.
A. which B. that C. whom
18. —______ I was very bad at my maths, but I kept on studying, ______ I got good grades.
—Congratulations!
A. At first, at last B. At the first, at the last C. First, last
19. —Work experience is an important ______ experience for young people. Do you agree with me
—Yes, I really agree with you.
A. education B. educational C. educationally
20. —How much ______ for this sweater —It’s free.
A. does it take B. do you pay C. is it cost
二、完型填空（共10分）
Mrs Black was a famous musician several years ago. She taught 21 at a school and her students did well in their lessons. They liked her very much. Now the old woman stays at home with her husband. The old man looks after his wife well and she is 22 worried about anything. And she is very 23 .
Just like some old people, Mrs Black finds that her 24 is falling. Sometimes she forgets what she did or will do. It often gets her in trouble. Her 25 noticed it and asked her to see the famous doctor who lives in the capital. He bought two tickets 26 London and told her to put 27 into her handbag while she was playing the piano . The next morning, when they got to the 28 just on catch the plane, Mrs Black said, “I wish we’d brought the 29 with us.”
“Don’t be a fool, dear!” said Mr Black .”We are not going to hold a corner, but to see a 30 .”
21.A. Chinese B. music C. math D. P. E.
22.A. always B. often C. never D. sometimes
23.A. sorry B. worried C. sad D. happy
24. A. sight（视力） B. hearing C. interest D. memory
25. A. husband B. her daughter C. son D. student
26. A. for B. in C. from D. of
27. A. it B. them C. this D. that
28. A. airport B. bus stop C. station D. harbour(海港)
29. A. money B. music C. tickets D. piano
30. A. doctor B. film C. play D. house
三、阅读理解（20分）
（A）
Alan worked in an office in the city. He worked very hard and really wanted to take a holiday.
　　He usually went to the seaside, but one day he saw an ad（广告） in a newspaper. " Enjoy country life. Spend a few weeks at Willow Farm. Good food, fresh air, horse riding, walking, fishing. Good prices (价格)."
　　"This sounds like a good idea," he thought. "I'll spend a month at Willow Farm. I'll enjoy horse riding, walking and fishing. They'll make a change from sitting by the seaside."
　　Four days later he returned home.
　　"What's wrong with Willow Farm " his friend Jack asked him. " Didn't you enjoy country life "
　　"Country life was fine," Alan said, "but there was another problem."
　　"Oh, what "
　　"Well, the first day I was there a sheep died, and we had roast mutton (烤羊肉) for dinner."
　　"Fresh meat is the best."
　　"I know, but on the second day a cow died, and we had roast beef for dinner."
　　"Lucky you!"
　　"You don't understand," Alan said. "On the third day a pig died and we had roast pork for dinner."
　　"A different roast every day," Jack said.
　　" Let me finish," Alan said, " on the fourth day the farmer died and I didn't dare to stay for dinner!"
　　31. Where did Alan work He worked ___.
　　A. on a farm B. at a school
　　C. in a restaurant D. in an office in a city
　　32. Where did Alan usually go to spend his holiday
　　He usually spent his holiday ___.
　　A. by the seaside B. in the country
　　C. in the mountains D. on an island
　　33. Why did Alan decide to spend his holiday at Willow Farm Because ___.
　　A. he lived near there
　　B. he had a good friend there
　　C. he thought it would make a change from sitting by the seaside
　　D. he wanted to enjoy the fresh air in the country
　　34. How many days did he stay on the farm
　　A. A few days. B. A week. C. Three days. D. Four days.
　　35. What made Alan return so soon
　　A. He fell ill.
　　B. The air there was not fresh.
　　C. The prices were too high.
　　D. He was afraid that they would have the dead man for dinner.
(B)
More than seven hundred years ago, the Prince of Wales had a very big and brave dog called Gelert.
　　One day the Prince wanted to go hunting with his men. He told his dog to stay at home and look after his baby son. The baby was in a wooden cradle, which was like a small bed.
　　When the Prince came back from hunting, Gelert ran out to meet his master. He wagged his tail and jumped up to put his paws on the Prince's chest. Then the Prince saw the blood on Gelert's jaws and head.
　　"What have you done " the Prince said. He rushed into his house and looked for his baby son. The cradle was lying on its side on the floor. The clothes were torn and there was blood on them.
　　"So you have killed my son " the Prince said angrily. "You unfaithful dog!" He took out his sword and killed the dog. Just as Gelert was dying, he managed to bark. Then the Prince heard a baby call to the dog.
　　The Prince ran out of the house and saw his son lying on the ground unhurt. Near him was a dead wolf. Then the Prince knew that Gelert had defended the baby and killed the wolf.
　　The Prince ran back into the house but he was too late. Gelert was dead. The Prince was very sad indeed. Tears ran down his face when he realized he had killed his faithful friend. The Prince carried the body of his brave dog to the top of a mountain and buried him there. After this, the Prince never smiled again. Every morning at dawn, he walked up the mountain and stood by the dog's grave for a few minutes.
　　If you go to Mount Snowdon in Wales, people will show you where Gelert is buried. There is a sign by his grave. It reminds people of a brave and faithful dog.
　　36. Gelert was the dog of the Prince of ___.
　　A. Scotland B. England
　　C. Ireland D. Wales
　　37. The Prince told the dog to _____ when he was leaving.
　　A. watch the door
　　B. take care of his baby at home
　　C. welcome his friends
　　D. stop the strangers
　　38. The dog was very ____ when his master came back from hunting.
　　A. glad B. fearful C. afraid D. tired
　　39. The Prince was surprised to see blood on Gelert's ____.
　　A. jaws B. paws C. head D. Both A and C.
　　40. The Prince never smiled again because __
　　A. the wolf was killed by Gelert
　　B. he had buried the dog on the top of mountain
　　C. he had killed his faithful friend Gelert
　　D. Gelert had killed his baby son
(C)
A friend of mine named Paul received an expensive car from his brother as a Christmas present．On Christmas Eve when Paul came out of his office，a street urchin was walking around the shining car．“Is this your car，Paul？”he asked．
　　Paul answered，“Yes，my brother gave it to me for Christmas．”The boy was surprised．“You mean your brother gave it to you and it didn’t cost you nothing？Boy，I wish…”He hesitated．
　　Of course Paul knew what he was going to wish for．He was going to wish he had a brother like that. But what the boy said surprised Paul greatly.
　　“I wish,”the boy went on，“that I could be a brother like that．”Paul looked at the boy in surprise, then he said again, “Would you like to take a ride in my car？”
　　“Oh yes，I’d love that．”
　　After a short ride，the boy turned and with his eyes shining，said，“Paul，would you mind driving in front of my house？”
　　Paul smiled a little．He thought he knew what the boy wanted．He wanted to show his neighbours that he could ride home in a big car. But Paul was wrong again. “Will you stop where those two steps are？” the boy asked．
　　He ran up to the steps. Then in a short while Paul heard him coming back, but he was not coming fast. He was carrying his little crippled brother. He sat him down on the step and pointed to the car.
　　“There he is, Buddy, just like I told you upstairs. His brother gave it to him for Christmas and it didn’t cost him a cent. And some day I’m going to give you one just like it…then you can see for yourself all the nice things in the Christmas windows that I’ve been trying to tell you about.”
　　Paul got out and lifted the boy to the front seat of his car. The shining-eyed older brother climbed in beside him and the three of them began an unforgettable holiday ride.
　　注：urchin顽童 hesitate犹豫 neighbour邻居 crippled残疾的 cent美分
　　41．The street urchin was very surprised when ________．
　　A．Paul received an expensive car
　　B．Paul told him about the car
　　C．he saw the shining car
　　D．he was walking around the car
　　42．From the story we can see the urchin ________．
　　A．wished to give his brother a car
　　B．wanted Paul’s brother to give him a car
　　C．wished he could have a brother like Paul’s
　　D．wished Paul could be a brother like that
　　43．The urchin asked Paul to stop his car in front of his house ________．
　　A．to show his neighbours the big car
　　B．to show he had a rich friend
　　C．to let his brother ride in the car
　　D．to tell his brother about his wish
　　44．We can infer（推断）from the story that ________．
　　A．Paul couldn’t understand the urchin
　　B．the urchin had a deep love for his brother
　　C．the urchin wished to have a rich brother
　　D．the urchin’s wish came true in the end
　　45．The best name of the story is _________．
　　A．A Christmas Present
　　B．A Street Urchin
　　C．A Brother Like That
　　D．An Unforgettable Holiday Ride
(D)
This is a talk by a London taxi(出租车)driver.
　　"I've been a taxi driver for nearly ten years. Most London taxi drivers have their own taxis."
　　"It's a nice job most of time. You meet a lot of people. I always work at night, because there is too much traffic during the day. I live twenty miles(英里)outside London and I go to work at 5:30 in the afternoon."
　　"I usually go home between 2 and 3 in the morning."
　　"Some very strange things happened late at night .The other day I was taking a woman home from a party .She had her little dog with her. When we got to her house, she found that she had lost her key. So I waited in the car with the dog while she climbed in through the windows."
　　"I waited and waited. After half an hour of ringing the bell I decided to find out what was going on .I tied the dog to a tree and started to climb in through the window. The next thing I knew was that the police came. They thought I was a thief(小偷).
　　Luckily the woman came downstairs(下楼).She must have gone to sleep and forgotten about me and the dog!"
　　46.The driver always worked at night because it was easier to _____.
　　A. drive B. make money  C. climb in through the window
　　D. meet a lot of people
　　47.The woman climbed in through the window because _____.
　　A. she wanted to have a sleep
　　B. her husband didn't open the door for her
　　C. she didn't want to pay the driver
　　D. she couldn't find her key
　　48.The story happened _____.
　　A. early in the morning B. late at night
　　C.20 miles outside London D. near the police station
　　49.Which of the following is wrong
　　A. The driver worked until between 2 and 3 in the morning.
　　B. The police made a mistake.
　　C. The woman had no money to pay the driver.
　　D. The woman had forgotten about the driver and the dog.
　　50.The driver climbed in through the window to .
　　A. get money from the woman
　　B. return the dog to the woman
　　C. see what was happening in the house
　　D. phone the police
　
四、任务型阅读（10分）
(A)
Children are amazing! They pick up language so naturally and easily．Have you ever wondered why It's because of the way they learn．
Children learn by simply doing what comes naturally--they listen，copy，and communicate．Let's take a closer look at how children learn language．Perhaps we can discover a better，more “natural” way to learn English．
Listen as often as possible
When people talk to children，they often use simple words that children can understand．That's really important to the children's language development．In order to learn，children must be able to understand what they hear．If they don't understand it，it's just meaningless noise．
Listen to radio or TV programs that use English at your level．If you can't understand every word or sentence，don't give up．Just pay attention to what you can understand，And listen as often as you can．
Be a Copycat
Children like to copy their parents，their friends and even the TV．（the，teaches，this，how，pronounce，them，language，to）．As you listen to English，repeat what you hear as much as you can．
Use English to communicate
Children don't practice grammar rules．They use language to talk about things that interest them．This helps them learn to express themselves．They don't worry about their small vocabulary or poor grammar．They find ways to say what they want and they do it successfully．
So look for chances to talk with people in English．If you can't find a foreigner to talk to，talk with other English students instead．Start an English discussion group and chat about music，movies and so on．Don't worry about making mistakes．You can learn English better by correcting mistakes．
51．Children learn English by __________________，copying and communicating．
52．请把文中划线的句子 “When people talk to children，they often use simple words that children can understand．” 译成汉语。
53．请把文中括号内的词组成一个句子。
54．请写出文中划线词 “This” 所指代的句子。
55．When learning language，do we need to worry about making mistakes Why
(B)
There was a little dog in the street. He liked___56___ the children play. One day, he followed two children home from school. Suddenly, he saw the __57___ house was on fire. He knew he needed to help them right away. So he ran down the street to the fire station,__58__ all the way.
When he arrived at the fire station，he saw the firemen leaving. He tried to run after them, but he could not keep up. By the time he got back to the house, the street was filled with people. He looked for the children but could not see them. He was very ___59___.
The firemen worked very hard till the fire was out. A fireman ___60___ Jack noticed the little dog under a tree, looking across the street at the burned house.
Jack thought, “The dog could cheer up the kids.” So he brought the little dog over to the children. The little dog could not believe his eyes! The children were safe! He rushed to them. The children held the little dog and felt a little better.
五、交际运用（10分）
(A)
A: Hello! ( 61 )
B: Yes, what is it
A: (62 ) Could I use your bike again
B: Certainly. ( 63 ) Has your bike broken again
A: No, I've lost my key to the bike.
B: I see (64)
A: About four o'clock.
B: OK. Here is the key ( 65 )
A: Thank you. Bye!
A: What happened B. Is there anyone at home C: I'm sorry to trouble you. D. I hope everything goes well.E: Be sure to be there on time. F. What's the time G: Nice to meet you.
(B)
A: Hi, Tom! Come in, please.
B: Hi! _____________________________________________________ (66)
A: I’m looking for information about Sydney on the Internet.
I’m going to Sydney for my holiday.
B: _______________________________________________________________ (67)
A: No, but my father has been there twice. He told me there
were many places of interest there
B: _______________________________________________________________ (68)
A: I’m leaving at 9 a.m on Friday, July.
B: _______________________________________________________________ (69)
A: I will go there by plane.
B: Have you ever flown in a plane
A: _______________________________________________________________ . (70)
B: You must be excited when you fly in a plane.
A: Really, I can’t for it.
六、阅读表达（10分） (A)
In 1826, a Frenchman named Niepce needed pictures for his business. But he was not a good artist, so he invented a very simple camera. He put it in a window of his house and took a picture of his garden. That was the first photo.
The next important date in the history of photography (摄影) was in 1837. That year, Daguerre, another Frenchman, took a picture of his reading room. He used a new kind of camera in a different way. In his picture you could see everything very clearly, even the smallest thing. This kind of photo was called Daguerreotype.
Soon, other people began to use Daguerre’s way. Travelers brought back wonderful photos from all around the world. People took pictures of famous buildings, cities and mountains.
In about 1840, photography was developed. Then photographers could take pictures of people and moving things. That was not simple. The photographers had to carry a lot of film and other machines. But this did not stop them, for example, some in the United States worked so hard. Mathew Brady was a famous American photographer. He took many pictures of great people. The pictures were unusual because they were very lifelike (栩栩如生的).
Photography also became a kind of art by the end of the 19th century. Some photos were not just copies of the real world. They showed ideas and feelings, like other art forms.
根据短文回答下列问题
71. Who took the first photo
72. The Daguerreotype was a kind of photo, wasn’t it
73. If a photographer wanted to take pictures of moving things in 1840, what did he have to do
74. Why was Mathew Brady famous
75. When did photography become a kind of art
(B)
昨天你叔叔打电话来，请你找几个朋友去他农场收桔子，于是今天早上6点，你和朋友就坐汽车出发了。一到农场便开始干活，树上挂满了桔子，你们又摘桔子又装车，忙完后在那儿吃了午餐，还吃了不少桔子，下午坐车回家。你虽然忙了一天，却感到非常快乐。时间和天气情况：2003年10月1日星期天睛。
请根据上述内容写一篇日记。
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
七、书面表达（20分）
六月六日是“全国爱眼日”。为此，某中学生英文报拟组织一次征文活动。请你结合生活实际写一篇题目为《如何保护眼睛》的征文稿，内容要点包括：
1、眼睛的重要性；
2、保护眼睛的措施：
（1）不要长时间看书报；
（2）不要在太强或者太弱的光线下看书；
（3）坚持做眼保健操；
……
注 意：词数：80～100；不要逐条翻译，可适当发挥。
How to Protect Our Eyes
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Unit 3答案
Lesson 1
一、(A) 1. wheelchair 2. admire 3. textbook 4. determination 5. online
(B) 1. succeed 2. handicap 3. using 4. smoking 5. whose
二、1. C “use sth. to do sth.”是固定短语。
2. B lose the ability to do sth.是固定短语。
3. C quit doing sth.是固定用法。
4. A give up doing sth. 是固定用法。
5. A determination是不可数名词，而且My sister是第三人称单数，所以选A。
6. B on the Internet和use sth. to do sth. 是固定短语。
7. B that you admire是定语从句，因为先行词somebody指人，所以关系词用who/that。又because 后面只能跟句子，所以选B。
8. A问句是询问人的职业。
9. C回答要委婉，有礼貌。
10. C据题意，第一个空要填形容词；第二个空是坐在轮椅里，而不是坐在轮椅上。
三、(A) 1-5 BCAFD
(B) 1.heard 2.like 3.rain 4.pity 5.mistakes 6.again 7.rains 8.prefer 9.good 10.on
Lesson 2
一、1. attitude 2. succeed 3. handicapped 4. private 5. quit
二、1. C据题意，第一个空要填形容词；第二个空要填副词。
2. C else必须放在特殊疑问词的后面。
3. A have the ability to do sth.和 try one’s best to do sth.都是固定短语。
4. A A项 是赶上的意思；B,C是远离的意思；由题意知选A。
5. A thanks to是多亏，幸亏的意思。
6. A for free免费的，是固定短语。
7. C由题意可知。
8. A It’s time for sth.是固定句型；quit doing sth.是固定用法。
9. C information和 advice都是不可数名词。
10. B
三、1. B由第一句知要用一般现在时。
2. C a friend of mine我的一个朋友。
3. A我们都很高兴。
4. C can’t help doing sth.忍不住要干某事。
5. B 由题意知，应用比较级。
6. A由上下文可知，到了该找对象的时候了。
7. D please sb.让某人高兴。
8. C由题意可知。
9. C由题意可知。
10. A you’d better 后接动词原形。
四、1 helped 2 tired 3 felt 4 when 5 windy
Lesson 3
一、1. ability 2. skills 3. easily 4. educational 5.kindly
二、1. C由题意可知。
2. C how I can use the computer是宾语从句，用陈述句语序；也可简化为how to use the computer。
3. C by doing意思是通过做某事。
4. A由题意可知。
5. B 据题意，第一个空要填形容词。
6. C good是形容词， well是副词；修饰名词用形容词，修饰动词用副词。
7. B由题意可知，是每天上课。Everyday意思是日常的，只能作定语。
8. A戴着耳机，表状态，用wear；不能听见，表结果，用hear。
9. B 动副短语后接宾语时，如果宾语是代词，代词只能放中间；quit doing sth.是固定用法。
10. C 在这里start是发动的意思。
三、1.B many后接可数名词复数。
2. C such as例如，表示列举。
3. B 由下文可知。
4. B want to do sth.是固定短语。
5. D take off脱下，起飞； put off推迟； put down放下；put on穿上，戴上。
6. B a way to do sth.一个做某事的方法。
7. C be good at doing 擅长做某事。
8. C be interested in 对某事感兴趣。
9. D 我们到处都可以看到他的发明。需要填名词。
10. B be invented被发明，是被动语态。
四、（A)1.T 由第一句可知。
2. T 由第三行可知。
3. F没有空气活不到三天。
4. T 由倒数第二句可知。
5. T 由最后一句可知。
（B)1.B 由第一段第二句可知。
2. D 5+6+1=12。
3. A 由第一段第二行可知。
4. C 由第三段可知。
5. A spend…on…,固定搭配。
Lesson 4
一、1. skill 2. ill 3. wear 4. laugh 5. information
二、1. C give up放弃，动副短语后接宾语时，如果宾语是代词，代词只能放中间。
2. A quit doing sth.是固定用法。
3. A across是横穿； through是从内部穿越。
4. C在who 引导的特殊疑问句中出现定语从句时，如果先行词是人，关系词只能用that。
5. B先行词是物时，关系词可以用that或which，当先行词前有最高级修饰时，只能用that。
6. A由题意可知，需要填任何人。Any one是任何一个的意思，不一定指人。
7. B我羡慕你父亲在生意上的成功。
8. C在网上找到有关的信息。
9. C spend some time on sth.在……上花费时间。
10. B look是系动词，后接形容词作表语；well当身体健康讲时，是形容词。
三、1. to, do 2. Thanks, to 3. How, often 4. How, does 5. What, did
四、 1. has been greatly changed/is different from before/is changing
2. communicate/ share their feelings and emotions
3. a long/much/too much
4. sorry
5. popular/welcome/fashionable
单元测试
一、1. C由题意知，是越来越冷。The+比较级，the+比较级，表示越……越……。
2. C keep up with是固定短语，意思是赶上。
3. C study on line 网上学习。
4. B由题意知，是坐在轮椅里。
5. B have the ability to do sth.是固定短语。
6. B use sth. to do sth.是固定短语。
7. B由下文的than可以看出，应该用比较级。
8. A It’s time for sb. to do sth.是固定句型
9. C help sb. (to) do sth.帮助某人干某事； help sb. with sth.在某方面帮助某人。
10. A 由题意可知。
11. C由题意可知，是指听、说、读、写四方面的能力。
12. B对别人的邀请不能接受时，要委婉的拒绝，说恐怕不能。
13. A身体有残障，所以排除C。当关系词在句中作主语，先行词是单数时，定语从句中的谓语用单数。
14. A他是一个农民，在农场上工作。Work要用第三人称单数。
15. B 固定用法。
16. A如果感叹的是形容词，要用how来感叹。
17. B在who 引导的特殊疑问句中出现定语从句时，如果先行词是人，关系词只能用that。
18. A at first 首先，at last 最后。
19. B修饰名词用形容词。
20. B pay for为……而付款，是固定短语。
二、21.B 根据上句“a famous musician”，所以选music
22.C 根据上下句可知。
23.D 根据上下句Mrs Black很“幸福”。
24.D 通过下文“Sometimes she forgets what she did or will do.”可知。
25.A通过下文“He bought two tickets”可知。
26.A for 表示目的。
27.B 这里them 代替two tickets。
28.A 通过下文“just on catch the plane”可知。
29.D通过上文“while she was playing the piano”可知。
30.A 通过上文她是去看医生的。
三、(A)31. D 由第一句可知。
32. A由第二段第一句可知。
33. C由第三段最后一句可知。
34. D 由第四段可知。
35. D由文章最后一句可知。
(B)36. D由第一句可知。
37. B由第二段第二句可知。
38. A由第三段第二行可知。
39. D 由第三段最后一句可知。
40. C由倒数第二段可知。
(C) 41．B由第二段可知。
42．A由第四段第一句可知。
43．D由倒数第二、三段可知。
44．B 通读全文可体会到。
45．C这句话最能体现文章的中心。
　 (D) 46 A由第四行第一句可知。
47 D由第九行开头可知。
48 B由第七行第一句可知。
49 C由文章最后两段可知。
50 C由倒数第二段第二句可知。
四、(A)51．1istening
52．当人们和孩子说话时，他们经常用孩子能理解的简单话语。
53．This teaches them how to pronounce the language．
54．They use language to talk about things that interest them．
55．此题为主观题，凡合理的答案均可得分。如：
No．You can learn English better by correcting mistakes．
No．It can help you learn English better．
(B)56 watching 57 children’s 58 barking 59 worried 60 named
五、(A)61-65 B C A F D
(B)66. What are you doing now 67. Have you ever been to Sydney before 68. When are you leaving
69. How will you go there 70. No, never. / No, I haven’t. / Not yet.
六、(A)71. Niepce. / Niepce took the first photo.
72. Yes, it was.
73. He had to carry a lot of film and other machines with him.
74. Because he took many unusual pictures of great people.
75. By the end of the 19th century.
注：只要学生答案符合文章原意，教师即可酌情赋分。
(B) October 1st, 2003 Sunday Sunny
　　My uncle called me yesterday. He said on the phone that he had an orange
harvest. He needed some help. He asked me to go there with my friends.
　　This morning we left home at 6:00. We went there by bus. The trees on
the farm were really full of oranges. When we got there, we began to work
at once. We picked a lot of oranges and put them in the boxes. Some strong
boys carried the boxes into a truck. After work, we had lunch in my
uncle's house. We had many oranges, too. In the afternoon, we came back
home by truck.
　 We were busy today, but we were happy.
七、One possible version：
How to Protect Our Eyes
Eye is the window of our mind. We use our eyes to see everything around us. Without eyes, nothing is left beside you but darkness.
How to protect our eyes It’s not right to keep your eyes working for a long time. You’d better not read in a strong or poor light. Don’t read in bed or on a moving bus. Remember to keep your books away from your eyes for about a foot and do eye-exercises every day. What’s more, a balanced diet is necessary.
Follow my advice and form a good habit. It’s time to say goodbye to thick glasses.
help，tiring, feel, when, wind
bark worry name child watchUnit 1 The Big Move
单元词汇导学
1.be worried about 为……担心 2.have trouble (in) doing sth. 干……有麻烦
3.travel to 去……旅行 4. on a plane/by plane/ by air 乘飞机
5.arrive in/at 到达 6. be always doing sth. 总是做某事
7.be/become used to sth./doing sth.习惯于 8.keep a diary记日记
9.laugh at嘲笑 10.introduce sb. to sb.把……介绍给……
Lesson 1
学习点拨
本课重点交际用语：当某人说话太快，你不明白或你想知道英语单词怎么说，可用以下用语交际。
1. Can you speak more slowly, please
2. I don’t know the word in English.
名师授课
1. It was hard for Susan _______with chopsticks.
A. eat B. eating C. to eat
解析 选C。“It’s + adj. + for sb. + to do sth.”是固定结构，意为“对某人来说干某事是什么样的”。
2. I was always ______ my homework.
A. to do B. doing C. done
解析 选B。“be always doing sth.”意为“总是做某事”，具有一定的感彩。
课后作业
一、词汇
（A）根据英文及所给题意，填入恰当的词语
1. When Susan looked at the signs, she was __________.(not able to think clearly)
2. Kate made a __________ mistake yesterday. (not showing thought or understanding, foolish)
3. It is hard for a foreigner to eat with ____________. (two thin sticks used for picking up food)
4. Can you speak more ________ (not quickly)
5. Could you give me some _________about Chinese history (knowledge or facts)
（B）词形转换
1. When I _______(come) to China, I had difficulty at first.
2. This is my ________(one) time visiting Harbin.
3. She was _________(worry) about his coming exam.
4. Do you have __________(some) friends from America
5. The football match that I watched yesterday was very ______(bore).
二、单项选择
1.—Hey wake up! Don’t sleep in class.
—Oh, I always felt _________ when I have this _________lesson.
A. boring, bored B. exciting, excited C. bored, boring
2.—How did you feel _________ your first day of middle school
—I was _________ and a bit nervous.
A. in, excited B. on, exciting C. on, excited
3.—Susan, how was your stay in china
—Wonderful, except the _________ problem. Sometimes I couldn’t understand Chinese people clearly.
A. knowledge B. school C. language
4. When I first _______ America, I couldn’t speak English well so I wasn’t understood by others easily. But now I can speak English well after a lot lf practicing.
A. arrived in B. got C. reach
5.—People _________ western countries usually eat ________ knives and forks instead of chopsticks
—Yes, they have different table manners from us Chinese.
A. in, on B. from, by C. from, with
6.—Why did Bob look very upset
—He was worried about _________ his father here.
A. to meet B. to meeting C. meeting
7.—What are you talking _______ —Something about special names.
A. with B. to C. about
8.—What are you worried about —I have trouble _______ English.
A. learn B. to learn C. learning
9.—How did Susan travel to China —_________________.
A. On a plane B. By a plane C. Ride a plane
10. Which stress is different from the other
A. chopsticks B. excited C. silly
三、交际运用
(A)
填入一个适当的词补全对话，每空一词
A: Do you remember your 1 day of school
B: Yes, I was so nervous. It was a difficult day for me.
A: 2 were you so nervous
B: I had trouble 3 Chinese.
A: That’s OK. Most people will meet the same problem when they first come to a 4 country.
B: And I was lucky. You were 5 to me and told me many things about China.
1._________ 2.________ 3.__________ 4.__________ 5.__________
(B)
A: Can I help you
B: I'd like three air tickets to Beijing.
A: (1)_____
B: On June 30th.
A: June 30th Er. I am sorry. But all the tickets for that day are sold out. (2)______
B: Let me think. Yes, that's OK. (3)______
A: The earliest flight will leave at seven o'clock in the morning.
B: Does it stop anywhere
A: No. It will go straight to Beijing.
B: (4)______
A: (5)______
Lesson 2
学习点拨
本课重点短语
1. be/become used to sth./doing sth.习惯于 2.keep a diary记日记
3.laugh at嘲笑 4.introduce sb. to sb.把……介绍给……
5.be/feel embarrassed感到尴尬 6.make noise发出噪音
7.move to sp.搬到某地 8.at that time在那时
9.thanks to多亏，由于 10.as soon as一……就……
11.have trouble eating it吃饭有困难
12.my first time eating with chopsticks我第一次用筷子吃饭
13.too shy to talk to anyone太害羞了不敢和任何人说话
e up to 向……走过去 15.in fact事实上
16.be crowded拥挤的 17.be excited about对……感到很兴奋
18.try to do尽力做某事 19.try doing尝试做某事
名师授课
1. She _______ to spicy food.
A. used to B. is use to C. is used to
解析 选C。“be used to”意为“习惯于”。后面接名词或动名词。如：
I am used to keeping a diary now. 现在我习惯于写日记。
区别：used to 过去常常，后接动词原形。
2．_______ we went to a restaurant, I had another problem: eating!
A. When B. As soon as C. While
解析 选B。 “as soon as”意为“一……就……”，用来引导时间状语从句。其后的动作发生在将来时，要用一般现在时代替一般将来时。
课后作业
1、 根据句意和首字母，填入恰当的词语
1. My face is red because I am e___________.
2. Before I go to bed, I write in my d__________.
3. I’m sorry, I didn’t r_________ how much it upset you.
4. Is there a__________ here who can speak Japanese
5. We had an a________ holiday. It rained every day here.
2、 单项选择
1.—We are ______ tired _______ walk to the supermarket. Do you have a good idea
—Why not take a bus No.108 Bus will take us there.
A. so, that B. too, to C. very, so
2.—It is my first time ________ a car. I feel very nervous.
—Don’t be nervous. You can do well if you are careful enough.
A. driving B. to be driven C. drive
3.—How did you know the name of the book
—While I ________ the bus, I saw a boy reading it.
A. wait for B. was waiting for C. was waited for
4.—Wang Dandan, I want to _________ a new friend ________ you.
—Thanks. I would like to make friends.
A. introduce, to B. introduce, with C. introducing, for
5. The teacher asked, “Does _______ know the answer ” But ______ replied. So the teacher had to explain it to the students.
A. somebody, anybody B. anybody, somebody C. anybody, nobody
6. Tom had trouble _______ the Chinese book at first because he knew a little Chinese.
A. read B. to read C. reading
7.— I want to meet you.
—Please call me as soon as you ________.
A. arrive B. will reach C. get
8.—Liu Chang, ________ you, I quickly became used to China.
—Don’t mention it, it’s my pleasure.
A. thanks to B. thanks for C. thanks
9.—How do you like living in China
—Great! Now I ________ life here.
A. used to B. am used to C. am used for
10.—Why did you look happy just now
—Tom told us a funny joke. We laughed _______ it.
A. at B. to C. on
三、完形填空
Charlie came from a poor village. His parents had __1__ money to send him to school when he was young. The boy was very sad. Mr. King lived next to him. He found the boy __2__ and had pity on him and lent some money to him. So the boy could go to school. He studied hard and __3__ all his lessons. When he finished middle school, the man introduced him to his friend in the town. And he began to work.
Once Mr. King was seriously hurt in an accident. Dying, he asked Charlie to take care of his daughter, Sharon. The young man __4__ and several years later he married the girl. He loved her very much and tried his best to make her happy. He often bought beautiful clothes and delicious food for her. He was good at cooking and he cooked __5__ for her. So she became very fat and she felt it difficult to walk. And one day she found there was something wrong with her heart. Her husband wasn’t at home and she had to go to __6__ at once. The doctors looked her over and told her __7__ eat meat, sugar, chocolate and things like these. She was afraid __8__ the doctor’s words and wrote all the names of the food on the paper. When she got home, she put the list on the table and __9__. When she returned home that afternoon, she found many kinds of food: meat, sugar and chocolate in the kitchen. Charlie was busy __10__ there. As soon as he saw her, he said happily, “I’ve bought all the food you like, dear!”
1. A. no B. some C. much D. enough
2. A. lazy B. clever C. careful D. hard
3. A. did well in B. was poor at C. was working D. was good for
4. A. was angry B. thought hard C. agreed D. said “No.”
5. A. a little B. a few C. many D. a lot
6. A. rest B. sleep C. hospital D. work
7. A. should B. would C. to D. not to
8. A. to remember B. to forget C. to catch D. to teach
9. A. slept B. went out C. cooked D. ate
10. A. reading B. seeing C. cooking D. writing
四、用方框内所给词的适当形式填空。
write, bright, something, into, but
It was Friday that day. The sun was shinning 1 . Mrs. Zhang went to buy a fish in a fish shop. She didn’t know how to cook it. So she asked the shopkeeper 2 down the way of cooking on a piece of paper. Then she put the paper 3 her pocket and left the shop happily with the fish.
On her way home, a white cat took the fish away from her and ran away at once. Mrs. Zhang ran after the cat 4 she couldn’t catch it. But suddenly she remembered 5 and laughed. She shouted to the cat loudly, “You don’t know how to cook the fish. The paper is still in my pocket!”
Lesson 3
学习点拨
时间状语从句
（adverbial clause of time）
概念：在复合句中，由时间连接词引导的状语从句叫做时间状语从句。(在复合句中，要注意主句和从句的时态大多都要保持一致。）
引导时间状语从句的连词有：when, while, before, after, since, as, until, as soon as, immediately, directly, instantly, the moment, the instant, the minute, hardly(scarcely, rarely)…when / before, no sooner…than等。
1. when引导的从句的谓语动词可以是延续性的动词，又可以是瞬时动词。并且when有时表示“就在那时”。例如：
　　When she came in, I stopped eating.她进来时，我在吃饭。(瞬时动词)
　　When I lived in the countryside, I used to carry some water for him.当的住在农村时，我常常为他担水。（延续性的动词）
　　We were about to leave when he came in.我们就要离开，就在那时他进来了。
2. While引导的从句的谓语动作必须是延续性的，并强调主句和从句的动作同时发生（或者相对应）。并且while有时还可以表示对比。例如：
　　While my wife was reading the newspaper, I was watching TV. (was reading是延续性的动词，was reading和was watching同时发生)
　　I like playing football while you like playing basketball.我喜欢踢足球，而你喜欢打篮球。（对比）
3. As表示“一边……一边”，as引导的动作是延续性的动作，一般用于主句和从句动作同时发生；as也可以强调“一先一后。例如：
　　We always sing as we walk.我们总是边走边唱。（as表示“一边……一边”） As we was going out, it began to snow.当我们出门时，开始下雪了。（as强调句中两个动作紧接着先后发生，而不强调开始下雪的特定时间）
4.由before和after引导的时间状语从句。注意before引导的从句不再用否定式的谓语，并且当before引导的从句位于主句之后，有时译成“就，才”。还要注意主句和从句之间的时间关系。当主句用将来时，从句总是用现在时；如果before引导的主句谓语用的是过去时，则从句动词多用过去完成时 ( http: / / baike. / view / 201153.htm" \t "_blank )，这样以便体现动作发生的先后。After表示主句动作发生在从句动作之后。主句和从句的动作的时间关系正好与before引导的从句相反。例如：
　　It will be four days before they come back. 他们要过四天才能回来。
　　My father had left for Canada just before the letter arrived.我父亲恰好在信到之前去加拿大了。
　　After you think it over, please let me know what you decide.你仔细考虑过以后，告诉我你是怎样决定的。
　　After we had finished the work, we went home.完成工作之后，我们回家了。（从句用过去完成时，主句用一般过去时）
5.由till或until引导的时间状语从句。till和until一般情况下两者可以互换，但是在强调句型中多用until。并且要注意的是：如果主句中的谓语动词是瞬时动词时，必须用否定形式；如果主句中的谓语动词是延续性动词时，用肯定或否定形式都可以，但表达的意思不同。till不可以用在句首，而until可以放在句首。例如：
I didn't go to bed until（till） my father came back.直到我父亲回来我才上床睡觉。
　　It was not until the meeting was over that he began to teach me English.直到散会之后他才开始教我英语。
　　I worked until he came back.我工作到他回来为止。
名师授课
1. I wrote this _______ I first moved to China.
A. when B. as soon as C. while
解析 选A。When 和 while 都有“当……时候”之意。当所引导的时间状语从句中的动词是延续性动词时，二者可以互换。如果从句中动词是瞬间的动词，则只能用when。
2. I ______ my leg yesterday. It still ______ now.
A. hurt, hurt B. am hurt, hurt C. hurt, hurts
解析 选C。 hurt用作及物动词，意为“伤到……”；用作不及物动词，意为“疼痛”；当形容词使用，be hurt指“受伤了”。
课后作业
一、根据句意和首字母，填入恰当的词语
1. We’re going to have fun with our i_________.
2. I was so n________ before class.
3. We can often see a c________ at the circus.
4. The bird realized that people don’t hurt it when they take a p _________of it.
5. He is very funny. People often l_______ at him.
二、单项选择
1. When I see the dark clouds in the sky, I realize ________.
A. to rain B. it’s going to rain C. the rain
2. — Why do you like Liu Xiang so much
—He is a great athlete. His story gets me _______ success comes after hard work.
A. to know B. knowing C. knows
3. I was watching TV ________ there was a knock at the door.
A. when B. while C. as soon as
4. ________ I went to school, I finished my homework.
A. Before B. After C. While
5. Amy and I will eat dinner ________ she arrives.
A. as soon as B. while C. until
6. Susan dropped her books ________ she was walking to school.
A. as soon as B. before C. while
7. —What are you going to do this winter holiday
—I’m going _______ a school trip to the Sun Island.
A. on B. at C. with
8. —I’ll have a 3-day holiday. But I don’t know _______.
—I think you’d better go on a trip to Dalian.
A. what to do B. how to do C. why to do
9. Look! There are several birds _____ outside the window.
A. sing B. singing C. to sing
10. —What do you usually do _______ you get home from school
—I usually do some sports.
A. as soon as B. while C. since
三、完形填空
Maria Gomez was born in Peru(秘鲁),. She grew up（ 成长） in a small village. She __1___ when she was six years old. She went to elementary school（小学）, but she ___2__to high school. Her family was very__3__, and she had to go to work when she was thirteen years old. She __4__in a shoe factory. When Maria was seventeen years old, her family___5__to the United States. First they lived in Los Angeles, and then they moved to San Francisco. When Maria___6__in the United States, she was not happy. She missed her friends in Peru and she couldn’t ___7__ English. She began to study English at night, ___8___worked in a factory during the day. Maria studied very hard, and now she speaks English well. She’s still___9__at night, but now she is studying typing. She wants___10___ a typist (打字员)in Peru. Maria still misses her friends in Peru. But she is very happy now, and she hopes she will have a good future in the new country.
1. A. went to school B. go to school C. goes to school
2. A. went B. didn't go C. began
3. A. rich（富） B. poor （穷） C. happy
4. A. works B. is working C. worked
5. A. moved（迁居） B. go C. stayed
6. A. reached B. arrived C. got
7. A. tell B. talk C. speak
8. A. when B. and C. so
9. A. studying B. studied C. study
10. A. to do B. do C. to be
四、阅读理解
(A)
George Stephenson was born in 1781 in a poor family． He had to start work when he was only eight． When George was fourteen， he became his father's helper． He spent a lot of time learning about engines（发动机）． And on holidays he often make one engine to pieces and studied each piece carefully． Soon he became a very good worker though he could not read or write． He began to learn English letters when he was seventeen years old． Every day after he did twelve hours of hard work，he walked a long way to have lessons from a young school teacher． On his eighteenth birthday，he wrote his own name for the first time in his life． George invented（发明） many things in his life． The train was the greatest one among them． Today when we take trains from one place to another， we'll think of this great man-George Stephenson．
1. In which year did George Stephenson start to help his father？________．
A． In 1781 B． In 1789 C． In 1795 D． In 1798
2. He learned about the engine ________．
A. through reading and writing
B. by making it to pieces and studying each piece carefully
C. at lessons from a young teacher
D. by asking a lot of questions
3. He spent a lot of time learning about engines and soon he became ________．
A． a great man B． a good maker C． a good worker D． a good student
4. George Stephenson invented the ________.
A. the train B. the telephone C. the car D. the computer
5. From the passage we know George Stephenson was one of the greatest __ in the world．
A． workers B． writers C． learners D． inventors( 发明家)
(B)
As we know ,there are differences between western culture（文化） and Chinese culture . We can see differences when we pay attention to the way words are used .Let，s look at the words about animals .Most phrases(短语) in Chinese about the dog ,for example ,“a homeless dog”, “a running dog”,and “a dog catching a mouse”, have negative（否定的）meanings.
But in western countries, dogs are considered honest（诚实的） and good friends of humans（人类）. In English ,people use dog to describe positive （肯定的） behavior（行为） .For example , “You are a lucky dog”means you are a lucky person. And “every dog has its day ”means ________.To describe a person，s serious illness ,they say “sick as a dog”.The word “dog-tired”means “very tired”.
The words about animals are used in positive or negative ways in different cultures .We can learn about many differences in cultures by comparing（比较） how certain words are used .
1 Which sentence is right to fill in the black in the passage
A. every dog will die one day B. each person has bad luck at times
C. each person has good luck at times D. every dog has good luck times
2 Which of the following is NOT true according to the passage
A. In English people use the dog to describe positive behavior
B. Most phrases in Chinese about the dog have negative meaning
C. We should pay attention to the way words about animals are used
D. “Sick as a dog”is used to describe a healthy person in western countries
3 What，s the best title of the passage ？
A. Dogs
B. Western culture
C. Chinese culture
D. Different countries have different cultures
Lesson 4
学习点拨
中考作文常用时间状语(位于句首或句末)
at 6 o'clock, at 7:15=at a quarter past seven， at 9 a.m.=at nine in the morning
at 6:30 p.m.= at half past six in the afternoon， at night/noon, at breakfast,
in the morning/afternoon/evening/night， in April, in spring, in 2007, in May, 2007， in two hours on May19th, 2007， on Saturday ，on a rainy day， on Sunday morning ,on the morning of June1st，for three years, at first， at the end of the party， at last=in the end=finally
前面不加介词的时间状语:
　　yesterday, today, tomorrow, then, the day before yesterday, the day after tomorrow，just now=a moment ago, from now on, from then on，last/this/next week
名师授课
1. How did you feel ________ the day
A. in the end B. by the end C. at the end of
解析 选C。 “ at the end of” 指 “在......的尽头”；in the end /at last 是“最后”；by the end of是“到……末为止”。
2. The teacher didn’t begin the lesson _____ all the students _____.
A. after, stopped talking B. before, stopped talking C. after, stopped to talk
解析 选B。not…before搭配表示“在……之前没有……”，它与not…until意思相近。
课后作业
一、根据英文及所给题意，填入恰当的词语
1. I felt ______ about being a middle school student. (feeling very happy)
2. I am facing a big ______ at work at the moment.(a difficult situation that you must deal with)
3. I’ve been in the job for six years and feel it’s time for a ______.(a change in the place)
4. Do you _______ the day when we first met (to have sth. In your mind)
5. A road _______ will help you a lot wherever you go. (a board, that gives you a piece of information)
二、单项选择
1.—Tom, will you come to the school theater this afternoon
—Yes, Mr. Wang will give us a lecture. We can know more ______ about Sports and Health.
A. information B. newses C. message
2. —Hurry up. The bus is coming.
—Oh, no. We mustn’t cross the street ______ the traffic lights are green.
A. after B. since C. until
3. —Do you like playing computer games, Jim
—Yes, of course. But my mother often tells me _____ computer games _____ because it’s a waster of time.
A. don’t play, too many B. not to play, too much C. to play, too much
4. His mother ______ dinner for him when he _____ home yesterday.
A. was cooking, was arriving B. cooked, arrived C. was cooking, arrived
5. —How did you feel _____ the end of the day
—I felt bored.
A. at B. by C. in
6. —Do you remember when _____ Kate
—Certainly. It was on September 1, 2008.
A. you met B. did you meet C. you meet
7. —Liu Chang, don’t ______ you English, I will help you.
—Thanks a lot.
A. worry about B. be worry about C. worry with
8._______ fun! Everyone began to laugh at Mr. Johnson’s story.
A. What B. What a C. How
9. —Why did you get angry with your son this morning
—He didn’t finish his homework. ________ talking to him, I felt better.
A. As soon as B. After C. Until
10.—The mountain is so beautiful. Let’s take a photograph ______ it.
—I agree with you.
A. for B. of C. to
三、句型转换
1. Susan traveled to China on a plane.（对画线部分提问）
___ _____ Susan travel to China
2. I was too shy to talk to anyone.（同义句转换）
I was _____ shy _____ I couldn’t talk to anyone.
3. I’m visiting China. This is the first time. （同义句转换）
This is my _____ _____ China.
4. I don’t know what to do. （同义句转换）
I don’t know what I ____ ____.
5. With the help of Liu Chang, I got used to living in China. （同义句转换）
_____ _____ Liu Chang, I got used to living in China.
四、阅读表达
My family loves television. My earliest memories are of watching TV with my family. I think we had five or six television sets at home — the bedrooms, the kitchen, everywhere! At least one television was on all of the time.
When I went to university, I lived in a dormitory in my first year. Of course I had a TV, so I continued watching my favorite programs. But several weeks later, I realized I had a problem. My courses were hard — much harder than high school, and there was a lot of homework. Also, I felt stressed in my new environment. I started watching more TV to help me have less pressure. Guess what Soon I was spending more time watching TV than I was on homework. So I didn’t have a lot of friends. At the end of my first year, my grades weren’t very good, and I was really disappointed in myself. At home that summer, I watched television with my family a lot. At first I thought it was great. But then I noticed something. We talked all the time, but always about TV. Something was missing. Television brought us together, but in a way it also kept us away.
When I got back to university, I made a decision to do better. I walked into my dormitory, and started to turn the TV on. But then an idea jumped into my head: Stop watching TV! Suddenly it became extremely clear: my old friend television was really my enemy (敌人)! It had kept me from getting good grades, and from making friends. I had to stop watching TV. So I did. I gave away my television, and I’ve never looked back. I started doing better in school, made more friends, started having more energy. I don’t know if I’ll continue to have a TV-free life. But if I do watch television again, it won’t be like before. I’m sure that television will never again be a major part of my life.
1. 请将右边的两个标题与左边相对应的段落连线。（2分）
Paragraph 1
Paragraph 2
Paragraph 3
2. 回答问题。（1分）
What did his family always talk about during the summer vacation
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 .
3. 从原文中找出与所给句子意思接近的句子。（1分）
I’m not sure whether I’ll go on living a life without watching TV.
.
4. 根据上下文将划线句子an idea jumped into my head译为汉语。（1分）
.
5. 根据短文内容，完成下列表格。（每空1分，共5分）
Reasons of watching TV more a. The courses were (1) _____________________________________. b. There was a lot of homework.c. He (2) ____________________________ in his new environment.
Results of watching TV more a. He didn’t have a lot of friends.b. His grades (3) ____________________________.
Results of stopping watching TV did better in school,He (4) _________________________________________,(5)__________________________________________.
Unit 1 单元测试
一、单项选择(20分)
1.—How did you feel ______ the first day of middle school
—I felt a little embarrassed because I didn’t find my classroom. Our school building is too big.
A. at the end of B. by the end of C. in the end
2.—It’s said that we won the football match yesterday.
—Yes. We are all _______ about the ______ result.
A. exciting, excited B. excited, exciting C. exciting, exciting
3.—It’s too difficult ______ me _______ skate in one day.
—Don’t worry. I will teach you.
A. of, to learn B. for, learning to C. for, to learn to
4.—I have to have seven days off. I have caught a bad cold.
—________ bad news! I am very sorry to hear that. We can’t swim this Sunday.
A. What a B. How C. What
5. He _______ up very late in the morning, but now he ______ up very early.
A. used to get, is used to get B. used to getting, is used to get
C. used to get, is used to getting
6.—I like the funny clown. He can get anybody ________.
—So he can.
A. smile B. to smile C. smiling
7.______ your help, we quickly finished the work.
A. Thanks to B. Because C. Thank
8. When I do something ________ the first time, I feel nervous.
A. on B. in C. for
9. The information was so ______ that I was ________ .
A. confusing, confused B. confused, confused C. confused, confusing
10. The children are all _______ Christmas.
A. excited with B. excited about C. exciting at
11.________ my mother was cooking, I was watching TV yesterday afternoon.
A. When B. As soon as C. While
12. Try to work hard on English, or when you travel to England or the USA, you’ll have _______.
A. languages problem B. language problem C. language problems
13.—_________ did you feel on the first day of the 7-day National Holiday
—I hope it never ends.
A. What B. How C. Why
14. Sorry, the line isn’t good, could you speak ________
A. more slow B. much clearly C. more loudly
15. After she introduced me _____ her friend, we shook our hands and said “hello” _________ each other.
A. with, to B. to, to C. from, with
16. Bears will sleep for the whole winter, but sometimes they _____ up ______ New Year’s Day.
A. get, in B. wake, at C. wake, on
17. It’s bad manners to ______ people who are in trouble, you should give them a hand.
A. smile to B. laugh to C. laugh at
18. At that time, I was still a little girl, I _______ understand many things that my parents did for me.
A. don’t B. haven’t C. didn’t
19. Our teacher is ______ busy ______ have lunch on time every day.
A. so, that B. too, to C. so, to
20. Which stress is different
A. silly B. anyone C. embarrassed
二、完型填空（10分）
Eliza comes 1 England. She’s fourteen. She’s in China with her family now. She is a student 2 No.15 Middle School. She likes her school and all of her classmates. She thinks they are very friendly to her. She likes Chinese, 3 . But she 4 speak Chinese very well. Eliza gets up very early 5 morning. She has some milk and eggs 6 breakfast. And she goes to school by bus. She doesn’t like to 7 late.
In the evening she does 8 homework and read newspapers. She 9 to bed at nine. She is very 10 every day.
1. A. from B. in C. of D. with
2. A. in B. of C. at D. with
3. A. either B. too C. also D. and
4. A. can B. is C. can’t D. doesn’t
5. A. in B. of C. at D. every
6. A. of B. for C. in D. at
7. A. be B. is C. am D. are
8. A. one’s B. her C. she D. his
9. A. go B. is go C. goes D. want
10. A. sad B. good C. well D. happy
三、阅读理解（20分）
(A)
The Lamberts are American tourists. The whole family are visiting Beijing now. This is their first visit to China. They are going to stay in China for six months. They want to visit some big cities and villages. They hope to learn some Chinese, too.
Mr. Lambert is a taxi driver. He likes to drive in Beijing. Mrs Lambert is a school teacher in California. She is visiting a city school today and a village school tomorrow. Their daughter is a middle school student. She is going to meet some Chinese students. They are taking a lot of pictures in China. When they return to America, they are going to show the pictures to their friends. They want the American people to know more about China.
根据短文内容，选择最佳答案。
1. The Lamberts are staying in________ now.
A. UK B. USA C. Canada D. China
2. Mr. Lambert is________.
A. a teacher B. a doctor C. a taxi driver D. a worker
3. How long are they going to stay in China
A. Four months B. Half a year C. Eight months D. A year
4. Why are they going to show the pictures to their friends
A. The pictures are beautiful.
B. They want the Americans to come to China.
C. They like China.
D. Let the American people know more about China.
5. The word “village” means ________ in Chinese.
A. 城市 B. 村庄 C. 山庄 D. 农场
(B)
It was a very hot day in the middle of summer, and there were no trees along the street. Mr. Read had another bad day: for the whole day no one had come to his small shop to buy anything. He closed his shop at ha1f past five, and went out into the street and began walking to the bus stop. He was very fat. The sun shines straight down the street, and in a few minutes Mr. Read felt hot. A small boy came out of another shop in the street and followed Mr. Read. He stayed very near him all the time, and he stepped on Mr. Read’s shoes several times. Mr. Read 1ooked at him angrily each time. After the fourth time, Mr. Read stopped, turned round and said to the boy, “What are you doing Stop following me like that! You’re going to hurt my feet.”
“I’m sorry, but don’t stop me, please!” The small boy said. “It’s very hot today, and there isn’t any shade anywhere else in the street!”
l. No one came to buy things from Mr. Read’s shop because .
A. if was too small B. he closed it too early
C. it was too hot D. there were no trees near his shop
2. Mr. Read at about 5:30.
A. was going to the bus stop B. was looking for his boy
C. was going to another shop D. was looking for a shade in the street
3. In a few minutes, Mr. Read felt hot because .
A. he walked too fast B. he was a fat man
C. he boy followed him too closely D. he stood too long in the sun
4. Why did Mr. Read become angry
A. The sun was too hot. B. The boy was too fat.
C. There were no trees in the street. D The boy was giving him some trouble.
5. He followed Mr. Read so that .
A. he could do shopping in Mr. Read’s shop B. nobody would see him
C. he cou1d find the bus stop D. the sun wouldn't shine on him
（C）
Hector is a factory worker. He is often very tired after a day's work. His wife, Jenny, has no job, so she stays at home to cook the meals. Every day he can have his dinner when he gets home from his factory.
One day, Hector came home very late because he was very busy in the factory. He was very hungry when he got home.
He was not happy when he found his dinner was not ready. He was very angry with his wife. He shouted at her, "I'm going out to eat in a restaurant." "Wait for five minutes，" said his wife. "Why Do you think that dinner will be ready in five minutes " asked Hector.
"Of course not," she answered. "But I can be ready to go with you in five minutes."
根据短文内容，选择正确答案。
1. Hector works in________.
A. a factory B. an office C. a school D. a hospital
2. Jenny stays at home because ________.
A. she likes cooking B. she loves her husband very much
C. she doesn't have a job D. she doesn't want to work
3. One day, Hector came home very late because________.
A. he wanted to have dinner in a restaurant B. he had a lot of work to do
C. he was angry with his wife D. his wife didn't cook dinner
4. Hector was ________when he found his dinner was not ready.
A. happy B. glad C. hungry D. not happy
5. Which sentence is correct
A. Jenny could have dinner ready in five minutes.
B. Jenny wanted to go to the restaurant with her husband.
C. Jenny didn't like the dinner at home.
D. Jenny didn't love her husband.
(D)
1. If it is 8:00 a.m. in western Canada, the time is _______ in eastern Canada.
A. 12:00 B. 2:00 p.m. C. 12:30 p.m. D. 4:00 a.m.
2. While Canadian children are waking up, children in Scotland are ________.
A. having lessons B. sleeping C. watching TV D. playing games
3. Who needn’t go to work on Fridays
A. Canadians. B. Scots. C. Japanese. D. Egyptians.
4. Which country will welcome Saturday first, Canada, Japan, UK or Egypt
A. UK B. Japan C. Egypt D. Canada
5. What does “ahead of” mean in English
A. earlier than B. later than C. after D. until
四、任务性阅读（10分）
(A)
I was in line waiting to __1__. In line there were two___2__ before me. A little boy ____3__ some rather strange clothes. He __4__with anyone who was interested in the clothes and soon we learnt that he was going to a kindergarten(幼儿园) party. He had done a great job of __5__ together interesting costumes.
(B)
阅读下面短文，然后根据短文内容补全文后表格中所缺失的信息，每空限填数字或一个单词。
My name is Jane. My job is to write stories and newsletters for a magazine. I love traveling and hope to visit Great Britain one day. I’d like a pen pal from London, who is interested in discussing the differences between Europe and Asia. I love listening to pop music and playing football.
I am Manuel. I’m a businessman and have a large company with many workers and clerks. I would like to find a pen pal who is also a businessman and lives in North America. I like using the Internet.
I am working in a university. I speak English, French and Russian. My family name is Jackson but my students usually call me Sarah. I’d like a pen pal who is interested in language learning working in Oxford University. I don’t like using computers for learning and I believe that true language learning can only happen in a classroom.
I am Peter and interested in the differences between East Europe and North America. I love riding my horse Jackie and listening to jazz. I usually get at 7 o’clock and go to school around 7:30 in the morning. I want to find a pen pal who has the same interest as me living in Sydney.
Cindy is my first name. I am working in a travel agency. Sometimes I am called Mr. Guide as I am working. I’d like to find a pen pal who comes from Europe. I like playing the piano and listening to jazz. I am interested in history, but I don’t like discussing languages.
First name What to do likes Pen-pal from
Jane 1__________ Travelling, pop music, and playing football London
Manuel Businessman Using 2.________________ North America
3__________ Teacher Teaching Oxford University
Peter Student Riding horse and listening to jazz 4____________
Cindy 5．_________ Playing piano, listening to jazz history Europe
五、交际应用(10分)
（A）补全对话，每空一词
A: I remember your 1 day of school. You looked very 2 .
B: It was a 3 day for me.
A: 4 were you so nervous
B: I couldn’t speak Chinese well. I was always saying: “Can you speak more 5 ”
1._________ 2.________ 3.___________ 4.___________ 5.__________
(B)从A—G选项中选出能填入空白处的最佳选项补全对话。(选项中有两项是多余的)
A：Hi，Kate，you look so worried．What’s the matter
B：6 I’ve got a headache，a runny nose and a sore throat．
You know the A-H1N1 virus(病毒)is SO scary．I fear．．．
A： 7
B：No，I don’t．I took my temperature just now．
A：Don’t worry．A fever is the common symptom(症状)of the disease．8
B：I hope so．
A： 9 You can get some advice．
B：That’s a good idea．10
A：Sure．Let’s go．
A．Do you have a fever B．I’m not feeling well．C．But you’d better go to see a doctor．D．How long have you been like this E．Will you please go with me F．Maybe you’ve just had a cold．G．It’S a pleasure．
6．—— 7．—— 8．—— 9．—— 10．——
六、阅读表达（10分）
(A)
Every Saturday, Grandpa and I walk to the nursing home to visit some of the old and sick people there because they can’t take care of themselves.
First we visit Mrs. Sokol. I call her “The Cook.” She likes to talk about the time when she was a well-known cook in Russia. People would come from miles, just to taste her chicken soup.
Next we visit Mr. Lipman. I call him “The Singer” because he loves to sing for us. Whenever he does, his voice fills the air, clear and full of energy.
I also enjoy Mrs. Kagan’s stories about her own experiences during the old days. I call her “The Memory Lady.”
One day Grandpa got very sick and the doctor said they didn’t think he would get better.
It was time to visit the nursing home again. I had to go alone. Everyone was surprised when I told them that my grandpa was ill and in hospital.
A few days later, Grandpa was not able to sit up, eat and even speak. I went to the corner of the room so Grandpa wouldn’t see me cry. Suddenly, I heard someone singing. I looked up. It was The Singer. Behind her were The Cook. and The Memory Lady. The Cook brought her famous homemade chicken soup. The Memory Lady held Grandpa’s hand and told us how Grandpa once came to visit her in a snowstorm, just to bring her some roses for her birthday.
Before I realized it, visiting hours were up. That evening, Grandpa called the nurse in and said he was hungry. Soon he began to sit up. Finally he was able to get out of bed. It is really a miracle (surprising event), isn’t it
1. Why did the writer and his grandpa go to the nursing home every Saturday
_______________________________________________________________________
2. Who were Grandpa’s good friends in the nursing home
_______________________________________________________________________
3. Why did the writer cry
_______________________________________________________________________
4. Please put the sentence “ Before I realized it, visiting hours were up.” into Chinese
_______________________________________________________________________
5. What do you think of Grandpa
________________________________________________________________________
(B)
假定你是赵军，请根据下面的提示，写一张请假条给高老师。要求语句通顺，意思连贯，不要逐条翻译提示要点。字数80个单词左右。
　　时间：星期四上午6点。
　　提示：
　　（1）昨天下午下大雨，你回家时遇见了一个迷路的老太太，你把她送回家，你全身湿透。
　　（2）当晚你做作业，直到11点才睡觉。
　　（3）早上起床后感到难受。
　　（4）想请一天假去医院看病。
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
七、书面表达 根据下列信息提示，写一篇作文，要求70-90个单词。(20分)
Time: Last Sunday morning.
Persons: Jim, Lily, Allan, you.
Place: Bus station.
What to do: Clean the chairs, windows. Help people.
How: by bike, tired, happy.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Unit 1 答案
Lesson 1
一、（A）1. confused 2. silly 3. chopsticks 4. slowly 5.information
(B) 1. came 2. first 3.worried 4. any 5. boring
二、1. C由题意知可排除B，bored表示人的一种感情，而 boring表示事物的某种特性。
2. C具体到某一天要用介词on。
3. C由最后一句可知是语言问题。
4. A到达有三种表达方法：arrive at/in, get to和reach。
5. C 本句的意思是说，来自西方国家的人们用刀、叉吃饭，而不是用筷子。
6. C介词后面加动词的-ing形式。
7. B由答语可知是问谈话的内容，所以用about。Talk with/to后接人。
8. C have trouble doing sth.是固定短语。
9. A此处要用介词短语回答，on a plane 或by plane。
10. B
三、(A)1.first 2.Why 3. speaking 4. new 5. nice/kind/friendly
(B)1—5 BDAEC
Lesson 2
一、1.embarrassed 2. diary 3. realize 4. anyone 5. awful
二、1.B我们太累了，不能走着去超市。用so …that…短语时，that后要接句子。
2. A one’s first time doing sth.是固定用法。
3. B当我正在等公车时，……用过去进行时。
4. A introduce sb. to sb. 是固定短语。
5. C anybody用在否定句和问句当中，由句意知第二空填无人回答。
6. C have trouble doing sth.是固定短语。
7. A 没说明到达的具体地点时只能用arrive。
8. A意思是多亏了你。
9. B现在我习惯了这儿的生活。
10. A laugh at为固定短语。
三、1. A由后文可知，是没有多少钱。
2. B发现他很聪明，所以借钱给他让他去上学。
3. A他学习很努力所以各科都学得很好。
4. C由后文知他同意了。
5. D由前文他很爱她可知他为她做很多好吃的，食物时不可数名词所以用a lot。
6. C心脏有问题当然要去看医生。
7. D tell sb. not to do sth.告诉某人不要干某事。
8. B她怕忘记医生的话。
9. B由下一句可知她出去了。
10. C由后文可知，他正忙着做饭。
四、1. brightly 2. to write 3. into 4. but 5. something
Lesson 3
一、1. imagination 2. nervous 3. clown 4. photograph 5.laugh
二、1.B天将要下雨。
2. A 固定用法。
3. A我正在看电视，就在这时有人敲门。只有when有这个用法。
4. A我上学之前把作业做完了。
5. A 她一回来我们就吃饭。
6. C当她走着去上学时把书丢了。
7. A go on a trip 是固定短语。
8. A根据回答可知，不知道该做什么。
9. B有一些鸟正在唱歌。
10. A你一回到家都干些什么。While后面要接延续性动词。
三、1. A 由when she was six years old可知，应用一般过去时。
2. B由but可知，她没上中学。
3. B由上下文可知。
4. C由上一句可知，她13岁时在鞋厂工作，应用一般过去时。
5. A 由下文可知，他们搬家去了美国。Move to 搬家。
6. B到达有三种表达方法：get to, arrive in(at), reach。
7. C说某一种语言要用动词speak。
8. B由上下文可知，在鞋厂工作和学英语是并列关系，所以用and。
9. A现在她晚上还在学习，用现在进行时。
10. C want to be a typist想成为一名打字员。
四、(A) 1 C由第一句和第三句可知。
2 B由文章第三行可知。
3 C由第四行可知。
4 A由倒数第二行可知。
5 D由倒数第三句可知。
(B) 1 C由第二段第二句和第三句可判断出。
2 D sick as a dog被用来描述一个有严重疾病的人。
3 D本文以西方文化和中国文化的不同为例，旨在说明不同的国家有不同的文化。
Lesson 4
一、1. excited 2. problem 3. move 4. remember 5. sign
二、1.A B项明显错误。A是信息，C多指口信。
2. C not… until…是固定短语，直到……时候才……。
3. B tell sb. not to do sth.告诉某人不要干某事。Too many修饰可数名词，too much修饰不可数名词。
4. C昨天当他到家的时候，他妈妈正在给他做饭。
5. A at the end of 是在……的末尾，by the end of 是截止到……时候为止, in the end 后不接of 短语。
6. A根据宾语从句的知识可知，后面该用陈述句语序。
7. A worry about为……担心，是固定短语。
8. A名词用what感叹，形容词和副词用how感叹。Fun是不可数名词。
9. B由句意可知。
10. B take a photo of是固定短语。
三、1. How ,did 2. so, that 3. first visiting 4. should, do 5. Thanks, to
四、1. Paragraph 1
Paragraph 2
Paragraph 3
2. They always talked about TV.
3. I don’t know if I’ll continue to have a TV-free life.
4. 我想出了一个主意。
5. (1) hard/ much harder than high school
(2) felt stressed
(3) weren’t very good/ were bad
(4) made more friends
(5) had/ started having more energy
Unit 1 单元测试
一、1. A at the end of 是在……的末尾，by the end of 是截止到……时候为止, in the end 后不接其他词语。
2. B excited表示人的一种感情，而 exciting表示事物的某种特性。答案由句意可知。
3. C It’s +adj. + for sb. +to do sth.是固定句型。
4. C名词用what感叹，形容词和副词用how感叹。news是不可数名词。
5. C used to 是过去常常，后接动词原形。 be used to后接动名词，表示习惯于干某事。
6. B 固定短语。让某人干某事。
7. A固定短语，多亏了你的帮忙。
8. C do something for the first time固定短语，第一次做某事。
9. A confused表示人的一种感情，而 confusing表示事物的某种特性。
10. B be excited about对……感到很兴奋。
11. C while 后接延续性动词，作对比。
12. C 由句意可知是语言问题。
13. B由答语可知。
14. C电话线路不好，你能再大点声吗？
15. B introduce sb. to sb.和 say… to…都是固定短语。
16. C wake up醒来，是固定短语，具体到某一天要用介词on。
17. C laugh at嘲笑，是固定短语。
18. C由句意知该用过去时。
19. B老师太忙了不能准时吃饭，too… to… 太……而不能，是固定短语。
20. C
二、1. A come from来自，是固定短语。
2. A在某个中学上学用介词in。
3. B在肯定的陈述句中，要用too。
4. C由but 可知，她的英语讲得不是很好。
5. D 她每天都起的很早。
6. B for作为，她吃牛奶和鸡蛋作为早饭。
7. A be late迟到，固定短语。
8. B do one’s homework做作业，固定短语。
9. C go to bed 上床睡觉，要用一般现在时。
10. D由前文可以看出她每天都很高兴。
三、（A）1 B由第一段第二句可知。
2 C由第二段第一句可知。
3 B由第一段第四句可知。
4 D由文章最后一句可知。
5 B由上下文可知。
(B) 1 C由文章第一句可知。
2 A由第三行可知。
3 B由第四行可知。
4 D由第六行可知，男孩给他带来了很多麻烦。
5 D 由最后一句可知。
(C) 1 A由第一段第一句可知。
2 C由第一段第三句可知。
3 B由第二段第一句可知。
4 D由第三段第一行可知。
5 B由最后一句可知。
(D) 1 C由第一方框可知，东部和西部相差4.5小时。
2 A由第二方框的第六行可知。
3 D由第三方框可知。
4 B对比四个方框可知。
5 A由下文可知。
四、(A)1. pay 2 people 3was buying 4chatted 5putting
(B)1 reporter 2. Internet 3.Sarah 4. Sydney 5. guide
五、（A）1.first 2. nervous 3. difficult 4. Why 5. slowly
(B) BAFCE
六、(A)1. Because the old and sick people in the nursing home can’t take care of themselves.
2. They were Mrs Sokol, Mr Lipman and Mrs Kagan. / the Cook, the Singer and the Memory Lady.
3. Because Grandpa was badly ill. / Grandpa couldn’t sit up, eat and even speak.
4. 我还没意识到，探视时间就结束了。/ 在我意识到之前，探视时间就结束了。
5. He is helpful/ kind/ warm-hearted…
(B)Dear Miss Gao,
I'm sorry to say that I can't go to school today. It was raining hard yesterday afternoon. On my way home, I met an old woman. She lost her way. I sent her home. I was wet all over. Last night I did my homework. I didn't go to bed until 11 o'clock. After I got up this morning, I felt very bad. I'll go to see the doctor. I want you to give me a day's leave. I think I'll get well very soon.
Thank you!
　　Your student,
Zhao Jun
七、（略）
A. Stay Away From TV
B. My College Life With TV
A. Stay Away From TV
B. My College Life With TV
Scotland 12:00 noon
Scotland is part of the UK. The capital of Scotland is Edinburgh, and the capital of the UK is London. It is twelve noon, or midday, in Edinburgh. Children are having lessons, but they are looking forward to the weekend because there is no school on Saturday and Sunday.
Canada 4:00 a.m. to 8:30 a.m.
Canada is a big country with six time zones(时区). In the west, it is four a.m., and everyone is asleep, but in the east it is half past eight and people are awake. It is a cold Friday morning in November.
Egypt 2:00 p.m.
Friday is already the weekend in Egypt. Friday is a special day for Muslims, so schools, offices and shops are closed in all Arab countries. So now, at two p.m., most people in Egypt are having lunch with their families.
Japan 9:00 p.m.
Japan is seven hours ahead of Egypt, so it is already Friday evening there. The weekend is beginning. Most people are out with friends or watching television or playing computer games.
A. What time is the earliest flight
B. When would you like to go
C. OK. I'll get them for you right away.
D. What about July lst
E. Then till take the tickets.
F. Thanks a lot
G. Have a good time.
pay, people, buy, chat ,putUnit 10 Earth Day
单元词汇导学
1. Earth Day 地球日 2. pick up 捡起，捎脚
3. control pollution 控制污染 4. in honor of 向……表示敬意，为庆祝
5. on this day 在这一天 6. clean up 打扫干净
7. be in trouble 处于困难之中 8. learn about (doing) sth. 学习，了解
9. do certain things 做一些特定的事 10. think of …as… 把……当作……
11.to follow important people’s ideas 跟随重要人物的想法
12.at that time 在那时 13. turn off 关上
14. take enough action 采取足够的行动 15. throw away (out) 扔掉
16. It’s time (for sb.) to do sth.该（某人）干某事了
17. every second weekend 每隔一周 18. have a great time 玩得高兴
19. the same … as 与……一样 20. have sb. do sth.让某人做某事
Lesson 1
学习点拨
本课交际用语：
1. We all should do something to help the earth on this day.
2. What can I do to help
3. I see!
名师授课
1. ______ a tree _____ very important.
A. Plant, is B. Planting, are C. To plant, is
解析 选C。动词不定式和动名词都可以做句子的主语，但谓语动词应为单数第三人称。
2. There is a pen on the floor. Please _______.
A. pick up it B. pick it up C. pick them up
解析 选B。动词+副词构成的动副短语后接宾语是代词时，代词必须放中间。而且a pen是单数应用it代替。
课后作业
一、词汇 单词释义
1. They used to _____ trees every spring. (put in the ground to grow)
2. Please pick up _____ on the ground. (waste things)
3. “Hello” is a kind of _____. (words with which sb. is greeted)
4. ______ the ball to me. (send sth. by moving the arm)
5. We should help to control the _____ of our city. (polluting or being polluted)
二、单项选择
1. Please ______ the paper in the ground. Don’t _____.
A. pick up, throw away it B. pick, throw them about
C. pick up, throw it away
2. We eat zongzi in ____ of Qu Yuan.
A. remember B. love C. honor
3. _____ a tree is fun! Trees help control _______.
A. Planting, pollution B. To plant, pollute C. Planting, polluting
4. Spring is ____ trees and flowers.
A. a good time for planting B. good time to plant
C. time for plant
5. Now there are many countries ____ things in honor of Earth Day. All of us should do ______ things for our earth.
A. do, honor B. doing, certain C. to do, special
6. Don’t throw things _____ the ground.
A. on B. to C. out
7. Mike ____ the book shop. I have to wait for him.
A. went to B. has gone to C. has been to
8. What we can do is _____ the poor.
A. to help B. helping C. help
9. We should do something ______this day.
A. in B. on C. through
10. Which stress of the following is different from others
A. greeting B. control C. garbage
三、交际运用
(A)
从方框内A~G选项中选出能填入空白处的最佳选项补全对话（有两项为多余选项）
A: ____1__ What can we reuse, Tom
B: We can reuse plastic bottles or
glass bottles. We can also reuse
clothes.
A: ___2__
B: My younger brother can wear my
clothes.
A: ___3___
B: ___4___
A: Yes, you’re clever. I advise my mom to do it when she goes shopping.
B: ___5___
A: Really
1.________ 2._______ 3._______ 4.________ 5._______
(B)
A: What can we do in ___1___ of Earth Day
B: We can do some things to help the Earth. For example, we can try ____2___ to throw _____3__ too much garbage.
A: Right! We should try to ___4___ air and water pollution. What else can we do
B: We can tell people ____5___ Earth Day! We can show Earth Day flags.
1.________ 2._______ 3._______ 4.________ 5._______
Lesson 2
学习点拨
1.clean up garbage清除垃圾
2.be in trouble 处于困难之中
3.plant trees in honor of Earth Day 种树庆祝地球日
4. hear of 听说
5. learn about controlling pollution better 学会更好的控制污染
6.need to do certain things 需要做一些特定的事
7. at that time 在那时
8. turn off 关上 9. think of …as… 把……当作……
10.to follow important people’s ideas 跟随重要人物的想法
11. take enough action 采取足够的行动
名师授课
1. ____ is easy to plant a tree.
A. That B. This C. It
解析 选C。it在句子中做形式主语，代替后面的真主语to plant a tree。This,that无此用法。
2. September is the ____ month of the year.
A. ninths B. ninth C. tenth
解析 选B。从答案可知应选择序数词。September是九月份，即第九个月。
课后作业
一、词汇 单词释义
1. I’m sorry to _____ you. (cause worry, pain)
2. Uncle Wang helped me to _____ my bike. (repair or mend sth.)
3. We should ______ water. (not waste)
4. It’s great _____ to be invited. (being pride and pleasure)
5. It’s raining heavier than _____. (at any time)
二、单项选择
1. Your room is so dirty. Please _____.
A. pick up B. make it cleanly C. clean up
2. We should always make our environment _____.
A. clean B. beautifully C. glad
3. There is _____ pollution on our planet.
A. too much B. too many C. much too
4. In the _____ 2000, Earth Day happened _______ the 30th time.
A. century, on B. time, in C. year, for
5. Do you do anything _______ Earth Day
A. on B. at C. in
6. We’ll go to dinner ________ your birthday.
A. because B. in honor of C. since
7. I haven’t ______ him since he left but Liu Chang has got three letters from him.
A. heard of B. heard from C. heard about
8. —The more you learn about _____ pollution, the better our environment will be.
A. control B. to control C. controlling
9. Which word of the following has a different stress from the others
A. however B. celebrate C. certain
10. He found _______ interesting to travel by train.
A. it B. it’s C. that was
三、完形填空
A thousand years ago, Hong Kong was covered by a thick forest. As more and more people came to 1 in Hong Kong, these trees were cut down and burnt. Now there is 2 forest left, though there are still some small areas(地方) covered with trees. We call these woods.
Elephants, tigers and many 3 animals were living in the thick forest. When people came to live in Hong Kong, the 4 began to die out. Early farmers grew rice and 5 pigs and chickens in the valleys. They cut down the trees and burnt them. They needed 6 to keep themselves warm in winter, to cook their food and to keep away the dangerous animals. Elephants quickly disappeared(消失) because there was not enough food for them. 7 did most of the wolves and tigers. Monkeys and many other animals soon 8 in the same way.
You might think that there are no longer any animals in Hong Kong 9 in the zoos. There are still about 36 different animals 10 there. One of the most interesting of Hong Kong’s animals is the barking deer. These are beautiful little animals 11 a rich brown coat and a white patch(补丁) under the tail. They look like deer 12 but they are much like a dog 13 . In Hong Kong the barking deer has only a real enemy(敌人)— 14 . People hunt these little animals though it is illegal(违法的). There are now not many barking deer left. So it is important 15 people to protect (保护) wild animals.
1. A. work B. study C. live D. enjoy
2. A. many B. a few C. no D. not
3. A. other B. others C. the other D. another
4. A. people B. animals C. plants D. things
5. A. grew B. made C. got D. kept
6. A. fire B. hotness C. heat D. stoves(炉子)
7. A. So B. Such C. As D. Nor
8. A. lived B. died C. came D. left
9. A. besides B. except C. and D. or
10. A. live B. to live C. lived D. living
11. A. have B. without C. with D. get
12. A. high B. higher C. short D. shorter
13. A. shouting B. crying C. barking D. talking
14. A. tigers B. men C. wolves D. elephants
15. A. to B. for C. like D. of
四、任务性阅读
Pollution problems are becoming more and more serious. One of them 1 “white pollution” caused by plastic, such as shopping bags, boxes and cups. In China about three billion plastic shopping bags 2 every day, which results in a great waste of resources (资源) and heavy environmental 3 . Luckily, the government 4 us from using free plastic bags, telling all stores and supermarkets not to provide customers(顾客) with free plastic bags since June 1, 2008. From then on, people have been supposed to use cloth bags and 5 baskets instead of plastic bags in order to protect our environment.
Lesson 3
学习点拨
序数词
序数词表示事物的顺序，往往与定冠词连用。
1．基数词变序数词可利用口诀巧记：“一、二、三，特殊记，八去“t 九去“e”，“ve”
要用“f”替，见“y”变成“i”和“e”，词尾加上“th”，若是遇到几十几，只变个位就可以。” 变法如下：first，second，third，eight—eighth nine—ninth，five—fifth，twelve—twelfth，twenty—twentieth，forty—fortieth，twenty-five—twenty-fifth。
2．其余情况均在基数词后加th。如： six—sixth, nineteen—nineteenth , hundred— hundredth, thousand—thousandth等。
3. 序数词的简写形式为阿拉伯数字加序数词最后两个字母。例如：1st、2nd、3rd、4th。
名师授课
1. I failed in my English exam. But my father told me to have ____ try.
A. the second B. a second C. a two
解析 选B。如果序数词不表示顺序，而表示“又一个/次，另一个/次”时，则不能用the, 要用a.
2. This is my _______ time visiting China.
A. the first B. a first C. first
解析 选C。序数词前有物主代词(my)修饰时，前面不能再加冠词。
课后作业
一、词汇 单词释义
1. We need _____ things for this dish. (special, specific)
2. It’s _____ to learn English. (very serious)
3. Many countries will ____ the meeting. (take part in)
4. Monday is the ______ day of a week. (the number after the first)
5. How did the accident ______ (take place)
二、单项选择
1. Some students are sweeping the floor, _______ are cleaning the windows. What ______ can we do
A. else, other B. other, else C. others, else
2. There are _______ many bottles on the ground. That is the ______ bottle that I’ve picked up.
A. such, third B. too, three C. so, third
3. It’s time for us _______ success.
A. celebrate B. to celebrate C. celebrating
4. We can tell people ________ Earth Day.
A. about B. for C. on
5. We shouldn’t throw cans _______ paper on the ground.
A. and B. but C. or
6. This is the second pizza she’s ________.
A. eat B. ate C. eaten
7. I go to my hometown every _______ weekend.
A. two B. second C. a second
8. The event is on June _______.
A. two B. the second C. twelveth
9. The girl wanted to sing ______ song in English.
A. the others B. a second C. other
10. _______ of the students in our class _______ girls.
A. Three fifths, are B. Three fifth, are C. Third fives, is
三、完形填空
The water and the land are thought part of the earth surface (表面). The air is 1 thought a kind of blanket (毯子) 2 the earth. But it is 3 than that. Maybe you have been in a cave (洞穴) 4 in the earth. Did you think about the air that was in the cave The land has some air mixed in it. Air is even mixed 5 the water in the sea. These examples show that some air is 6 the earth’s surface as well as above it.
Men once 7 that there were four basic things from which everything else was made. They 8 these things-earth, fire, air and water the four elements (元素). 9 man made more observations, they 10 that fire was not an element. 11 they concluded (得出结论) that land, air and water were not elements, 12 .
13 , there are more than 100 elements from which scientists believe all things are made. 14 land, air and water are not elements, they are three main parts of man’s environment (环境). You will 15 more about them as you study the earth.
1. A. usually B. seldom C. never D. sometimes
2. A. above B. around C. across D. among
3. A. better B. more C. less D. worse
4. A wide B. high C. long D. deep
5. A. at B. in C. with D. to
6. A. below B. before C. between D. beside
7. A. found B. thought C. knew D. understood
8. A. called B. told C. name D. said
9. A. That B. For C. As D. So
10. A. believe B. planned C. decided D. want
11. A. End B. At last C. Hardly D. Nearly
12. A. too B. neither C. also D. either
13. A. True B. Read C. In fact D. Correctly
14. A. When B. As C. Since D. Though
15. A. exam B. study C. exercise D. know
四、阅读理解
(A)
Hundreds of years ago, life was much harder than it is today. People didn’t have modern machines. There was no modern medicine, either.
Life today has brought new problems. One of the biggest is pollution （污染）. Water pollution has made our rivers and lakes dirty. It kills our fish and polluted our drinking water. Noise pollution makes us talk louder and become angry more easily. Air pollution is the most serious kind of pollution. It’s bad to all living things in the world.
Cars, planes and factories all pollute our air every day. Sometimes the polluted air is so thick that it is like a quilt over a city. This kind of quilt is called smog（烟雾）.
Many countries are making rules to fight pollution. Factories must now clean their water before it is thrown away, they mustn’t blow dirty smoke into the air.
We need to do many other things. We can put waste things in the dustbin and not throw it on the ground. We can go to work by bus or with our friends in the same car. If there are fewer people driving, there will be less pollution.
Rules are not enough. Every person must help to fight pollution.
1. Hundreds of years ago, life was much harder than it is today because _______.
A. there were not any modern machines
B. there was no modern medicine
C. both A and B
D. there were not many people
2. What is the biggest problem in today’s life
A. Water pollution B. Air pollution
C. Noise D. Pollution
3. The most serious kind of pollution is ________.
A. noise pollution B. air pollution
C. water pollution D. A, B and C
4. Factories must clean their water ________.
A. before they are thrown away
B. when they are thrown away
C. after it is thrown away
D. before it is thrown away
5. From the passage we know that ________.
A. a few years ago, there was no smog at all
B. today people don’t have to talk to each other in a loud voice
C. we can drink water from the polluted rivers and lakes’
D. people are making rules in order to fight pollution
(B)
For many years scientists have said that the earth is getting warmer. Now they have found something new－hot cities! In the southern US, they have found that cities become very hot in summer. For example, the city of Atlanta in Georgia has rooftop temperatures of up to 50 degrees while it is 27 degrees in the streets! At night, the outsides of the building stay so hot that the heat of the city causes storm over the city.
China also has the same kind of problems. Every year more farming land is used for factories or offices. More housing is needed, too. As people become richer, they buy more cars. Now roads are needed and new car parks are built in the city centers. This all makes the city hotter.
It is not easy to change the situation. City planners say that we should plant more trees in the middle of cities. Every new street should have trees on both sides, they say. Trees make the temperatures lower, so we should have more trees in our parks and squares. Also we should paint our roofs white. If we do this, they do not become so hot. Every roof in a hot and sunny country should have solar roof panels. The electricity from these can be used to run the air conditioners in the building.
People continue to cut down forests around the cities. This makes the problem worse. Cities are growing faster and faster. By the year 2025, 80％ of the world’s population will be living in cities. If we go on like this, there will not be enough farmland to feed everyone in the world.
1. The best title for the passage is _______.
A. The earth is getting warmer B. More land is needed
C. Cities are warmer in winter D. Scientists are worried about storms
2. What have scientists found
A. Atlanta is the hottest town in the USA. B. Buildings become very hot in the sun.
C. It is not as hot on the roof as in the street. D. There are not as many storms as before.
3. What can we do to make the cities cooler
A. Make more Parks. B. Use air conditioners more.
C. Paint the roofs of all the white buildings. D. Plant more trees.
4. What may happen in future
A. Most people will move to the villages. B. People will plant more trees outside the cities.
C. We will not have enough food. D. The problem will get better, not worse
Lesson 4
学习点拨
1. As we know, pollution does great harm to human beings.
众所周知，污染对人类危害很大。
2. It is very important to deal with the rubbish in cities. Rubbish should
be treated properly.处理城市内的垃圾很重要。垃圾应该被正确对待。
3. Now more and more people have come to realize how serious this problem is.
现在，越来越多的人开始意识到这个问题有多严重。
4. Laws have been passed to protect our environment.已经通过了保护环境的法律。
5. A large quantity of trees should be planted.大量的树应该被种植。
6. We must make good use of water and avoid polluting it.
我们必须好好利用水资源，避免污染它。
7. Something must be done to prevent factories from polluting the air.
必须采取措施防止工厂污染空气。
名师授课
1. My birthday is on May 1, what about _______
A. you B. your C. yours
解析 选C。yours为名词性物主代词，是your birthday之意。
2. Have your daughter _____ quiet, please.
A. keep B. to keep C. keeping
解析 选A。have为使役动词，有两种结构have sb. do sth.和have sth. done
课后作业
一、词汇 单词释义
1. By this way I got the _____ answer as yours. (not different)
2. This kind of cake tastes ______. (nice to eat)
3. Did you join the last night _____ in Alice’s home (gathering to celebrate)
4. My birthday is on _____ fourth. (the seventh month of year)
5. It’s my _____ time to travel around New York. (the one after the second)
二、单项选择
1. Let’s _____ waste water.
A. try to B. try not to C. try not
2. It’s a pleasant way _____ our city clean.
A. help keep B. help to keep C. to help keep
3. This year is my ______ birthday.
A. twelve B. twelveth C. twelfth
4. Who was born _____ the same date ____ you
A. on, as B. in, as C. on, like
5. Let’s _____ every day as Earth Day.
A. think of B. regard C. A and B
6. We don’t honor Earth Day in _____.
A. country enough B. enough countries C. enough country
7. Our plant is probably _____, we should help it.
A. in trouble B. in dangerous C. A and B
8. _____, we should plant a tree. _____, we should pick up the garbage on the ground.
A. First, The second B. First, Second C. The first, Second
9. Two of my friends were _____ my party last night. We were playing _____.
A. at, happy B. on, happy C. at, happily
10. Planting a tree is ____. Trees help control pollution.
A. fun B. a fun C. great funs
三、把下列短语译成英语
1. 第12课________ 2. 304号房间_________ 3. 半小时_________
4. 每日三次_________ 5. 第25页_________ 6. 20世纪90年代_________
7. 4路公共汽车_________ 8. 第15中学_________ 9. 21世纪_________
10. 两吨半_________ 11. 差一刻三点_________ 12. 第二册_________
四、阅读表达
阅读短文，根据其内容回答问题。
One cool April 22 morning, people started the day as usual. Yet it was not a normal day. What’s so special about April 22 The answer is simple. It is Earth Day. People all over the world celebrate this important day. The idea of having a special day to celebrate Earth began in the 1960s. Life was very different then. Few people talked or even thought about the environment. Most people had no idea how dirty our air and water were.
On April 22, 1970, twenty million (百万) Americans joined the first Earth Day activities. They showed that people really did want to do something about the environment. Since then laws have been passed to protect the air, water, land, and animals.
The vehicles such as cars and buses you ride in must pass tests to make sure they don’t cause too much pollution. Thanks to this law, cars today release (排放) about half as many bad chemicals as cars did back in 1970. As a result, the air we breathe is cleaner than it once was.
Rivers and lakes are also cleaner today than they were in the 1970s. It’s a good thing because they needed a lot of help. The Cuyahoga River in Ohio was so polluted that rubbish and oil on the river even caught fire! Today, the river is cleaner. It no longer burns. It’s healthy enough for birds, fish, and other animals.
Now the celebration has spread to other countries. More than 175 countries take part each year.
In 2007, people in China paid much attention to a big problem. People were throwing away 27 million plastic bags a day! People had “Bye-Bye Throwaway Culture Week.” They wanted everyone to see how polluted it was to throw away so many plastic bags. In 2008, China passed new laws against them.
Every April 22, millions get together to clean and protect Earth. They also celebrate how far we have come. Our job is to put this knowledge to work. You can help keep our planet healthy too!
1. Is Earth Day on April 22
______________________________________
2. What caught fire on the Cuyahoga River
__________________________________________
3. How many countries take part in the celebration each year now
________________________________________
4. Why did Chinese people have “Bye-Bye Throwaway Culture Week”
____________________________________________
5. What the purpose of celebrating the Earth Day
_________________________________________
单元测试
一、单项选择(20分)
1. _____ fun. Let’s do it.
A. Plant flowers are B. Planting flowers is C. Planting flowers are
2. I’m scared of water. _____ difficult for me to learn to swim.
A. This is B. It C. It’s
3. It’s our duty to keep the schoolyard clean. Let’s ____ the garbage on the ground.
A. pick up B. clean up C. throw away
4. Could you help me ____ the computer It doesn’t work.
A. on B. with C. work
5.— Have you ____ Earth Day
— Yes, it’s _____ April 22nd.
A. hear, on B. heard of, on C. listen to, in
6. It’s spring now. It’s good time _____ on an outing.
A. go B. to going C. to go
7. At school on Earth Day, students learn about _____ the Earth.
A. help B. helping C. to help
8. Let’s ____ every day _____ Earth Day and keep the environment clean.
A. think of, on B. regarded, as C. think of, as
9. To take a walk _____ a clear day is nice. Why not go hiking into the mountain this weekend
A. on B. in C. at
10. There ____ too ____ _____ in the world. We must do something to solve the problem.
A. is, many, pollution B. is, much, pollution C. are, many, pollutions
11. ____ interesting music! I wanted to hear ____ second time.
A. What an, the B. What, a C. What, the
12. Los Angeles is the _____ in the USA.
A. second the largest cities B. second largest cities C. second largest city
13. I’m sorry I have trouble ____ the work.
A. to finish B. finish C. finishing
14. We should help the people _____.
A. in trouble B. at trouble C. on trouble
15. You’d better _____ the light when you are not using.
A. turn off B. to turn off C. to turn on
16. There are ____ floors in the building. I live on the ____ floor.
A. tenth, ten B. tenth, tenth C. ten, tenth
17. My birthday is on August ____. It’s my _____ birthday.
A. the second, thirteen B. second, the thirteenth C. the second, thirteenth
18.—_______ do you go to your hometown
—Every second weekend.
A. How soon B. How often C. How long
19. Which stress is different from the others
A. control B. garbage C. important
20. Do you know our earth is the sun’s _____.
A. satellite B. star C. planet
二、完形填空(10分)
Once there was a king who told some of his people to dig a pond (池子).The king then told his people that one person 21 each family had to bring a glass of milk during the night and put it into the pond. So, by the morning, the pond should be 22 of milk.
After 23 the order, everyone went home. As one man prepared his milk, he thought that since everyone was bringing milk, he would just 24 a glass of water and put that into the pond instead. 25 it was dark at night, no one would notice it, so he quickly went and put the water into the pond and 26 home.
In the morning, the king went to visit the pond. To his 27 , the pond was only filled with water! What happened Yes! Everyone had the same idea 28 that man. They all thought, “I don’t have to waste my milk. Someone else will do it.”
Dear friends, when you plan to help poor people or people in trouble, do not think that 29 will take care of it. Instead, it starts with you. If you don’t do it, no one else will, so change yourself and make a 30 .
21. A. at B. from C. on D. with
22. A. filled B. empty C. crowded D. full
23. A. giving B. refusing C. receiving D. offering
24. A. hide B. steal C. waste D. drink
25. A. If B. Since C. While D. After
26. A. left B. came C. returned D. arrived
27. A. surprise B. satisfaction C. joy D. taste
28. A. with B. to C. as D. of
29. A. others B. the others C. none D. neither
30. A. face B. mistake C. living D. difference
三、阅读理解(20分) (A)
At the shopping mall，you probably think about spending, not saving．Think about all the lights that keep the mall bright．Think about all the water faucets(水龙头)in the toilet. Think about all the air conditioning in summer．Saving energy is a hot topic for such a big place!
Many things at the mall use energy．Electric lights，infrared(红外感应)faucets and air-conditioners need electricity to work．One way to save energy is by keeping lights clean．More and more dust and dirt make the lights less bright．When malls keep lights clean, they can use fewer lights and keep the area just as bright. Using fewer lights means using less energy.
You step up to the water faucet．The water starts to flow．You don't have to touch a thing．Why do malls have such fancy faucets The answer is simple．They save water．Sometimes people forget to turn the water off after they wash．Infrared faucets turn themselves off.
The ……
31．________is a hot topic for a big mall．
A．To spend money B. To save energy
C．To keep the mall bright D．To buy things
32. Malls use infrared faucets mainly because________
A．they save water B. they are fancy
C. they are simple D. they turn themselves off
33．Which of the following cannot save energy
A．Using fewer lights． B. Using infrared faucets．
C．Using air-conditioners D．Keeping lights clean．
34．What will the fourth paragraph probably talk about
A. How to save water when using infrared faucets in the mall
B．How to save energy when using air-conditioners in the mall
C. How to save money when shopping in the mall．
D．How to spend money when shopping in the mall．
35．The best title for the passage is_________
A．Lights, faucets and air-conditioners B．Spending less money
C. Energy saving at the mall D．A hot topic
(B)
Can plants eat people Probably not, but there are many plants that eat meat. Some of them are big, and they can eat small animals. One famous meat-eating plant is the Venus flytrap(捕蝇草).
The Venus flytrap is a very strange plant. It grows in dry parts of the United States. Its leaves are like the pages of a book. They can open and close very quickly. Inside the leaves, there are three small hairs. If a fly touches one of the hairs, the leaf closes quickly. The fly cannot get out. In about half an hour, the leaf presses the fly until it is dead. Then, the plant covers the fly. Slowly, the plant eats the fly.
Why do plants do it Most plants get what they need from the sun, the air, and the ground. In some places, the ground is very poor. It doesn’t have all these important things, especially nitrogen(氮). Animal meat has a lot of nitrogen, so some plants eat meat to get what they need. Let’s hope that some of the bigger plants don’t get the same idea!
36. The Venus flytrap is a kind of ____.
A. plant B. animal C. food D. meat
37. The Venus flytrap grows in ____.
A. most parts of the world B. some parts of Africa
C. dry parts of the United States D. wet parts of England
38. From the passage, we learn that ____.
A. all plants can eat people B. all plants can eat animals
C. some plants can eat people D. some plants can eat animals
39. The underlined word “presses”probably means ____ in Chinese.
A.挤压 B.关上 C.打开 D.松开
40. Why do some plants eat animal meat Because ____.
A. plants are dangerous to animals
B. animals are dangerous to plants
C. plants want to get what they need from animal meat
D. plants want to protect themselves against animals
(C)
Dear editor,
I’m confused(迷惑的) these days. We are taught at home and at school that violence（暴力） is bad. For example, last week, my friend and I were playing at the beach. We found a really beautiful shell. My friend picked it up, but I saw it first. I said it was mine. However, he said it was his. I really wanted the shell, and I even thought about hitting him to show how angry I was.
Now should that be right No! I should not use violence. Instead, I should talk with my friend to solve that. My parents and teachers often tell me that using violence is the least civilized way to solve problems.
So, if adults have a disagreement, and if they use violence toward each other in order to win, is that right No!
Now I’m confused. When two countries disagree, they often use violence. They fight a war. Using violence is not OK at home, at school, or in our country but OK between two countries. Why
A war is extreme (极端的)violence. Not only soldier but citizens（公民）, including small children and babies, will be killed and injured because of wars.
Some people say they are fighting wars in order to solve problems and make peace. But can they really “make peace” by using violence and killing so many people
I don’t think that bombs and missiles（炸弹和导弹）can reach people’s hearts and change them. Bombs and missiles can’t create love and care, and that’s what we need in the world. Why can’t they use their wisdom（智慧）and talk it over
Yours,
Joshua
41. What happened to Joshua and his friend last week at the beach
A. They had a fight. B. Joshua hit his friend.
C. They had a class about violence. D. They found a beautiful shell.
42. The underlined word “civilized” probably means “_______” in Chinese.
A.城市的 B.粗鲁的 C.文明的 D.勇敢的
43. How should we solve problems according to the letter
A. We should argue（辩论） about the problems. B. We should use wisdom and talk them over. C. We should study at school. D. We should use violence.
44. What does the underlined（划线的） sentence mean
A. We need to use violence to solve problems.
B. What we need is bombs and missiles.
C. We need bombs and missiles to create love and care.
D. What we need in the world is love and care.
45. The letter is about ________.
A. Joshua’s thoughts about wars B. Joshua’s story
C. hate and love D. arguments
(D)
Very hot weather is common in many parts of the world. Although hot weather just makes most people hot, it can cause medical problems and death.
Floods, storms and other terrible natural events kill thousands of people every year. And we hear much about them in news reports. We generally hear little about heat, which experts say may be nature's most dangerous killer.
Health experts say that since the year 1900, very hot weather has killed more people in the United States than any other natural event. One year — the unusually hot summer of 1980 heat caused about 1, 700 deaths in the United States. In 1995, more than 600 people died in another heat wave in one city — Chicago, Illinois.
Besides drinking lots of cool water, doctors say there are some other things to do to protect against the health dangers of heat. Stay out of the sun, if possible. Wear loose(宽松的) and light-colored clothes. Wear a hat while in the sun. Eat fewer hot and heavy foods. And, when possible, cook foods during cooler time of the day. If possible, rest more often.
Health experts say these simple steps can prevent(阻止) the dangerous health problems caused by heat. They will prevent sickness, help you feel better and may even save your life.
46. Hot weather is common .
A. all over the world B. in many parts of the world
C. in some parts of the world D. in a few parts of the world
47. Experts say maybe is nature's most dangerous killer.
A. heat B. a flood C. a storm D. an earthquake
48. About 1700 people died of heat in the US ________.
A. in 1900 B. in 1980 C. in 1995 D. in l980 and 1995
49. According to the passage, there are ________ steps which are mentioned to stop the dangerous health problems caused by heat.
A. 6 B. 7 C. 8 D. 9
50. The passage is talking about .
A. all kinds of terrible natural events in the world
B. some health problems caused by hot weather
C. how to prevent health problems
D. the health problems in hot weather and the ways to stop them
四、任务性阅读(10分) (A)
选择下列词汇或短语完成下面对话。
Nina：Are you going to Jane’s birthday party, Wendy
Wendy：Yes．I______(51)her invitation yesterday .Are you going tomorrow, Nina
Nina：Yes，of course．I wouldn’t_________(52)her birthday party for anything.
Wendy：Could you tell me what I should take as a birthday present
Nina：I was going to ask the same question．
Wendy：We must hurry．The________(53)，the better.
Nina：I can’t agree more．Well，I’ll tell you what．Let's_______(54) together right now and pick out what she may like．
Wendy：Good________(55)!
(B)
A man had a little daughter—an only and much -loved child. He lived for her. So when she became ill, he became a crazy man. He tried everything to bring her health back.
However, his efforts didn’t work and the child died. The father was really sad, shutting himself away from his friends and refusing to do any activity. He didn’t want anything to bring him back to his normal self until one night he had a dream.
He was in heaven and saw a group of all the little children angels(天使). They were walking in a line. All the angels were wearing white clothes and each child carried a candle(蜡烛). He noticed that one child’s candle was not lighted（点燃）. Then he saw that the child was his little girl. _2_he rushed to her right away and put her into his arms. He kissed her and then asked, “Why is your candle alone unlighted, darling ”
“Daddy, they often light it again, but your tears always put it out.”
Just then he woke up from his dream. The lesson was clear, and its effects were quick. From that hour on, he was not a sad father. He became cheerful with his friends. His darling’s candle would not longer be put out by his useless tears.
56. 从文中找出与下句意义相近的句子。
The father was too sad to communicate with others and to do anything.
________________________________________________________
57. 根据短文内容，在空白处填上一个合适的连词。_______________
58. 根据短文内容，回答问题。
Why did the father become cheerful at last
________________________________________________________
59. 将文中划线句子译成汉语。
________________________________________________________
60. 根据短文内容，写出文章的标题。(7个词以内)
________________________________________________________
五、交际运用(10分) (A)
阅读下面对话，从方框内7个选项中选择5个恰当的句子完成此对话，并将其番号填入题前括号内。
A. How much are they B. Would you like to go with me C. To the flower shop.D. Can you go with me E. What kind of flowers do you want to buy F. What are you going to do there G. Can I help you
Li Ming: Hello, Wang Hai! Where are you going
Wang Hai: 61
Li Ming: To the flower shop 62
Wang Hai: Don’t you know tomorrow is the second Sunday of May
Li Ming: Oh, I remember! Tomorrow is Mother’s Day!
Wang Hai: Yes, you’re right! 63
Li Ming: Of course, I’d like to. Let’s go to the shop together.
(At the shop)
Wang Hai: 64
Li Ming: I think carnations(康乃馨) are the best. What do you think
Wang Hai: That’s great! I agree. Let’s choose some fresh ones.
Li Ming and Wang Hai: 65
Saleswoman: They are 50 yuan in all.
(B)
用恰当的单词填空，完成对话。每空一词。（每小题1分，共5分）
A: Our National Day is coming. I’m looking forward to it.
B: Me, too. As we know, it’s the 66 birthday of the PRC.
A: What are you going to do celebrate it
B: A great military review (大阅兵) will 67 held in Tian’anmen Square. How I wish I could fly there!
A: I’m afraid we’ll all have to watch it on TV.
B: But I’m 68 it must be perfectly wonderful! Our country is getting stronger and stronger.
A: Right, especially after we experienced so many big events in 2008. We all feel 69 of China.
B: Let’s 70 our country a better and brighter future.
六、阅读表达(10分)
(A)
The Christmas Present
Elizabeth lived with her six children in a small house. One winter, there was a big flood and quite a few houses were washed away, but Elizabeth’s house was high enough to escape it.
Elizabeth took in one of the families which had lost everything. She shared her home until the family could build another house. Elizabeth’s friends could not understand why she wanted to give so much when she already had so many children to support.
“Well,” Elizabeth explained to her friends, “at the end of World War I, there was a poor woman in a town in Germany. Her husband had been killed in the war and she had a lot of children, just like me now.”
“The day before Christmas, this woman said to her children, ‘We won’t be able to have much for Christmas. I’m going to get just one present for us all. Now I’ll go and get it.’ She came back with a little girl who had no parents. ‘Here’s our present,’ she said to her own children.”
“The children were more than excited to get such a present. They welcomed the little girl warmly, and she grew up as their sister. I was that Christmas present.”
71. One winter a big flood __________ away many __________.
72. __________ Elizabeth had a big ___________ to support, she shared her home with the homeless.
73. Elizabeth told her friends about her own story because they couldn’t understand __________ she _____________
74. A poor German woman with her children ___________ Elizabeth as their family member on the day _____________ Christmas.
75. The story tells us that we should all be kind to __________ the people in __________.
(B)
假如你是班长，因为有冷空气来临，你用英语向全班同学作预报，提醒他们要注意
保暖。具体内容如下：（词数30词左右。）
　　1.冷空气今夜到达本市；
　　2.气温下降到零下7摄氏度；
　　3.有强劲的大风，北部有大雪；
4.多穿衣服；路滑，骑车要小心。
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
七、书面表达(20分)
“地球一小时”是世界自然基金会（WWF）应对全球气候变化所发起的一项活动，倡议世界各城市在特定时间熄灯一小时，以表明对环保行动的支持。请你以“”为主题校园“英语学科园地”撰稿，宣传这一倍受全球瞩目的环保活动。
要求：1、内容完整，意思连贯，语句通顺，书写规范；文中不得出现真实的姓名与校名；
2、必须用上表格中的信息，词数80左右，不包含已给出句子的词数。
2007年 ◆3月31日，悉尼率先行动◆超过220万家庭与商户在晚上7：30---8：30同时熄灯
2008年 ◆3月29日，成为全球性的活动（a gobal activity）◆得到35个国家五千万人的支持（support）
2009年 ◆3月28日，88个国家2100多个城市参加◆“地球一小时”来到中国
活动目的 ◆ 节约能源（energy） ◆改善气候（climate）
有意义地度过一小时的方式 ◆与家人共进烛光晚餐（in the candlelight）◆与朋友一起分享故事◆你的建议（1—2条）
Earth Hour
Earth Hour started in Sydney at 7:30 p. m. on March 31, 2007. More than 2.2million homes and business turned off their lights for an hour. A year later, on March 29, Earth Hour 2008··· ···_____________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Come on! Join us in Earth Hour 2010!
Unit 10 答案
Lesson 1
一、1.plant 2.garbage 3.greeting 4.throw 5.pollution
二、1. C动词+副词构成的动副短语后接宾语是代词时，代词必须放中间。而且paper是不可数名词，应用it代替。
2. C in honor of 向……表示敬意，为庆祝；固定短语。
3. A树帮助控制污染。第二个空要填名词。
4. B good time to do sth.干某事的好时间。
5. B 动名词作伴随状态。
6. A不要把东西扔在地板上。
7. B由题意知，他去了还没回来。所以用has gone to。
8. A动名词作表语。
9. B具体到某一天要用介词on。10. B
三、(A)DCABE(B)1.honor 2.nor 3.away 4.control 5.about
Lesson 2
一、1.trouble 2.fix 3.save 4.honor 5.ever
二、1. C clean up 打扫干净。
2. A我们应该使得我们的环境干净。Make + sth. +形容词，固定用法。
3. A too much太多，修饰不可数名词； too many太多，修饰可数名词； much too太，后接形容词。
4. C在2000年，第30次过地球日。
5. A具体到某一天要用介词on。
6. B in honor of 向……表示敬意，为庆祝；固定短语。
7. B hear of/about听说； hear from收到某人的来信。
8. C learn about doing sth.学习关于干某事。
9. A 10. A it 作形式宾语，代替后面的动词不定式。
三、1. C 表示有了人的居住后，情况才发生了改变。
2.C根据下面一句话得知大面积的森林已经消失了。
3. A many other animals 表示其余的许多种动物，但不代表世界上所有的动物，故不选the other 。
4. B 由于人多了，动物就变少了。
5. D keep 这里表示“饲养”，而grow意思是“种植”。
6. A根据后面的取暖、烧饭、驱赶动物，可见这里他们需要的是火。
7. A so+助动词+主语“表示“某人（某物）也这样”，这里表示狼和老虎也消失了。
8. B跟上一句表达同样的意思。
9. B besides 表示“除了……还有……”，而except“除……之外”。故选except表示除了动物园其它地方就没有动物了。
10. D There be sb./sth.+ doing 为固定搭配。
11. C with引导的介宾短语常常用来表示人或物的外貌特征。
12. A表示长得和鹿差不多高。
13. C狗叫声通常用barking。
14. B根据整篇文章的观点就可得知人类才是动物真正的敌人。
15. B “It be + 形+for sb. + to do” 表示对某人来说做某事怎样（简单、困难、重要……）而of sb.表示人的性格或品质，如kind, bad, nice 等。
四、1.is called 2.are used 3.pollution 4.has stopped 5.shopping
Lesson 3
一、1. certain 2.important 3.participate 4.second 5.happen
二、1. C some … others… 有的……有的……；other不能和特殊疑问词连用。
2. C so many如此多的，后接可数名词复数；序数词前才加 the。
3. B It’s time for sb. to do sth.该某人做某事了。
4. A tell sb. about sth.告诉某人关于某事。
5. C 在否定句中不用and而用or。
6. C由the second可知，应用现在完成时。
7. B every second weekend每隔一个周末。
8. B日期要用序数词。Twelve的序数词是 twelfth。
9. B序数词前加不定冠词，表示又一个，另外一个。
10. A分子用基数词，分母用序数词，分子大于1时分母用复数；谓语动词的数与分数后的名词保持一致。
三、1.A空气通常被看成是裹在地球外表的毯子。
2 B
3.B more than固定短语“不仅仅”。
4.D根据常识，洞穴当然在地球的深处。
5.C固定短语be mixed with。
6.A与下文中above的意思相反，即在地表之下。
7.B人们误以为，事实并非如此。
8.A他们“称之为……”told , said 都不准确，而name的时态不对。
9.C这里的as有“随着”的意思，相当于when 。
10.C此处decided意为“得出结论”。Believe很具有迷惑性，但其时态不对。特别要当心呀。
11.B最终得出结论。另外三个选择都很显然不对。
12.D either用于否定句，“也不”的意思。
13.C 无论是语法结构还是意思只有In fact对。
14.D 尽管它们不是元素，但他们是人类环境的三个主要部分。
15.D 你会对它们了解得更多。
四、(A) 1 C由第一段后两句可知。
2 D由第二段第二句可知。
3 B由第二段第四行可知。
4 D由第四段第二句可知。
5 D 由最后一段可知。
(B) 1 A通读全文可体会到。
2 B由第一段可知。
3 D由第三段第三行可知。
4 C由文章最后一句可知。
Lesson 4
一、1.same 2.delicious 3.party 4.July 5.third
二、1. B try not to do sth. 尽力不要干某事。
2. C It作形式主语，真主语用动词不定式来充当。
3. C 今年是我的第12个生日。Twelve的序数词是 twelfth。
4. A具体到某一天要用介词on。The same as是固定短语。
5. C think of …as… 和regard… as…意思相同，都是把……看作……的意思。
6. B 在足够多的国家，country要用复数。
7. A in trouble 有麻烦；处于危险中是in danger。
8. B表示做某事的先后顺序用first, second等。
9. C修饰动词要用副词。
10. A fun是不可数名词。
三、1.Lesson 12 2.Room 304 3.half an hour 4.three times a day 5.page twenty-five 6.in the 1990s’ 7.No. 4 bus 8.No.15 Middle School 9.the twenty-first century 10.two and a half tons 11. a quarter to three 12.Book 2
四、1. Yes, it is. 2. Rubbish and oil. 3. More than 175.
4. Because they wanted everyone to stop throwing away plastic bags.
5. To help more people realize the importance of protecting and earth and encourage people to take action.
单元测试
一、1. B动名词作主语，谓语动词用单数。
2. C It’s +adj. +for sb. +to do sth.对某人来说，干某事是……。
3. A pick up捡起； clean up打扫干净； throw away扔掉。
4. B help sb. with sth.在……方面帮助某人。
5. B hear of听说，具体到某一天要用介词on。
6. C It’s good time to do sth.是干某事的好时间。
7. B learn about doing sth.学习关于干某事。
8. C think of …as… 和regard… as…意思相同，都是把……看作……的意思。Let后面要用动词原形。
9. A具体到某一天要用介词on。
10. B pollution 是不可数名词。
11. B music是可数名词单数，所以用what感叹；序数词前加不定冠词，表示又一个，另外一个。
12. C洛杉矶是美国第二大城市。City用单数。
13. C have trouble doing sth. 干某事有麻烦。
14. A in trouble 有麻烦的。
15. A you’d better 后接动词原形。
16. C这栋楼有10层。我住在第10层。
17. C日期要用序数词。序数词前有物主代词修饰时不需要加the。
18. B由答语看出，是提问频度。
19. B
20. A satellite卫星； star星星； planet行星。地球是太阳的卫星。
二、21 B from 从，来自。
22 D be full of 装满。
23 C在接受了命令之后。
24 A hide 藏，掺杂。
25 B since既然，由于。
26 C把水放进池子就回家了。
27 A to one’s surprise让某人感到吃惊的是。
28 C the same as 和…… 一样。
29 A others 别人。
30 D 改变自己，做一个不同的自己。
三、 (A) 31 B由第一段最后一句可知。
32 A由第三段第六句可知。
33 C由第二段第二句可知。
34 B通读全文可猜到。
35 C整篇文章都在说如何在商场里节省能源。
(B) 36 A由第二段第一句可知。
37 C由第二段第二句可知。
38 D由第一段第三句可知。
39 A根据上下文可猜出。
40 C由第三段第四行可知。
(C)41 D由第一段第三行可知。
42 C根据上下文可猜出。
43 B由文章最后一句可知。
44 D根据上下文可猜出。
45 A由后四段可以看出。
(D) 46 B由第一段第一句可知。
47 A由第二段最后一句可知。
48 B由第三段第三行可知。
49 B由第四段可知。
50 D通读全文可知。
四、 (A)51-55 BFEAD
(B) 56. The father was really sad, shutting himself away from his friends and refusing to do any activity. 57. So
58. Because he hoped his daughter’s candle would not longer be put out by his useless tears.
59. 亲爱的，为什么只有你的蜡烛点不燃呢（不燃烧）呢？
60. The Candle Was Not Lighted/ The Father Was No Longer Sad.
五、(A)61-65 CFBEA
(B)66. sixtieth/60th 67. be 68. sure 69. proud 70. wish
六、 (A) 71、washed; houses 72. Though/Although; family 73. what; did
74. accepted /received; before 75. help; trouble / need
(B)May I have your attention, please
According to the weather report on TV, a terrible cold storm will hit our city tonight. The temperature will drop to minus seven. There will be strong wind. It will snow heavily in the north of our city. Please wear more warm clothes tomorrow. The road will be slippery with thick snow on it. So be careful when you ride bikes.
That’s all. Thank you.
七、One possible version:
Earth Hour started in Sydney at 7: 30p. m. on March 31, 2007. More than 2.2 million homes and businesses turned off their lights for an hour. A year later, on March 29, Earth Hour 2008 became a global activity and was supported by 50 million people from 35 countries. This year, on March 28, over 2100 cities in 88 countries took part in it. And Earth Hour came to China. The activity aims to save energy and improve climate. (People do this in order to save energy and improve climate.) We have different ways to spend the dark hour such as having dinner with our family in the candlelight and sharing stories with our friends. We can also have parties or take a walk in the parks.
Come on! Join us in Earth Hour 2010!
A. We also can go shopping with cloth bags, do you thing so
B. Do you mean that it saves paper or plastic resources
C. What do you mean
D. Today let’s talk about things we can reuse.
E. My mom already did it for two years.
F. What do you think of it
G. Today let’s talk about things we can recycle.
shop call stop use polluteUnit 4 Review
一、单项选择（20分）
1.—What is the fastest and the most comfortable way to travel to America
—I think you can travel to America _______ .
A. on a plane B. by train C. by sea
2.—Look! Her face turned pale.
—Yes, it is her first time ______ in the sea, she felt nervous.
A. swim B. swam C. swimming
3.—How did you finish so much homework last night
—I began to do it _____ I arrived home.
A. while B. as soon as C. before
4. The dish ______ salty, you must have put too much salt in it.
A. smells B. sounds C. tastes
5. When you smell a rose, does it smell ______ from other flowers
A. differently B. different C. difference
6.—Why does the old man always use his body language
—Because he ______ the ability to speak when he fell ill last year.
A. had B. lost C. loses
7.—The sun sets so early now!
—Yes, in winter the day becomes ______.
A. short and short B. longer and longer C. shorter and shorter
8. Everyone ______ Yang Liwei, but do you know his success was due to his strong ____.
A. admire, determine B. admires, decision C. admires, determination
9. On the first day of class, our new teacher introduced _____ to us and we students also introduced ______ to our new teacher.
A. her, us B. herself, ourselves C. hers, ours
10.—When did you find your schoolbag missing
—When I got home, I _____ that I left it on the bus.
A. remember B. realized C. forgot
11.—When did you meet your teacher
—I met him _____ I was walking in the park yesterday.
A. while B. as soon as C. until
12.—Who won the 200-metre race
—Jim. At first Jim was not far behind Tom, he decided to ____．In the end he succeeded.
A. catch up with B. catch up C. keep up with
13.—Those books are very _____ .
—Right. They sell _____, too.
A. good, good B. well, good C. good, well
14.—The potato chips taste awful. Why
—There’s _____ salt in it, so they are _____ to eat.
A. too many, enough salty B. much too, enough salt C. too much, salty enough
15.—Would you like ____ to drink
—A glass of milk, please.
A. else something B. else anything C. something else
16.—Mr Smith, would you please speak a little more _____
—Sorry. I thought you could follow me.
A. quietly B. quickly C. slowly
17.—I knocked at the front door, but nobody answered.
—Why not _____ to the back door
A. try going B. try to go C. trying to go
18.—______ is the train station from the post office, do you know
—About thirty minutes by bike.
A. How far B. How long C. How soon
19.—Hello, Rose speaking. _____
—Peter here.
A. Who are you B. Are you Peter C. Who’s that
20.—Do you know how to use chopsticks
—No, I don’t. I feel ______.
A. embarrass B. embarrassed C. embarrassing
二、完形填空（10分）
There have been many great inventions that change the way we live. The first great ___21___ was one that is still very important today—the wheel. This made it easy for man ___22___ heavy things and to travel long distances. For hundreds of years after that, there were ___23___ inventions that had as much effect as the wheel. Then in the early 1800’s the world started to change ___24___. There was little unknown land left in the world. People did not have to explore much any more. In the second half of the 19th century many great inventions were made. ___25___ them were the camera, the electric light and the radio. These have all become a big part of our life today.
The first part of the 20th century saw more great inventions. The helicopter in 1909. Movies ___26___ sound in 1926. The computer in 1928. And jet planes in 1930. This was also a time when a new ___27___ was first made. Nylon came out in 1935. It changed the kind of clothes people wear. Of course new inventions continued to be made. Man began looking ___28___ ways to go into space. Russia made the first step. Then the United States took another. Since then other countries，including China and Japan, ___29___ their steps into space. In 1969 man took his biggest step away from earth. ___30___ first walked on the moon. This was certainly just a beginning. New inventions will someday allow us to do things we have never yet dreamed of.
　　21. A. scientist B. artist C. musician D. invention
　　22. A. carry B. carrying C. to carry D. carried
　　23. A. few B. a few C. little D. a little
　　24. A. largely B. differently C. greatly D. freely
　　25. A. Between B. Among C. Before D. After
　　26. A. in B. of C. on D. with
　　27. A. mistake B. product C. world D. material
　　28. A. for B. out C. after D. around
　　29. A. made B. were made C. have made D. had made
　　30. A. Chinese B. Japanese C. Americans D. Russians
三、阅读理解（20分）
(A)
根据图示所提供的信息选择最佳答案。
31．The number of the students who took part in English competitions in________ grew
faster from 2008 to 2009．
A．School A B．School B C．neither school
32．In the English competition in______，School B had 100 more students than School A．
A．2007 B．2008 C．2009
33．According to the information above，these two schools had the same percentage of the students who won prizes in___________．
A．1istening B．speaking C．reading
34．__________students in School A were given prizes for their speaking skill in 2009．
A．100 B．200 C．300
35．Which of the following is TRUE from the information above
A．The students from School A and School B won prizes in five skills．
B．The students from School B did best in listening of all skills．
C．The students from School A need to improve their writing skills．
（B）
Dear Jane and Bob,
I’m writing to invite you both to my 15th birthday party on Saturday, June 14th. I’m having a meal in a restaurant with a few friends and then we’ll have a party at my house. I would love you both to come if you can. If you need a place to stay for the night, you can sleep on the floor in our sitting room but bring a sleeping bag, please! Haha, it’s only a joke. If you want to stay at my home for a night, please tell me. I will prepare it for you.
The meal is at Mama Mia’s, a good Italian restaurant. It begins at 7:30 p.m. You can take the train which leaves London, Liverpool Street at 5:00 p.m. and arrives in Cambridge at 6:45 p.m. Then we will have the birthday party at my house at about 8:30 p.m. My mother will make a birthday cake and some snacks for us. I think they must be very delicious. I heard that you have some nice CDs, could you please bring them to my party and enjoy the music with us I believe we will have a good time.
Hope you can come!
Yours
Debbie
36. Debbie’s letter is for
A. her teacher. B. Jane and Bob. C. her pen pal.
37. How old is Debbie
A. 14. B. 15. C. 16.
38. Jane and Bob can go there by__________.
A. subway B. bus C. train
39. What time will the meal begin
A. At 6:45p.m. B. At 7:30p.m. C. At 8:30p.m.
40. What will Debbie’s mother make for them
A. A birthday cake. B. Milk shake. C. Noodles.
（C）
Do you know about Deng Yaping, Wang Nan, Ma Lin well Yes, they are famous Chinese Ping-Pong players. Ping-Pong is a very popular sport game in China. People of different ages like playing it. Li Bo is my best friend, his favorite sport is Ping-Pong, But I like baseball best. He knows about many famous Ping-Pong players, but he doesn’t know about any famous baseball stars.
Baseball is one of the most popular sports in the USA. Children like playing it very much. They often play baseball in fields or parks. Each team has nine players. The baseball season usually goes from April to September. During that time, there are many baseball matches on TV. Many people will watch them. At the end of the game season, the two top teams play against each other. The winner comes from the greatest team.
So many people love sports in different ways now. They play sports themselves, they watch the games on TV, or they may have sports collections. Sports are an important part of our life. Doing sports is good for our health. Playing ball games can also bring us great pleasure.
Do you like sports Do you like playing sports If not, come on, choose one to do from now on. You’ll be happier than before.
41. What sport is very popular in China
A. Tennis. B. Baseball. C. Ping-Pong.
42. Who likes baseball best
A. Wang Nan. B. The writer. C. Ma Lin.
43. Where do the children often play baseball
A. On playgrounds. B. In school. C. In fields or parks.
44. How many players are there in each baseball team
A. Nine. B. Two. C. Eleven.
45. Playing ball games can .
A. give us pain B. make us happy C. make us sad
(D)
Do You Love Watching Tom and Jerry
The cartoon series(卡通系列片), Tom and Jerry, is a very popular program. What do you think of it Come on and try our questions.
NAME Paul Smith
AGE 12
SCHOOL primary school
Questions and Comments （评价） (very satisfied） 1 (satisfied)2 (not satisfied)3
1. Do you like the stories in it √
Comments: The stories are great! Tom and Jerry are both lovely guys. I have fun watching it.
2. Do you enjoy the pictures in it √
Comments: How cute the pictures are! I really want to know who draws them. I hope one day I can learn from him how to draw cartoons.
3. Are you happy with the music in it √
Comments: Every time I hear the music in it, I’ll be excited! I always follow the songs in it.
4. Are you satisfied with the show time √
Comments: The show time is OK. If it is a little later, that’ll be better, because I’m having the painting class at 6:00 pm. Sometimes I miss the beginning of the program. What a pity!
根据材料内容选择正确答案，并将其标号填入答题卡相应的位置。
46. Paul Smith is _________.
A. the chart（表格）designer B. one of the characters
C. a primary school student D. a primary school teacher
47. The comment of the first question means _________.
A. Paul isn’t satisfied with the stories B. Paul doesn’t like the pictures
C. Paul is very satisfied with the stories D. Paul likes the music very much
48. We can guess from the chart that Paul may be interested in _________.
A. drawing B. dancing C. sports D. writing
49. According to the chart, Paul Smith is not very satisfied with _________.
A. the stories B. pictures C. music D. the show time
50. Tom and Jerry is the name of _________.
A. a movie B. a cartoon series C. a book D. a student
四、任务性阅读（10分）
（A）
Skin-diving is a new sport today. This sport ___1__ you into a wonderful new world. It is like a visit __2___ the moon. When you are under water, it is easy for you ___3__ big rocks, because you are no longer heavy.
Here, under water, everything is blue and green. During the day, there is plenty of light. When fish swim __4___, you can catch them with your hands.
When you have tanks of air on your back, you can stay in deep water for a long time. But you must be careful when you dive in deep water.
To catch fish is one of __5___ parts of this sport. Besides, there are more uses for skin-diving. You can clean ships without taking them out of water. You can get many things from the deep sea.
Now you see that skin-diving is both useful and interesting.
(B)
根据图表及短文内容回答短文后边的问题，并把答案写在答题卡的相应位置。
　　
The kinds of foods you eat and how much of those you eat are important to your health．
Scientists arrange(分配)foods in groups to help you choose a healthy diet．Each group has a
different kind of food．Foods from all the groups together give you．energy, help you grow, help keep you from getting sick，and help make you strong．
The diagram(图表)shows six food groups and how much food from each group you should
eat each day．It is a good idea to think about the food groups when you plan your meals at ho．me and when you eat out．Planning with the food groups will help you eat a ell—balanced(搭配均衡的) diet that will help you stay healthy．
　　56．How many groups of food are shown in the diagram
　　
57．Which group of food should people eat most
　　
58．Do you think it light for us to eat much bread，cereal and rice
　
59．It’s necessary for US to eat much sweets．isn't it
60．How can we get enough energy and keep healthy according to the passage
五、交际运用（10分）
(A)从A—G选项中选出能填入空白处的最佳选项，补全对话（有两处是多余的）
(下面的对话发生在2008年奥运会之前的某一天……)(Waiter: 服务员；Foreigner: 外国人)
A. How long have you been here B. I'd like to get a map of Beijing.C. It's a very beautiful city. D. Goodbye.E. Thank you. F. That’s all right G. How much is it
Waiter: Can I help you, sir
Foreigner: Yes. (61)
Waiter: You can go to the Centre Hall. There's a store there.
Foreigner: Thanks. Your English is quite good.
Waiter: ( 62 ) By the way, are you working here in Beijing
Foreigner: No, I'm not. I've come for the Olympics (奥运会).
Waiter: Oh, so you are an athlete (运动员). Welcome to Beijing. What sport ......
Foreigner: Oh, no, no. I'm no athlete. I'm just a football fan (球迷).
Waiter: Me too! (63 )
Foreigner: Two weeks. I've visited some places of interest.
Waiter: What do you think of Beijing
Foreigner: (64) Green ground, blue sky and... Oh, I forgot. My friend is waiting for me there. I must go. Goodbye.
Waiter: (65) Have a nice day.
（B）
Zhu Lei: Hello. Is Mei Ya in, please
Mei Ya: (66) . Who is that
Zhu Lei: This is Zhu Lei here. Have you watched the performance by Tai Lihua at CCTV
Spring Festival Gala (中央电视台春节联欢晚会) for 2005
Mei Ya: (67)　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　.
Zhu Lei: I haven't either. But it's said this is a very beautiful dance.
Mei Ya: (68)　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　. Was it given by Tai Lihua only
Zhu Lei: No, it was given by Tai Lihua and other 19 girls. And many people in the country were moved （感动） by it.
Mei Ya: Why were so many people moved Was there something special about it
Zhu Lei: Yes. These 20 girls are all deaf and mute (哑的) ones.
Mei Ya : Oh, I understand. I hope I can have a chance to watch it.
Zhu Lei: Don't worry. Here comes the chance. Look, I've got two tickets for their performance in Wuhan Theatre tonight. (69)
Mei Ya : Sure. How shall we get there
Zhu Lei: (70) It is not far from here.
Mei Ya: OK. I'll wait for you at home at two. See you later.
Zhu Lei : See you.
六、阅读表达（10分）(A)阅读短文，根据要求完成下面各小题
Playing is serous business for children. In fact, it’s what they do best! Ask them why they do it, and kids will probably say, “Because it’s fun!” But it’s much more than that. It’s also good for them.
73 Studies show that from birth babies begin learning through play. They use their five senses to get know their new world. Touching allows them to discover how different things feel. Brightly colored toys and clothing help develop a baby’s sense of sight(视觉).
When small children choose which toy to play with, they begin developing their abilities in making decisions.
Children love toys that allow them to use their imagination. Sometimes an empty box is more fun than a high-tech toy. That’s because a box can become anything a child imagines it to be.
Crayons, paints and Play-Doh(彩色塑泥) are also good because they allow children to crate. Traditional building blocks teach important pre-math skills like problem-solving.
74 Playing doesn’t become any less important once children start school. Many valuable(有价值的) lessons about life are learned on the school playground. Kids learn how to share, take turns and play by the rules.
（一）根据短文内容简要回答问题。
71．What can children do best in their childhood
72．What kind of toys do children love
（二）将短文中划线的句子译成汉语。
73．
74．
（三）请给短文拟一个适当的题目。
75．
(B)假定你是第一中学三年二班的高峰，6月27日你不慎将带有棕色小猴饰物的钥匙丢在操场上，你的电话是6433123，请以高峰的名义写一则30词左右的寻物启事。
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
七、书面表达（20分）
最近你对班级里的60名同学进行了关于“上网目的”的调查，结果如下图。请你用英文为校报写篇短文，简述调查结果（40字之内），并谈谈你的看法（至少三条）。
要求：
1．字数80左右。开头已经给出，不计人总字数。
2．适当发挥想象，使文章完整、流畅。
I have recently made a survey among 60 students in my class about their purpose of getting online．
Unit 4答案
一、1. A由生活经验可知。
2. C one’s first time doing sth.是固定用法。
3. B我一到家就开始做。
4. C由题意可知，是尝起来很咸。
5. B 系动词后接形容词。
6. B去年失去了说话的能力，应该用过去时。
7. C冬天，白天变得越来越短。比较级+and+比较级， 表示越来越……。
8. C由题意可知。
9. A老师把他自己介绍给我们；我们把自己介绍给新老师。
10. B 当我到家时，我意识到我把它网在公车上了。
11. A当我在公园散步时遇见了他。While后接延续性动词。
12. B catch up with和 keep up with都表示赶上；后面不接宾语时，省略with。
13. C系动词be后接形容词good作表语；副词well修饰动词sell。
14. C里面有太多盐，所以足够咸。Salt是不可数名词，用too much修饰，enough修饰形容词要放在形容词后面。
15. C else要放在不定代词的后面。
16. C由题意可知是说的稍慢一点。
17. A为什么不要试着去后门呢 Try to do sth.尽力做某事， try doing sth.试着做某事。
18. A由答语骑自行车30分钟的路程，是问距离。
19. C打电话时，问对方是谁用who’s that。
20. B我觉得很尴尬。表示人的情感用embarrassed。
二、21.D 由上一句可知应填发明。
22. C it是形式宾语，真宾语要用不定式。
23. A few后接可数名词复数表达否定的意思。
24. C 发生很大的变化。
25. B among在三个或三个以上中。
26. D with带有的意思。
27. D由下文可知是一种新的材料。
28. A look for 寻找。
29. C 由since可知，应用现在完成时。
30. C由经验可知。
三、（A）31 B由表1可以看出。
32 B由表1可以看出。
33 C由表2可以看出。
34 A 500x20%=100。
35 C 由表2可以看出。
（B）36 B由称呼可以看出。
37 B由正文第一句可知。
38 C由第二段第三句可知。
39 B由第二段第二句可知。
40 A 由第二段第四行可知。
(C) 41 C由第一段第二行可知。
42 B由第一段第三行可知。
43 C由第二段第二行可知。
44 A由第二段第二行可知。
45 B由第三段最后一句可知。
(D) 46 C由年龄和学校可判断出。
47 C由评价可看出。
48 A由对第二个问题的回答可看出。
49 D由对第四个问题的回答可看出。
50 B由第一句话可知。
四、(A) 1 takes 2 to 3 to climb 4 nearby 5 the most interesting
(B)56．There are six． 57．Group 1． 58．Yes，I think SO．59．No，it isn't． 60．Eat foods from all groups．/Eat a well—balanced diet．
五、(A) 61—65 BEACD
(B) 66.This is Mei Ya speaking 67. Not yet ，and you ？68. Really ？ / How wonderful 69. Would / Will you go with me ？70.How about walking only （riding a bike ）/ Let's walk （ ride ）there .
六、(A)71．Playing/Play
72．Toys to develop their imagination.
73．研究表明幼儿从出生起就开始在玩的过程中学习。
74．玩的重要性不不因为儿童入学而降低。
75．The Importance of Playing / Children and Play
(B) Lost
June27th,2008
I left/lost a key with a small brown monkey(toy)on the playground on June27th . Will any finder/any one please come to Class2,Grade3 of No.1 Middle school or call me at 6433123 to get it back.
Thank you!
Gao Feng
七、One possible version
I have recently made a survey among 60 students in nay class about their purpose of getting online．
Most students play computer games on the Internet．Some of them spend time chatting or sending e-mails．It's a pity that only a few use the Internet to study．
I think students shouldn't spend too much time playing computer games．It's not good for their eyes．Some are so crazy about games that they lose interest in study．We should make good use of the Internet．For example，we can search for information on the Internet for our study． Educational programs on the Internet can also help us study．
take, climb, interesting, to, nearby
PAGEUnit 5 Postcards from the Palace
单元词汇导学
1. take one’s picture=take a picture of 拍照2. a set of 一套
3. so many 那么多 4. 15cm wide 15厘米宽
5. I’d rather…我宁愿做…… 6.think about 考虑
7.be made of由……制成 8.the size of……的尺寸
9.make a good choice做出一个好的选择
10. show sth. to sb.=show sb. sth.把某物给某人看
11. admit that…=admit doing sth.承认做某事 12.have fun 过得愉快
13.days and nights日夜 14.hear about听说
15.on the other side of town 在城市的另一边
16.what else别的什么 17.more than多于
Lesson 1
学习点拨
掌握商店购物用语
1. May I help you
2. Of course, I’d like…
3. I’d rather get smaller postcards.
表示事物的形态、大小等
They are only 15cm long.
名师授课
1. They are only 15cm _____.
A. widely B. width C. wide
解析 选C。在表示度量的句式中，要用形容词的原级。其句型为“be+数量+数量单位+adj.原级”。
2. The tourists learn _______ a library.
A. that is the building B. that the building is C. that the building was
解析 选C。此句是一个含有宾语从句的复合句，宾语从句要求从句要用陈述句语序。据课文中语境知过去是图书馆。
课后作业
一、词汇
(A)根据首字母及所给题意，填入恰当的词语
1. I will take Lily’s p________ there.
2.There are black and white p________．
3. I b______ a set of 10 stamps the day before yesterday.
4. I can’t i_______ that you have written so many letters.
5. M_______ I help you
(B)词形转换
1. Li Jun wants Mike to stand on the ______. (step)
2. This dress is too big. Do you have a _____ one (small)
3. These coats are as ______ as those ones. (nice)
4. She has ______ her parents a letter. (send)
5. Many ______ come to Beijing for a visit every year. (tour)
二、单项选择
1. I think that this spot will ______ a good picture.
A. make B. take C. give
2. I will take ______ picture there.
A. you B. your C. yours
3. They are only 15cm _______.
A. width B. widely C. wide
4. I would rather _____ smaller postcards.
A. get B. to get C. getting
5. Li Jun wants me ______ him ______ his English.
A. help, with B. to help, with C. helping, with
6.—Look, the river is so big. Can you guess _____
—I think it is nearly 10 meters.
A. how wide is it B. How wide it is C. how wide it is
7. My sister has ______ Olympic postcards. They are very beautiful.
A. a piece of B. a set of C. a pair of
8.—I don’t know ______ I should go to the teacher to say sorry or not.
—I think you should.
A. if B. whether C. both A and B
9.—What did the guide say just now
—He told us _____ our things.
A. to take care of B. to take care C. to care about
10. I never imagined that you sold _____ postcards.
A. so much B. too much C. so many
三、交际运用 在每段对话的空白处填入适当的话语
(A)
A: Good morning, madam. （ 1）
B: Yes, please. I’d like a dress.
A: What size do you need
B: Size M.
A:OK! （ 2）
B: It looks nice. But it’s a little short.
A: Well! Look at that green one. It’s a bit longer. It’s nice too, （ 3）
B: Yes. It looks as nice as the blue one. Can I try it on
A: Certainly.
B: Oh, good! It’s just right. （ 4）
A: Eighty yuan.
B: That’s OK. （ 5）
A: Here you are, Goodbye!
B: Goodbye!
(B)
A: Hi, Mary. Are you going to visit Beihai Park tomorrow
B: Yes. We’ll start at 7:50. ____________________________________________ (1)
A: I’d love to. But do you think it’s going to rain tomorrow
B: _________________________________________________. (2) Look, there isn’t any cloud in the sky.
A: I hope it will be fine tomorrow. ______________________________________ (3)
B: Not far. It’ll take us half an hour. It’s only 5 bus stops.
A: You mean we’ll go there by bus, is that right
B: Yes. ____________________________________________________________. (4)
A: But I’d like to go there by bike. At that time the streets
are very busy. Buses can’t go faster than bikes.
B: I agree with you. Going by bike can save both time and
money.
A: Yes. __________________________________________________________ . (5)
B: OK. Goodbye.
Lesson 2
学习点拨
1.think about 考虑 2.be made of由……制成
3.something burning 可燃之物 4.speak the truth说出真相
5.a chance to choose一个选择的机会 6.a way over water水上的路
7.the size of……的尺寸 8.look down向下看
9.run around 环绕着……流过 10.have to do sth.不得不做某事
11.finish looking at 看完 12.inside the palace在宫殿里面
13.It’s hard to choose. 很难选择 14.make a good choice做出一个好的选择
15.the soccer fields足球场地 16.the way out ……的出口
17.have a choice选择 18.show sth. to sb.=show sb. sth.把某物给某人看
19.the exit of the palace 宫殿出口 20.choose…for…为……做出选择
21.admit that…=admit doing sth.承认做某事
名师授课
1.The postcard showed that there were some bridges _____ the stream.
A. on B. over C. above
解析 选B。on, above和over都表示“在……上方”.
above指在上方的任意一点，表示在某物上的高低位置，不接触，其反义词是below；
over一般指垂直方向，其反义词是under。
on表示“在……上面”，且互相接触。如：
There is a pen on the desk．桌子上有一支钢笔。
There's a bridge over the river．河上有座桥。
The moon is now above the trees in the east．月亮这时已在东边树林的上空。
2.Mike mentioned that he _____ a lot of time in the store.
A. paid B. spent C. took
解析 选B。此处spend是“度过”的意思，另外它还有“花费”的意思。
Spend, take, pay都有“花费”的意思。其中 take 的句型是It takes sb. some time to do sth. 主语为某物或某事。Pay 对应的词组是pay money for sth. 即pay只表示花钱。而 spend 既可以指花钱也可以花时间，其词组用法为spend time (money) (in) doing sth.和 spend time (money) on sth..
课后作业
一、词汇 单词释义
1. Please don’t stand on the _____ bridge. (not safe)
2. The Songhua River runs ______ Harbin. (from end to end)
3. They _____ doing their housework two hours ago. (bring or come to the end)
4. The city is ______ than I imagined. (fine, beautiful)
5. Just now, he _____ that he didn’t do his homework alone. (acknowledge承认)
二、单项选择
1. I ______ him something about you, but I didn’t mean to hurt you.
A. admitted to tell B. admitted tell C. admitted telling
2. She chose _____ to a small village to teach poor students.
A. to go B. go C. going
3. He has won four _____ medals since he took part in the Olympics.
A. gold B. golden C. golds
4. This is the exit ____ the big store _____ China Bank.
A. to, of B. of, to C. to, to
5. The river runs _____ the city and goes into the sea.
A. over B. across C. through
6.—The bridge _____ the river is more than 200 years old.
—How old it is!
A. through B. on C. over
7.—Our English teacher is very good.
—Yes, she always ______ everything clearly.
A. talks B. tells C. explains
8.—I always spend as much time as I can _____ book.
—That’s why your friends call you bookworm.
A. to read B. reading C. read
9.—How large is the palace
—It’s ______ than 100 soccer fields.
A. much big B. more bigger C. even bigger
10.—Miss Zhang is a good teacher.
—Yes, and she is also strict. If you make any mistakes, she will _______.
A. point at them B. point them out C. point to them
三、完形填空
There is a holiday next week and I can't decide what to do. I have a lot of work to do __1__and this would be a good chance(机会) __2__.　But I don't like　__3__ the holiday in this way. I can work at home all the rest of the year. Last year I went__4__to the mountains. __5__ there was beautiful, but it is too cold this time of year. And it's really__6__ far to go for a short holiday. I decide __7__ this isn't a good time to__8__the mountains. But I__9__to go somewhere else.
　　Perhaps this would be a good chance to go to the beach(海滨). I like to go for walks __10__ the seashore__11__　the warm sunshine and watch the water. It's only eight miles and I could get there__12__about two hours. After thinking it __13__, I am sure that this is a __14__ time for the seashore than __15__.
1. A. at home B. at house C. in school D. in factory
2. A. do it B. doing that C. to do it D. with that
3. A. to pass B. to spend C. having D. asking
4. A. the north B. or north C. north D. to north
5. A. Nothing B. Everything C. Somebody D.A girl
6. A. very B. enough C. rather D. too
7. A. that B. what C. whether D. when
8. A. go B. go to C. arrive D. leave
9. A. do want B. shall want C. wanted D. am wanting
10. A. on　 B. by C. beside D. along
11. A. on B. during C. in D. under
12. A. in　 B. for C. with D. after
13. A. in B. out C. over D. on
14. A. good B. fine C. better D. best
15. A. home B. the mountains
C. big cities D. country villages
四、任务性阅读
choose them easy communicate close
Are you the only child in your family If so you are the most important person in your parents’ hearts．They are the 1 people to you in the world．However，many teenagers like you have trouble 2 with their parents．They always complain(抱怨)that their parents say too much instead of listening to what they’re thinking．When they do something wrong，getting away from parents seems to be the only 3 ．In fact，what your parents do just shows love for you．They love you more than they love 4 ．Whenever you need help，they are always there，standing by you．Try to put yourself into their shoes，and you’11 understand them 5 ．
Lesson 3
学习点拨
宾语从句
用一个句子做另一个句子的宾语，将这个句子叫做宾语从句。宾语从句做介词或及物动词的宾语。现在从下列三个方面总结归纳如下：
一、引导词
A,由that 引导陈述句性的宾语从句，连词that只起连接作用，在从句中不做句子的成分，也无词汇意义，在口语中常被省略
B,由连词if、 whether 引导的表示“是否…”的宾语从句。Whether,if 在从句中不做句子的成分，一般情况下，whether和if 可以替换。
注意： 1在介词后面的宾语从句中不用if引导
2宾语从句中有or not时不用if引导.
3和不定式连用作宾语时不用if引导.
C,由wh-引导的宾语从句。连接代词who,whom,whose, what, which,和连接副词when, where, why, how 等连接的宾语从句，它们在句中即有连接从句的作用，又在句中充当句子的成分。
二、宾语从句的语序
宾语从句从句的语序必须是陈述语序，既连接词+主语+谓语+其他成分
三、宾语从句的时态
宾语从句的时态受主句的限制，即：主句是一般现在时态，从句根据实际情况而定。
主句是一般过去时态，从句用相应的过去的时态。如果从句的动作发生在主句之前，则从句要用过去完成时态。如果宾语从句说的是客观真理、自然现象或事实时，这时宾语从句要用一般现在时态。
名师授课
1. That’s ______I want to see.
A. what B. that C. how
解析 选A。What=all that意为“所……的”。What I want to see是表语从句。这一用法很特别。如：I don’t know what you mean.我不懂你什么意思。
2. The map showed me that the river _____through several big cities.
A. run B. ran C. runs
解析 选C。这是一个含有宾语从句的复合句。宾语从句在动词时态方面要求“主从句时态一致”，即当主句是一般现在时态，从句可以用任何时态；但当主句是一般过去时态时，从句要用相应的过去时态。但是“自然规律”除外，仍用一般现在时态。因为river作主语，应该用单数的谓语动词。
随堂检测
一、词汇 单词释义
1. I’m _____ that it won’t rain tomorrow. (knowing and believing)
2. Do you _____ that story (have or keep in the memory)
3. I ______ you can come on time. (expect and desire)
4. I don’t think you are _____. (not wrong)
5. He said that they had a ____ yesterday. (pleasure trio on which food is carried to be eaten outside)
二、单项选择
1. Not only rivers but also streams can have ____ in them.
A. fish B. fishes C. fishs
2.—Why do you like your English teacher
—Because she can explain everything we ask clearly ______ us.
A. for B. to C. with
3. I can’t believe your _____. It is just a excuse.
A. explanation B. explain C. explaining
4. The way to improve her oral English is to practice _____ every day.
A. speak B. to speak C. speaking
5.—What did she say
—She said ____ she would leave the message on the headmaster’s desk.
A. that B. where C. which
6.—We don’t know _____ he is.
—They say he is much better these days.
A. what B. who C. how
7.—Excuse me. Could you tell me ____
—Certainly.
A. when can I get to the station B. which station can I get to
C. how I can get to the station
8.—Can you guess _____ the MP4 player yesterday
—Sorry, I’ve no idea about it.
A. how much did he pay for B. how can he get C. how much he paid for
9.—I just____ that we would get some rain on Saturday.
—That’s true.
A. heard B. hear C. heard of
10.—Why did she come here
—She wanted to know ____ we would take part in the English club or not.
A. whether B. if C. weather
三、完形填空
My family spent a few weeks in London last year. We went there in the autumn. We think it is the 1 season to visit England. The weather is usually quite good 2 there are not too many 3 in October.
We stayed in a small 4 in the West End. We 5 most of our sightseeing on foot. We went to look at the places which all travelers would like to 6 . We went shopping and spent too much money 7 a lot of things. What we liked most was going to the 8 . We didn’t have the chance to see such 9 plays at home. A lot of people say English 10 is very bad. We didn’t think so. It is 11 that most of the restaurants are French, Italian, or Chinese, but Britain had some very 12 meals.
In fact, we 13 our holiday so much that we have already decided to 14 there again this year. But we are going to take our umbrellas. I’m sure we’ll need them 15 .
1. A. busiest B. working C. best D. hottest
2. A. and B. or C. as D. so
3. A. players B. travelers C. places D. things
4. A. station B. hotel C. office D. cinema
5. A. missed B. showed C. used D. did
6. A. look B. watch C. see D. notice
7. A. buying B. buy C. bought D. to buy
8. A. shops B. cinemas C. restaurants D. theatres
9. A. well B. wonderful C. terrible D. sad
10. A. language B. film C. clothes D. food
11. A. impossible B. true C. important D. necessary
12. A. delicious B. poor C. fresh D. expensive
13. A. spent B. enjoyed C. paid D. finished
14. A. live B. eat C. go D. spend
15. A. sometime B. sometimes C. some time D. some times
四、阅读理解
(A)
Please look at the Flight Timetable and choose the right answers.
Flight No. Departure Arrival From To StopCA907 07:45 12:10 Beijing Moscow ChengduCA981 01:58 18:35 Beijing New York ShanghaiCA158 10:20 23:10 Beijing London ChengduCA149 11:35 22:10 Beijing Sydney Hong KongCA923 12:35 17:10 Beijing Moscow /CA167 13:15 02:40 Beijing Paris MoscowCA147 15:55 10:15 Beijing Sydney GuangzhouCA949 17:25 07:35 Beijing Paris ShanghaiCA173 19:20 01:50 Beijing Moscow UrumqiCA937 21:25 08:10 Beijing London Hong Kong
(departure=leaving)
1. You’ll go to Australia. You can only take
when you reach Beijing Airport at eleven forty.
A.CA923 B.CA149 C. CA147 D. CA167
2. If you spend fourteen hours and ten minutes going to France, you must stay in on the way.
A. Hong Kong B. Shanghai C. Moscow D. Chengdu
3. It will take you to reach England if you stop in Hong Kong.
A. nine hours and twenty B. ten hours and thirty-five
C. twelve hours and fifty D. ten hours and forty-five
4. You may in Beijing if you want to go to America.
A. take one plane B. take two planes
C. take three plane D. not take any planes
5. How many planes may you take in Beijing if you want to go to Australia
A. One B. Two C. Three D. Four.
(B)
Take a look at the following ads! You may find some useful information you need here!
Guitar lessonsExperienced musician from Australia. Good at teaching kids for 5 years! For more information, please visit Larry’s website: www.music.com.au ( http: / / www.music.com.au / )
Lost dogMedium size, with brown spots and white short hair. Answer you when you call it David. Many thanks for sending it back.Call Susan at 7328059
Taxi driver wantedFull time or part time. Experience and a good knowledge of the city are necessary. English is also a must.Under 45 years old. Call Mr. White at 5132683.
Apartment for saleTwo bedrooms, a kitchen and a bathroom. Hot water 8:00-18:00. Beautiful sights out of the windows. E-mail: sdgt@ ( mailto:sdgt@ ).
1. If you want to have a guitar lesson, you may ________ .
A. call Susan at 7328059 B. surf the website:www.music.com.au ( http: / / www.music.com.au / )
C. telephone Mr. White at 5132683 D. e-mail sdgt@ ( mailto:sdgt@ )
2. Who is the owner of the lost dog
A. Mr. White B. Larry C. Susan D. David
3. If you want the job as a taxi driver, you should ________.
A. master at least three languages B. know the city very well
C. be an experienced driver D. both B and C
4. Which information about the apartment is not mentioned in the table
A. It has a beautiful view. B. It has hot water in the daytime.
C. It has three floors. D. It has a kitchen.
5. How can you contact the owner of the apartment for more information
A. By sending an e-mail. B. By going to visit it.
C. By making a phone call. D. By sending a fax (传真).
Lesson 4
学习点拨
旅游话题作文素材
1. Travelling is good for everybody’s health.
2. You can see many beautiful scenes in the places you travel.
3. Travelling can open our eyes.
4. Travelling can broaden our views and provide you much knowledge that we can’t get in the textbooks in class.
5. Travelling is useful and important for both body and mind.
名师授课
1. It’s a nice place ______.
A. to visit B. to visit it C. visit
解析 选A。To visit是不定式，作后置定语。而a nice place在逻辑上已构成visit的宾语，不能在visit后再加it。
2. The apple tastes ______.
A. well B. better C. good
解析 选C。taste是联系动词，后接形容词。good是形容词，well是副词。此句无比较对象，不能用比较级。
课后作业
一、单词释义
1. I know our teacher has _____ one pair of glasses. (more than)
2. Xiao Ming said he didn’t like to _______ red coats. (have on the body)
3. There are ______ book on the shelf. (some but not many)
4. Yesterday, we _______ the biggest gallery in our city. (go to a place for a time)
5. Do you think it’s ______ food (having good health)
二、单项选择
1. Can you imagine a place _____ you visited
A. that B. where C. what
2. There are many tall buildings on ____ sides of the street.
A. each B. both C. any
3. My teacher told me that we ______ an English test soon.
A. will have B. would have C. had
4. I wanted to know _______.
A. which was the way to the supermarket B. which the way to the supermarket was C. which is the way to the supermarket
5. I miss him very much. I haven’t _______ him for a long time.
A. heard from B. heard C. heard out
6. —We spent a lot of time _____ this problem. —Really
A. in B. on C. for
7. —Look! The building ____ the road is our school.
—Oh, it’s very beautiful.
A. on the other side of B. on another side of C. on other side
8. —What ______ can you see in the picture
—Ah, I can see some birds in the trees.
A. other B. else C. others
9. —Whose book is this —I don’t know. Maybe it’s ______.
A. somebody else B. else somebody C. somebody else’s
10. —It’s hard _______ so much work in one day. —I think so.
A. for him doing B. of him to do C. for him to do
三、同义句转换
1. Mike said to Mary, “Could you pass me the book ”
Mike asked Mary ____ she could pass ______ the book.
2. Light travels faster than sound. He told the children.
He told the children ______ light _____ faster than sound.
3. I heard that someone was talking in the next room.
I heard ______ ______ in the next room.
4. The new bike cost him 150 yuan.
He _____ 150 yuan _____ the new bike.
5. The box is so big that he can’t carry it.
The box is ____ big for him _____ carry.
四、阅读表达
The World Health Organization(WHO)has reported warnings about the A/H1N1 flu(猪流感)by raising its alert level. By May 7,the WHO reported a total of 1893 confirmed cases(确诊病例)of human infection(流感)in 23 countries and regions, including 31deaths. China will communicate with the WHO and take measures to prevent the outbreak of the A/H1N1 flu on the mainland. On May 18,a reporter from CCTV interviewed Shu Yuelong, Director of the Chinese National Influenza Center, after it got the first A/H1N1 flu virus sample(病毒样本)from an imported case(输入病例) on May 17. this first virus sample was taken from a patient from Sichuan Province. Shu Yuelong said, “All the cases we have now are being imported. We want to know whether the virus in our cases is the same being seen in other countries. After getting this virus sample we worked overnight to test it. We found it similar to samples gotten in the United States and Canada. We can say they are the same virus or the same type of virus . the virus has not mutated(变异)after spreading to china. But we cannot say for sure that it won’t mutate after entering china. So we have to continue our work of virus testing. ”Health experts say that the symptoms (症状)of the A/H1N1 flu are similar to those of the regular flu, including headaches, coughing and fever. They suggest that people with cold symptoms should take a rest at home. When symptoms become serious ,people should go to a hospital. They also suggest that people should stay away from crowds to avoid the possibility of virus infection.
1. What’s the passage mainly about
2. Where was the first A/H1N1 flu virus sample taken from in China
3. Are the experts sure that the virus won’t mutate after entering China
4. What do the symptoms of the A/H1N1 flu include
5. What should you do if you have a bad cold according to health experts’ suggestions
单元测试
一、单项选择（20分）
1.—What do you use this desk for
—There is ______ wrong with the light, I have to stand ______ the desk to repair it.
A. something, on B. anything, on C. nothing, in
2.—What are you going to do this weekend
—I would rather _____ to the library this weekend.
A. to go B. go C. going
3.—______ is the cake
—It is more delicious than I _____.
A. How, imagined B. What, imagined C. How, imagining
4.—What can you see _____ the postcard
—I can see the Great Wall.
A. on B. at C. in
5.—What did Tim’s father buy him？
—He bought a ____ of 20 postcards _____ him.
A. pair, to B. set, for C. lot, for
6.—This cinema is new, what happened _____ the old one
—There was ______ in the old cinema.
A. for, fire B. to, fires C. to, a fire
7.—There are so _____ useful and interesting books, which one do you want to choose
—It’s difficult to ____ a choice.
A. much, take B. many, make C. more, decide
8.—What did your teacher say to you about your _____
—My teacher pointed _____ my mistakes and encouraged me.
A. paper, out B. papers, at C. papers, out
9.—What did you _____ about her？
—I_____ that she will go to Canada next week.
A. hear, hear B. hear, heard C. heard, heard
10.—Can you tell me the meaning of this word？
—Of course, “____” means a person who introduces some _____ about the place you visit.
A. guide, information B. tourist, informations C. policeman, news
11.—How long is the chair —The chair is 25cm _____.
A. long B. longer C. longest
12.—Does the stream run _____ this place —Yes, it does.
A. over B. across C. through
13. This store ______ many things.
A. is sold B. selling C. sells
14. Let’s take pictures _____ the sea.
A. in B. of C. with
15.—When did you finish _____ the work —Last night.
A. do B. to do C. doing
16. This is ______ I want to draw.
A. that B. / C. what
17. He has ____ five books _____.
A. chosen, to read B. choose, to read C. chosen, to read it
18. Lily _____ a lot of time ______ this problem.
A. spent, to solve B. spent, solving C. paid, to solve
19. The bridge ____ the river is very _____.
A. on, beauty B. over, beautiful C. above, beautiful
20.Which stress of the following words is different？
A. imagine B. material C. several
二、完形填空（10分）
Paris has a beautiful name, the City of 21 . Do you know 22 it means Many beautiful buildings are lighted at 23 .The streets are very 24 .When you 25 in Paris, you must not turn 26 your headlights （汽车前灯）even after dark. Paris is full of life all day and all night. But this is not the 27 reason（原因）for its beautiful name. For hundreds of years, Paris has been the centre of science and art. 28 scientists and artists have come to 29 here. For this reason also, people 30 it the City of Lights.
21. A. Flowers B. Cars C. Lights D. Rivers
22. A. what B. how C. where D. when
23. A. noon B. night C. day D. evening
24. A. black B. dark C. noisy D. bright
25. A. walk B. go C. drive D. live
26. A. off B. down C. out D. on
27. A. only B. other C. any D. another
28. A. No B. Few C. Many D.A few
29. A. study B. drive C. play D. have dinner
30. A. make B. call C. build D. find
三、阅读理解（20分） (A)
31. What job is wanted above
A. Cooks. B. Drivers. C. Doctors. D. Teachers.
32. _________ will probably get the job.
A. An English lady at the age of 27 B. A woman who is good at French
C. An Australian of 35 with a teacher’s license D. A Russian with 5 years of teaching experience
33. What is not mentioned (提到)
A. Age. B. Pay. C. Address D. Phone number
34. If a foreigner wants to have an interview, he or she should make it _________.
A. in late August B. after August 15th
C. before August 15th D. in early September
35. What do you think it is
A. An ad. B. An article. C. A film. D. A letter.
(B)
36. If you want to order pizzas, you can ________________.
A. call at No. 348 B. call at 65369877
C. call at 28145588 D. call at No. 67
37. What type of pizzas does Mr. Smith order
A. Hawaiian and Supreme. B. Vegetarian and Supreme.
C. Supreme and coffee. D. Hawaiian and Vegetarian.
38. How long is the business time every day
A. 3 hours. B. 8 hours. C. 14 hours. D. 15 hours.
39. Where will the pizzas be delivered(送)
A. No. 348 Beijing Road. B. No.67 Beijing Road.
C. No.67 Nanjing Road. D. No. 348 Nanjing Road.
40. What else does Mr. Smith order besides pizzas
A. Coffee. B. Coke. C. Orange. D. Tea.
(C)
If you don’t use your arms or your legs for some time, they will become weak; when you start using them again, they will gradually（逐渐地）become stronger again. Everybody knows this. Yet many people do not seem to know that it is the same with our memory.
　　If a friend says that his arms and legs are weak, we know that it is his own fault. But if he tells us that he has a poor memory, many of us think that his parents are to blame(责怪), and few of us know that it is just his own fault.
　　Have you ever found that some people can’t read or write but they usually have better memories This is because they can not read or write and they have to remember things; they can not write them down in a little notebook. They must remember dates, names, songs and stories; so their memories are being exercised the whole time.
　　So if you want a good memory, learn from these people: practice remembering.
41. What will happen to your arms or legs if you don’t use them for some time
They will be_________________.
A. strong B. broken C. weak D. hurt
42. What does the word “fault” mean in the second paragraph
A. 困难 B. 过错 C. 粗心 D. 聪明
43. What do many of us think of the person with a poor memory
A. His parents are to blame. B. He isn’t clever.
C. He is foolish. D. His parents are very clever.
44. Why do some people usually have better memories but they can’t read or write
Because _________________.
A. they are stronger B. they often practice remembering things
C. they have strong arms and legs D. their parents are good
45. What does the passage mainly(主要) talk about
A. Arms. B. Legs. C. Behaviors. D. Memories.
(D)
People like to eat fruits．Because they are not only delicious but also good for our health．We should eat them every day．But different people like different fruits．Some like apples, some like pears and others like bananas．What’s your favorite fruit
In fact ,we should eat all kinds of fruits．Because they come in so many beautiful colors like the rainbow in the sky．Each of the colors is good for us．Red fruits like strawberries have vitamin C．Orange and yellow fruits like oranges and bananas have many kinds of vitamins like A ,B and C．Green, blue or purple fruits are good for us , too. So try to fill your bodies with different colors , then you will be healthier．
46．From the passage we know that red fruits have________.
A．vitamin A B．vitamin B C．vitamins A and B D．vitamin C
47．Which of the following fruits have vitamins A, B and C
A．Red apples B．Grapes C．Oranges D．Strawberries
48．Which sentence is right
A．People don’t like to eat fruits． B．People needn’t eat all kinds of fruits．
C．Green, blue or purple fruits are bad for us． D．People should eat all kinds of fruits．
49．The meaning of the underlined word “rainbow” is________．
A．彩虹 B．雨点 C．云 D ．闪电
50．The main（主要的）idea of the passage is that ________.
A．eating apples is the most important
B．eating fruits in different colors is important
C．yellow and orange fruits are better than red fruits
D．different people like different fruits
四、任务性阅读（10分）
(A)
When David ____51___ in front of a big house, a man arrived. The man asked David, “__52____ your parents at home I have a letter for them.” David answered, “Yes. My father____53___ TV and my mother is taking care of my little sister.” The man rang the doorbell but no one answered the door. “Are they sleeping ” the man said to himself. The man __54___ again, but still no one answered. Then the man turned around and_55____ to David, “You bad boy. You lied (说谎) to me! Your parents aren’t at home.” “I never lie,” said David. “This is not my house!”
(B)
阅读下面短文，按要求完成短文后的各项任务。
Once the colors of the world argued. All thought that they were the best and most important.
Green said: “Clearly I am the most important. I am the sign of (56) and hope. I’m the color of grass, trees and leaves. Without me, all animals would die.”
Yellow laughed: “ You are all so serious. I bring (57) and warmth into the world. Every time people look at a yellow sunflower, they start to smile (微笑). Without me there would be no fun.”
Orange shouted: “I am the color of (58) and strength. I have the most important vitamins (维生素). Think of carrots, vegetables and oranges. When I appear in the sky, (59) everyone is shocked at my beauty and nobody gives another thought to any of you.”
(60) Red couldn’t stand it any longer, “I am the color of (61) and bravery. I am willing to fight for a cause. I bring fire (火) into the blood.”
Their voices became louder and louder. The thunder got angry and the rain started to pour. When they became calm the rain said, “(62) You foolish colors. Don’t you know that each of you is unique (独一无二) If you don’t agree, just follow me.” They did as the rain told them and together made the most beautiful rainbow (彩虹).
任务一：用下列方框中所给词的适当形式完成文中（56）（57）（58）（61）四空，使其语意正确，逻辑合理。（每词限用一次,每空限填一词）
dangerous, healthy, happy, life
任务二：将（59）处划线句子翻译成汉语。
任务三：将（60）处划线句子进行同义句转化。
60. Red could stand it.
任务四：将（62）处划线句子变成感叹句。
62. you colors are!
任务五：63. Which of the following is the best title of the passage
A. All the colors are foolish.
B. Getting united (团结) is important.
C. Every color is unique.
D. All the colors are excellent.
五、交际运用（10分）
(A)
Michael : Hey , John .
John : Hi , Michael .
Michael : (64)
John : Reading a book .
Michael : ( 65) We can watch a video .
John : (66 )
Michael : It’s on Pine Street . It’s a quiet street off Fifth Street .
John : Oh, OK. (67 ) There’s a new hotel on the corner .
Michael : Yes . There’s a small supermarket on the street . Our house is across from the supermarket .
John : (68 )
(B)
A: Hi! You’ve bought a new motorbike, haven’t you
B: Yes, I have.
A: _____________________________________________ (69)
B: I bought it only yesterday. How do you like it
A: It’s nice except the colour.
B: _______________________________________________ (70)
A: I prefer red to white.
B: But I like white better.
A: By the way, ________________________________ (71) It must be very expensive.
B: Not very much . It’s about two thousand yuan.
A: Really It looks like a Japanese one.
B: __________________________________________ (72)
A: It’s made in Chongqing.
B: May I have a try
A:___________________________________ . (73)
B: Thank you.
A: You’re welcome.
六、阅读表达（10分）
(A)
阅读下面的短文，将划线句子翻译成中文。?
74.Today life is much better than before. Vision phone(可视电话) is used in some ?provinces.? Maybe it will be used in every family. People can have an examination ?about? their health without a doctor or a nurse in the room. 75.Now some people do some shopping at home.?
76.And how about our education There have been more educational(教育的) ?programs? on the radio， on TV or on the Internet. Some children live very far away from their schools， more and more of them don’t need to go to school every day now. They can study at home.77.Teachers teach them on the Internet.?
In the future， each family will have a robot. 78.Robots will help people with their housework. In some years people can have a trip on the moon and some people can live ?under the sea in hot summer.
74._________________________________________________________________________________________
75._________________________________________________________________________________________
76._________________________________________________________________________________________
77._________________________________________________________________________________________
78._________________________________________________________________________________________
(B)
招领启事
4月10日上午本人在阅览室捡到一副眼镜。请失主打电话6730886,与李平联系 。
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
七、书面表达（20分）
前天，我叔叔从美国回来了。昨天他给我爸爸打了电话，我爸爸打算这个星期六带我去看他。如果那天不下雨，我们打算再出去照照像。
1. my uncle, come, America, before
2. call, yesterday
3. my father, me, visit, this
4. if, not rain, go out, photos
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Unit 5 答案
Lesson 1
一、(A)1. photos 2. postcards 3. bought 4. imagine 5. May
(B)1. steps 2. smaller 3. nice 4. sent 5. tourists
二、1. A make a good picture 是固定用法。
2. B take one’s picture 给某人拍照。
3. C 15厘米宽。数字+单位+形容词；如：30米长，30 meters long。
4. A would rather do sth.宁愿干某事。
5. B want sb. to do sth.想要某人干某事。
6. C宾语从句要用陈述句语序。How在句中，不用大写。
7. B一套奥林匹克明信片，故用a set of。
8. B if 不能和or not连用。
9. A照顾好我们的东西。Take care of照顾， take care保重， care about担心。
10. C postcard 是可数名词，所以要用many。
三、(A)1.Can I help you 2.What about this blue one
? ?3.Do you like it 4.How much is it
?? 5.I’ll have it.
(B)1. Would you like to go with us 2. I don’t think so.
3. How far is Beihai Park from here 4. That’s right.
5. Let’s go by bike.
Lesson 2
一、1. dangerous 2. through 3. finished 4. nicer 5. admitted
二、1. C admit doing sth.承认干某事。
2. A choose to do sth.选择干某事。
3. A名词作定语，gold medals金牌。
4. B这是这个大商店的出口，通往中国银行。
5. C 河流穿过城市是指从城市内部穿过。
6. C垂直在上方用over；在某物的表面上用on。
7. C talk交谈， tell告诉， explain解释。
8. B spend… doing…花费时间/金钱干某事。
9. C由题意可知应该用比较级，比较级不能用more修饰。
10. B point …out把……指出来。
三、1 A在家里有很多事要做。
2 C a good chance to do sth.一个做某事的好机会。
3 B spend the holiday度过假期。
4 C go north to向北方去某地。
5 B 由句意可知，那儿的一切都很好。
6 D too…to…太……而不能……。
7 A that 引导宾语从句。
8 B go to去某地。
9 A do 表示强调，确实想去。
10 D 沿着海岸散步。
11 C在阳光下用介词in。
12 A in about two hours在大约两小时内。
13 C think over 仔细考虑。
14 C由than可知，应用比较级。
15 B由上文可知。
四、1．closest 2．communicating 3．choice 4．themselves 5．Easily
Lesson 3
一、1. sure 2. remember 3. hope 4. right 5. picnic
二、1. A fish当鱼讲，单复数同形；当鱼的种类讲，复数为fishes。
2. B explain sth. to sb. 把……解释给某人听。
3. A由题意知，应该填名词。
4. C practice doing sth. 练习干某事。
5. A 宾语从句是陈述句，引导词用that。
6. C由答语可知，第一句的意思是我们不知道他的身体怎么样了。
7. C宾语从句应该用陈述句语序。
8. C宾语从句应该用陈述句语序。
9. A由后半句知道，是过去听到的，故用过去时。
10. A由题意知，所填的词应是是否的意思。If不能和or not连用。
三、1.C由下文知，是参观英格兰最好的季节。
2. A前后两个简单句式并列的关系。
3. B由题意知，游客不多。
4. B当然是住在宾馆里。
5. D do sightseeing观光旅游。
6. C只有see符合题意。
7. A spend …doing…固定短语。
8. D由下文知，去剧院看戏剧。
9. B由题意知，填一个褒义的形容词。
10. D有下文知，要谈论英国的食物。
11. B true 真实的。
12. A又非常美味的食物。
13. B非常喜欢这个假期。
14. C决定还要再去那儿。
15. B sometimes有时候。
四、(A) 1 C 11：40以后去悉尼的航班只有这一个。
2 B算算去巴黎的两个航班的起止时间差，在决定航班在何处停靠。
3 D去英国而且在香港停留的航班只有最后的这个航班，算一下起止时间差即可。
4 A去美国（纽约）的航班只有一个。
5 B去澳大利亚（悉尼）的航班有两个。
(B) 1 B看第一个广告可知。
2 C由第二个广告最后一句可知。
3 D看第三个广告可知。
4 C比较各选项和第四个广告可知。
5 A 由第四个广告最后一行可知。
Lesson 4
一、1. over 2. wear 3. several 4. visited 5. healthy
二、1. A所填关系词在定语从句中作宾语，所以用that。
2. B side用了复数，所以是指在街道的两边。
3. B主句的谓语动词是过去时，宾语从句的动词也变为相应的过去的某种时态。
4. A主句的谓语动词是过去时，宾语从句的动词也变为相应的过去的某种时态；宾语从句要用陈述句语序，which是句子的主语，所以选A。
5. A hear from收到某人的来信。
6. B spend … on …在……上花费很多时间
7. A on the other side of 在马路的另一边。
8. B other, others不能和特殊疑问词连用。
9. C或许它是其他某个人的。要用所有格形式。
10. C It’s hard for sb. to do sth.对某人来说干……很难。
三、1. if/whether, him 2. that, travels 3. someone talking 4. paid, for或spent, on/buying 5. too, to
四、1. The A/H1N1 flu. 2. Sichuan Province. 3. No, they aren’t. 4. Headaches coughing and fever. 5. Go to a hospital.
单元测试
一、1. A肯定句中用something，站在桌子上，所以用on。
2. B would rather do sth.宁愿干某事。
3. A由题意可知。
4. C在明信片里你能看到什么？in 指里面的内容，on指在明信片的表面上。
5. B a set of 一套，buy sth. for sb. 买某物给某人。
6. C happen to 发生在……上，a fire一场大火。
7. B book是可数名词，所以用many；make a choice是固定短语，意思是做出选择。
8. C paper当试卷讲，复数要加s；point out 指出。
9. B 问句中有助动词did，所以hear 用原形；答语中，由题意知应该用一般过去时。
10. A由题意可知。Information是不可数名词。
11. A数字+单位+形容词原形。如：30米长，30 meters long。
12. C run through 是指从内部穿过。
13. C由题意可知，应该用主动语态，一般现在时。
14. B take a picture of 给……拍照。
15. C finish doing sth.结束干某事。
16. C这就是我想画的东西。What从句在is 后面做表语从句。
17. A他已经选择了五本要读的书。由题意可知，应该用现在完成时。Five books是to read 的逻辑宾语，所以不能再加it。
18. B spend… doing…花费时间/金钱干某事。
19. B above指在上方的任意一点，表示在某物上的高低位置，不接触；over一般指垂直方向；on表示“在……上面”，且互相接触。
20. C
二、21. C。看文章的首句和尾句之后，此空便可迎刃而解。
22. A。"what...mean"这是习惯性搭配。
23. B。灯要在夜里开，evening虽为"晚上"之意，但不可与at搭配。
24. D。顺承上文华灯竞开，自然亮如白昼。
25. C。不看下一句，似乎4个选项均成立，但下文提到车灯，自然应 选驾车。
26. D。由于街上十分明亮， 即使天黑了也不必开车灯。
27. A。文章最后又提出一个原因， 说明不是唯一的原因才对。
28. C。 从上文可知用many。
29. A。由于巴黎乃世界科学和艺术中心， 因此吸引了许多科学家和艺术家来此学习和研究。
30. B。习惯用法。注意最后的lights显然不是指具体的灯，而是指"显赫人物；名家；名流"。
三、(A) 31 D由标题可知。
32 C细读各项要求可知。
33 B比较广告词可知。
34 C细读广告可找到。
35 A 这是一个招教师的广告。
(B) 36 B在虚线上方可以找到。
37 D在虚线下方的pizza type中可以找到。
38 D上午8点到晚上11点。
39 B虚线下方是顾客的地址。
40 B在虚线下方的drinks中可以找到。
(C) 41 C由第一段第一句话可知。
42 B通过上下文可以猜出。
43 A由第二段第二句可知。
44 B细读第三段可知。
45 D 熟读文章可以总结出来。
(D) 46 D由第二段第四句可知。
47 C由第二段第五句可知。
48 D由最后一句可知。
49 A由很多美丽的颜色可知是彩虹。
50 B熟读文章可以总结出来。
四、(A) 51. was playing 52. Are 53. watching 54.tried 55.said
(B) 56. life 57. happiness 58. health
59. 每个人都震惊我的美，没有人会再想到你们当中的任何一个。
60. no; longer 61. danger
62. How; foolish 63. C
五、(A) BCDAF (B) 69. When did you buy it 70. What colour do you prefer / like 71. how much is it 72. Where is it made 73. Sure. / Certainly. / Of course.
六、(A) 74. 如今的生活比以前好多了。
75. 现在一些人购物不出家门。
76. 那我们的教育又是怎样呢。
77. 教师在网上给他们上课。
78. 机器人帮助人们做家务。
(B) Found
April10th,2008
A pair of glasses was left in the reading room on the morning of April 10th. Will the owner please ring 6730886
Finder, Li Ping
七、（略）
was playing Are is watching tried said
A I know where it is .B. What are you doing
C. Do you want to come over to my house D. OK. Where is your house
E. Do you want to buy something to eat F. OK. I’ll see you at two thirty .
G. Do you like it 期中测试题
一、单项选择（20分）
1. Try to ____ your life in the future, you’re going to have fun with your _____.
A. imagine, imagination B. imagination, imagine C. think, thought
2. Look! Judy is _____ an ice cream cone. It must be very sweet.
A. licks B. licked C. licking
3. My sister is going to the library to get _____ about flowers.
A. informations B. inform C. information
4. His _______ helped him get on a good soccer team.
A. determinations B. determination C. determine
5. I feel tired. I study ______ 10 hours every day.
A. may be B. near C. almost
6. My sister can run very fast. I can’t ______ her.
A. keep B. keep up with C. keep up
7. They had trouble ______ information on the Internet, let’s give them a hand.
A. get B. gets C. getting
8. Don’t eat too many plums. I _____ that it ____ a healthy fruit.
A. think, isn’t B. not think, is C. don’t think, is
9. There are many kinds of flowers growing in the garden. Some are more beautiful than ______ ones.
A. other B. others C. another
10. These buildings are ______ taller than those ones in our town.
A. more B. most C. much
11. This steak _____ great. Could I have some more
A. taste B. tastes C. tasting
12. _____ Amy first came to China, she was nervous. The food she ate tasted strange and the language she heard sounded ______.
A. While, confusing B. When, confusing C. As soon as, confused
13. Please don’t _____ the people who’re in trouble.
A. laugh at B. smile at C. laugh to
14. —How many students are there in your school —About two ______.
A. thousand B. thousands C. thousands of
15. —How wide is the river —It’s about _____ wide.
A. 2 meters B. 2-meter C. 2 meters’
16. —What did your mother buy for you on your 15th birthday
—She ______ an MP4 for me. It’s really a good _____.
A. chose, chosen B. chose, choice C. choice, chosen
17. You can ______ your friend by e-mail.
A. keep up with B. keep in touch with C. keep away
18. —Look! She’s skating so fast
—It’s hard _____ he is a handicapped girl.
A. believe B. to believe C. believed
19. He learned ____ about computers and became very good ____ using it.
A. a lot, at B. a lot of, in C. lots of, at
20. Which stress of the following words is different
A. realize B. anyone C. succeed
二、完形填空（10分）
Many people think that Americans 21 their cars almost more than anything else. When 22__ people are fourteen years old, they want to have their __23_ cars. They don’t ask for a car from their 24__. So many of them work in _25_ time during their last year of high school to buy a car. Learning to 26 _ and getting a driver’s license may be one of the most exciting things in a young person’s life.
Some people almost 27 _ go to a doctor when they are ill. But they will __28_ their cars to a garage as soon as they think there is a 29 . On Saturdays or Sundays some people may 30 most of their time washing and repairing their cars.
21. A. prefer B. love C. drive D. play
22. A. little B. big C. old D. young
23. A. new B. own C. expensive D. cheap
24. A, friends B. teachers C. parents D. brothers
25. A. free B. busy C. study D. good
26. A. make B. mend C. wash D. drive
27. A. always B. never C. often D. usually
28. A. take B. carry C. pull D. lift
29. A. question B. wrong C. mistake D. problem
30. A. cost B. get C. spend D. use
三、阅读理解（20分）
(A)
Mr. and Mrs. Brown have two children, Mike and Liz. The whole family are all busy, so they often leave notes（便条）for each other. Read these four notes of today and answer the following questions.
3:30 pmTo Mike，Mr. Tyler rang. No football practice today. I’m going to Donna’s house to play and be back at 5:00 pmLiz 4:00 pmTo Liz，It’s your turn to walk the dog. I have to do my homework after school. Remember to play with Teddy when you get home!Mike
6:45 pmHas anyone seen my tennis shoes I’m in my bedroom doing my homework.Mike 9:00 pmI saw your shoes this morning. They smelt terrible so I put them outside the back door. Good night, dears!Mum
31. When will Liz be back home
A. At 3:30 pm. B. At 4:00 pm. C. At 5:00 pm. D. At 9:00 pm.
32. Who should walk the dog today
A. Mike. B. Mrs. Brown. C. Liz. D. Mr. Brown.
33. What is Mike doing at 6:50 pm
A. Practicing football. B. Going to Donna’s house.
C. Playing tennis. D. Doing his homework.
34. Where can Mike find his tennis shoes
A. In his bedroom. B. Outside the back door.
C. In the living room. D. At Donna’s house.
35. According to the notes, Teddy is __________.
A. Mike’s mother B. Mike’s brother
C. Mike’s football couch D. the dog in the family
(B)
Henry had studied in a university before he came back to his hometown. He thought he had lots of knowledge and he was supercilious(目中无人).
At first he was easily given a job in a bank. But he couldn,t get on well with his workmates and often made mistakes. And soon he was sent away. Then he found a job in a post office, but he still couldn't be competent(适任) at it and before long he had to leave. After he had lost the work, his life got worse and worse and he was often worried about food and clothes. When he hardly asked for some food in the street, a friend of his aunt,s felt pity for him and asked him to work in his restaurant. Of course he didn,t like the work at all but it was much better than being hungry. He had to work there.
One day a young beautiful woman came into the restaurant. She wanted two eggs, some chicken and a glass of milk. Henry thought she wore beautiful clothes but didn,t have much knowledge. When he was taking the milk to her, he found there was a fly in the milk, but he still bring it to the woman. As soon as he left her table, he heard her crying behind.
“What,s in my milk, waiter ”the woman shouted at him.
“Haven,t you seen it,s a fly, madam ”asked Henry.
“It,s terrible!”the woman said angrily.
“Don,t be angry, madam,” Henry said quietly. “It,s too small. It can,t drink much of your milk!”
36.Why was Henry supercilious Because .
A. he was rich B. he thought he knew much more than others
C. he could be competent at all the work D. he came from a big family
37.Why was Henry sent away from the bank Because .
A. he didn’t like there B. he couldn’t get on well with his workmates
C. he was careless in his work D. B and C
38.Why did the man tell Henry to work in his restaurant Because .
A. he liked the young man B. he needed a learned man
C. he wanted to help the young man D. the young man had lots of knowledge
39.Henry didn’t bring the woman for another glass of milk because .
A. he didn’t like the young woman B. he knew her well
C. he hoped she went out D. he hoped she could ask for another drink
40.Which of the following is TRUE
A. Henry wanted to find another piece of work.
B. Henry would soon be sent away again.
C. Henry would be given a piece of important work.
D. The manager would be afraid of Henry.
(C)
Tea bag drinking is most Westerns’ favorite way of drinking tea. Do you know how it came about
The tea bag was invented in 1908 by Thomas Sullivan, an American tea seller. He was sending out free tea in silk (丝绸) bags for people to try. People put the bags together with the tea leaves into the cup and added hot water. The tea tasted good, and people thought it was easy to clean the cup. They were not happy when Sullivan started sending them loose (散的) tea again.
Sullivan realized that he had a hot new thing in his hands, and he built a machine to pack the bags. As tea bags became popular, they were changed from silk to gauze (薄纱) and later paper. In 1952, Lipton Tea made the tea bag even more popular with its invention of the four-sided tea bag. Tea bags were soon a hit in the UK, and today 85% of the tea in the UK is packed in paper bags.
However, many people still prefer loose-leaf tea. This is because some tea companies put not very good tea in their tea bags. But for most drinkers, tea bags are still the easy, tasty way to go.
41. Who invented the tea bag
A. An English tea seller. B. Chinese. C. Lipton. D. Thomas Sullivan.
42. The tea in silk bags was welcome because ________.
A. the tea in bags was free and very good
B. the tea tasted good and the cup was easy to wash
C. people were happy with the loose tea
D. people didn’t know any better way to enjoy the tea
43. The material of the tea bags is usually __________ now.
A. silk B. gauze C. paper D. plastic
44. The underlined sentence “Tea bags were soon a hit in the UK” probably means “________ in the UK”.
A. Tea bags soon became popular
B. Tea bags surprised everyone very much
C. Tea bags kicked (踢) the loose-leaf tea out of the market
D. Tea bags weren’t allowed to be sold
45. The reading mainly talks about ___________.
A. the invention of tea B. the way of drinking tea
C. the history of tea bags D. people’s favorite tea in the world
(D)
A man came back home from work late, tired, to find his six-year-old son waiting for him at the door.
“Daddy, how much money do you make an hour ”
“If you want to know, I make $20 an hour.”
“Oh,” the little boy replied, with his head down. He thought for a moment, looked up and said, “Daddy, could you lend me $10 ”
The father was furious, “If you asked for money to buy a toy or some other rubbish, then go straight to your room and think why you are being so selfish (自私的)!”
The little boy quietly went to his room and shut the door. After about an hour or so, the father calmed down, and started to think, “Maybe he really needs to buy something and he didn’t ask for money very often.” So he went to the little boy’s room.
“Sorry! Maybe I was too hard on you just now,” said the man. “Here’s $10.”
“Oh, thank you, Daddy!” the boy said gladly. Then, the boy took out some coins. When the father found that the boy already had some money, he got angry again.
“Why do you want more money since you already have some ” the father shouted angrily.
“Because I didn’t have enough, but now I do,” the little boy replied, “Daddy, I have $20 now. Can I buy an hour of your time Please come home early tomorrow. I would like to have dinner with you.”
46. How much does the man make if he works 10 hours
A. $10. B. $20. C. $100. D. $200.
47. In this passage, the underlined (下划线) word “furious” means _________.
A. very angry B. quite happy C. too excited D. a little nervous
48. At first, the father refused to give the boy any money because _________.
A. he thought the boy wanted to keep the money for himself
B. he did not have enough money at that moment
C. he thought the boy would buy something of no use
D. the boy always borrowed money from him
49. The boy wanted to buy ________ with twenty dollars.
A. a new book for himself B. a nice present for his father
C. a toy for his own birthday D. an hour of his father’s time
50. From this passage, we can infer (推断) that the boy’s father ________.
A. often played with his son B. spent little time with his son
C. didn’t love his son at all D. often came back home early
四、任务性阅读（10分）
(A)
根据海报内容，完成下面短文。每空一词。数词要求用英语写出。
Mr．Colin wants a man to deliver (51)_______. It would be a good thing if the man had a(52)______．He needs the man to work(53)_________ hours and a half per(每)week．The man will get(54)_______pounds a week．Anyone who is(55)_________in this job can write to Mr．Colin C．Woodcock at 36 The Avenue，Brighton，BN2 4FA．
(B)
根据短文内容，按要求答题。
Jim, a successful businessman, told the experience（经历）of his childhood.
When he was 12, his parents died. He was alone and didn’t get on well with others. People always laughed at him. No one showed kindness to him.
His only friend was a dog named Tige. He gave his dog enough to eat and drink, but sometimes he was not friendly to it. He didn’t know that an unkind （不和蔼的）word sometimes could cut（切割） one’s heart（心脏） like a knife.
One day as he walked down the street, a young lady was walking in front of him. Suddenly one of her bags dropped from her arms. As she stopped to pick it up, she dropped other bags. He came to help her. “Thank you, dear! You are a nice little boy!” She said kindly, smiling.
A special feeling（特殊的感觉） came to him. It was the first time that he had heard such kind words. He watched her until she went far away, and then he whistled to his dog and went directly to the river nearby.
“Thank you, dear! You are a nice little boy!” He repeated（重复） what the woman said. Then in a low voice he said to his dog, “You are a nice little dog.” Tige raised its ears as if it understood.
“Hmm! Even a dog likes it!” he said. “Well, Tige, I won’t say anything unkind to you any more.” Tige waved its tail（摇尾巴） happily.
The boy thought and thought. Finally he looked at himself in the river. He saw nothing but a dirty boy. He washed his face carefully. Again he looked. He saw a clean nice boy. He was amazed. From then on, he started a new life.
After telling this, the businessman stopped for a while, and then he said, “Ladies and gentlemen, this is the very place in which that kind woman planted the first seed（种子）of kindness in my heart. All of us should learn about kindness. What a great power（能量） it has!”
56．Why did nobody show kindness to Jim
57．Who was Jim’s friend
58．Jim didn’t start his new life after meeting the young lady, did he
59．Put the sentence “This is the very place in which that kind woman planted the first seed（种子）of kindness in my heart.” into Chinese.
60．What’s the best title of this passage
五、交际运用（10分）
(A)
从题后方框中选出能填人空白处的最佳选项(有两项为多余选项)。
A：Hi，Simon!_______________ (61)
B：No，not really．I’ve been busy studying for my exams．What about you
A：Oh，I watched several games．They were quite exciting．
B．How lucky you are! ______________ (62)
A：Ronaldinho from Brazil(巴西)．And I think he’s the best player in the world．
B：So do I．______________ (63)
A：The Germany(德国)team，I believe．
B：Why
A：_____________ (64)And the players are famous for their team work．
B．______________(65) Let’s look forward to the final match．
A．Who is your favorite player B．Maybe you’re right． C．Did you watch the games of the World Cup D．What did you do yesterday E．The Germany team always plays well． F．Certainly not． G．Which team will win in this year’s World Cup
(B)
(Li Lei and Zhang Hai are talking on the phone．)
L—Li Lei．Z—Zhang Hai
L：Hello，Zhang Hai！I haven’t heard from you for a long time．(66)______________
Z：I’m preparing(准备)for the final exams．
L：Good luck to you! Summer holiday is coming．
(67)
Z：First，I’ll have a good rest，and then I will go to Beijing to watch the Olympic Games．
L：(68)______________．
Z：Wonderful！ Our plans are almost the same．
L：Are you going to visit some places of interest
Z：(69)______________．I want to visit the Great Wall．
L：Let’s meet in Beijing．We may do something useful to support the Olympics together．
Z：Sounds great．
L：See you then．
Z：(70)______________．
六、阅读表达（10分）
(A)
阅读短文，根据短文内容用单词或短语完成表格
You are what you eat so maybe it's time you started eating sensibly. Experts at the first Chinese Students Nutrition and Health Festival in Kunming last week picked out several bad eating habits.
●Watching television while having meals or snacks .
Doing this means you don't pay attention to your food, forget how full you are, and so overeat. It can also cause digestion (消化) diseases. One way to avoid this is only to eat in certain areas of your home.
●Replacing meals with snacks.
Many students think that eating small snacks can help them diet. But it often results in overeating and health problems related to a lack of vegetables, carbohydrates , proteins and vitamins. Snacking only works if it is well planned and includes healthy foods such as nuts, vegetables, fruit and yogurt.
●Having drinks rather than water.
Fizzy(有气泡的)drinks and fruit juice are usually high in calories and sugar, which can cause weight problems. Water is important in making your brain cells and every organ in your body work properly. For your body to burn fat, it needs at least eight glasses of pure water a day. Liquids like soda and coffee actually take water away from your body.
●Choosing meat and certain vegetables over others.
Different foods provide different kinds of nutrition. If you don't have a balanced diet, this can result in malnutrition (营养失调) and a weaker body.
●Eating throat tablets (润喉片) as if they were sweets.
If you eat throat tablets when you have no throat disease, they may affect the bacteria (细菌) in your mouth and cause real throat problems.
Develop a Healthier Lifestyle
71. __________ Results Possible problems 77. ________
Watching television while eating Overeating 75. __________ Eat in certain areas
Replacing meals with snacks 72. _______ Lack of vegetables, carbohydrates, proteins and vitamins 78. _______
Include healthy foods
Having drinks rather than water 73.________ Weight problems 79. ________
Choosing meat and certain vegetables over others Malnutrition 76. __________ Balance your diet
Eating throat tablets as if they were sweets 74. ________ Real throat problems 80. _______
(B)
只要你会唱、会跳、或会某种乐器，就有可能参加学校的音乐会，详情请与Zhangheng 联系。请以Musicians Wanted for School Concert 为题写一则招聘广告。
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
七、书面表达（20分）
请阅读下面表格里提供的信息，写一篇介绍奥运冠军刘翔的短文。词数60—80左右。首句已为你写出，不计入总词数。
Liu Xiang is one of the best sportsmen in the world. ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
期中测试题答案
一、1. A try to do sth.第一个空应填动词原形；由题意知，第二个空填名词。
2. C由look知，应该用现在进行时；现在进行时的结构是：am/is/are +doing。
3. C information信息，是不可数名词。
4. B由题意知，应该填名词。determination是不可数名词。
5. C我每天差不多要学10个小时。Almost几乎、差不多的意思。
6. B keep up with赶上，追上。
7. C have trouble doing sth.干……有麻烦。
8. C I think 开头的复合句，要进行否定转移，即要否定主句，不能否定宾语从句。
9. A other后接可数名词复数； others后不能接名词； another后接可数名词单数。
10. C more, most不能修饰比较级，能修是比较级的词有much, a lot, a little, a bit, even, still, any, far等。
11. B在一般现在时中，主语是第三人称单数，谓语动词也要用第三人称单数。
12. B when后可接非延续性动词； while后只能接延续性动词； confused 困惑的；confusing令人困惑的。
13. A laugh at 嘲笑。
14. A前面有具体数字时，thousand用单数。
15. A 基数词+单位+形容词原形。如;three meters long 3米长。
16. B由题意知，第一个空应填动词过去式；第二个空填名词。
17. B keep in touch with 和……保持联系，固定短语。
18. B It’s hard to do sth.很难干某事。
19. A a lot很多，是代词；a lot of大量的，表示数量。Become good at对……变得很擅长。
20. B
二、21. B.通过下文的事例不难看出美国人对汽车不是一般的喜欢，故用love it，较贴近文章的意思。
22. D.按常识，十四五岁的人应称为年轻人，故应说young。
23. B.根据下文他们不想通过索要来获取别人的小轿车，而是想拥有自己的小汽车，故选own。
24. C.如果说想要索要小汽车的话，那只有先从父母亲那儿开始了，故应选parents。
25. A.十四五岁的年轻人大多在上学，所以工作占用的应是上学期间的空隙，故应选free。
26. D.要想获得驾照得先学开车，故应选drive。
27. B.与下文“车子一有问题就去修理”相对应，有些人病了却从不看医生，故应选never。
28. A. carry应为“搬运”，push 为“推”，lift 意思为“举，提起”都不合文意，take sth. to 某地，意为“把……带到……”。
29. D.只能选择一个名词, 表示汽车的“故障,毛病”, 故选problem。
30. C. spend some time doing sth.为一个固定搭配，意为“花时间干某事”。
三、 (A)31 C读第一个便条可知。
32 C读第二个便条可知。
33 D读第三个便条可知。
34 B读第四个便条可知。
35 D读第二个便条可知。
(B)36 B由第一段第一句可知。
37 D由第二段第二句可知。
38 C由第二段第六行可知。
39 A由第三段第二行可体会出。
40 B通读文章后半部分可知。
(C)41 D由第二段第一句可知。
42 B由第二段第四行可知。
43 C由第三段最后一句可知。
44 A由上下文可猜出。
45 C通读文章可知。
(D)46 D由第四行可算出。
47 A通过上下文可以猜出。
48 C由第七行可猜出。
49 D由文章倒数第二句可知。
50 B由最后一段可猜到。
四、 (A)51.milk 52.bicycle 53.seven 54.twenty 55.interested
(B) 56.Because he didn’t get on well with others.
57.His dog. / A dog named Tige. / Tige.
58.Yes, he did. / Yes.
59.就是在这个地方，那位善良的妇女在我心里播下了第一颗善良的种子。
60.The Power of Kindness.
五、 (A)61-65CAGEB
(B) 66.What are you doing(now／these days／all the time)
67．What’s your plan(for the holiday／for the summer holiday／for the coming holiday)
或What are you going to do ／What will you do ／What do you want to do ／What would you like to do
68．So will I./Me，too．/I’ll go to Beijing to watch the Olympic Games, too．／I’ll go there，too．／I’ll also go there．／I’ll go there as well．
69．Yes．I am．／Sure．／Certainly．／Of course．/Yes．
70．See you．／Good bye．／Bye-bye．／Bye．
六、 (A) 71. Bad eating habits 72.Overeating 73. Take water away 74. Affect the bacteria
75. Digestion diseases 76. A weaker body 77. Suggested advice 78. Well planned 79. Drink pure water 80. Eat when necessary
(B) Musicians Wanted for School Concert
Are you a musician Can you sing Can you dance Can you play the piano, the trumpet, the drums, or the guitar Then maybe you can be in our school concert. Please talk to Zhang Heng for more information.
七、(略)Unit 7 A special machine
单元词汇导学
1. invent, invention, inventor 2. ago, before
3. millions of 数百万的 4. Why not do sth.？为什么不干……
5. be made of由……制成 6. add to 添加
7. sell out 售完，卖光 8. more and more越来越多
9. pull down拉下
Lesson 1
学习点拨
本单元交际重在询问、介绍等话题。
1. Why not go there yourself
2. I may do that.
3. I prefer the old way.
4. This is where I cut my hair.
名师授课
1. He ______ the barbershop many times.
A. has gone to B. has been to C. has been in
解析 选B。have been to 是曾经去过，但已经回来了，现在人在这；have gone to 是已经去了，什么时候回来不知道，反正现在没在这；have been in 是一直呆在某地，从未离开过。
2. The machine _______ the barber.
A. was used to B. used to C. was used by
解析 选C。used to do 过去常常做某事 ；be used to doing sth习惯于做某事； be used to do 被用来做（表示被动）；be used by 被某人使用（表示被动）。
课后作业
一、词汇
（A）单词释义
1. The _____ here is very good. (person whose work is cutting one’s hair)
2. He likes cutting my hair with ______. (cutting instrument)
3. There is a _____ beside the door. (a machine which takes up dust, etc. by suction)
4. I _____ dumplings to cakes. (like better)
5. I think the old _____ is better. (method or plan of doing sth.)
（B）词性转换
1. Think of your own _____, please. (invent)
2. This is a _____ machine. (cut)
3. Every year, many buildings are ____ in this city. (build)
4. He has sold _____ of books. (million)
5. I enjoy ____ the Flowbee. (use)
二、单项选择
1. Who _____ to this barbershop before
A. has been B. has gone C. went
2. This is _____ I cut my hair.
A. which B. where C. what
3. Why not _____ hair with the machine
A. cut B. cutting C. to cut
4. There is a teachers’ desk ____ our classroom. Our teacher always stands ____ it.
A. in front of, in the front of B. in the front of, in front of
C. in front of, in front of
5. The barber is cutting hair _____ the machine. I’m waiting for him.
A. use B. by C. with
6. Which stress is different from the others
A. machine B. vacuum C. behind
7. Where did you _____ yesterday
A. go to B. go C. went
8. —What’s this —It’s a knife. It’s used _____ glass.
A. cut B. for cutting C. to cutting
9. —How strange it is!
—This is a vacuum that can make dust _____ your room.
A. be sucked from B. suck from C. be sucked
10. —Judy prefers _____ at home rather than ______ out.
—Why What’s wrong with her
A. to stay, goes B. staying, to go C. to stay, go
三、交际运用
（A）选择适当的句子填入空白，使对话完整。（其中有两项是多余的）
　　 A: Hello, Peter! 1_____
　　 B: Certainly! 2_____
　　 A: Which of these do you think is the most useful invention, a computer, a telephone or a television
　　 B: 3_____ the most useful one is a computer.
　　 A: Why is that
　　 B: Oh, I think it can help us work and play.
　　 A: 4_____ when it was invented
　　 B: 5_____, I don’t know.
　a. What is it used for 　　b. May I ask you a question 　　c. Sorry.　　d. What is it used for 　　e. I think　　f. What is it 　　g. Do you know
(B)填入一个适当的单词补全对话，每空一词
A： 1 did you go, Tom
B: I went to the barbershop with Bob.
A: Did the 2 cut Bob’s hair
B: yes, he did. He also 3 your hair, didn’t he
A: No, he didn’t. My hair isn’t long.
B: Does the barber do a good 4 .
A: Yes, he does. He can do everything the fastest 5 .
B: Oh, really I hope I can go to the barbershop with you next time.
A: OK!
1.________ 2.________ 3.________ 4.________ 5.________
Lesson 2
学习点拨
1. more than 多于 2.suck the dirt off the floor 吸走地面的灰尘
3. be made of 由……制成 4.at the fall festival every year 在每年的中秋节
5. use sth. to do sth.用……去做 6. be added to 被添加到……上
7. in this way 就这样 8. sell out 售完，卖光
9. more and more 越来越多 10. over the next ten years接下来的事多年里
11. come from surprising places来自令人惊奇的地方
名师授课
1. It is a special machine that _____ hair.
A. cut B. cuts C. cutting
解析 选B。此句是定语从句。从句中需要用谓语动词。从句的先行词是a special machine，属单数形式，因此从句中谓语动词也应用单数，即cuts。
2. A lot of wood _____ in the shop.
A. cut B. was cutted C. was cut
解析 选C。 主语是wood，与cut是被动关系,而且cut的过去分词是cut。
课后作业
一、词汇 单词释义
1. Mr Green will ____ a new machine. (create sth. which is not existing before)
2. I want to have a ____. (style of cutting the hair)
3. Almost ____ can answer this question. (no one)
4. The workers cleaned up the _____ before they left. (state of dirt or disorder)
5. Please don’t _____ your fingers. (hold sth. in the mouth and roll about with the tongue)
二、单项选择
1. There are many places of interest in China so ___ visitors come here every year.
A. million of B. millions of C. ten millions
2. Tables and desks are usually made ____ wood. Paper is also made ____ wood.
A. from, of B. of, from C. from, from
3. As our life is getting _____ , ____ people will buy cars.
A. good and good, many and many B. better and better, more and more
C. best and best, most and most
4. ________, the first Flowbees were built.
A. By the way B. On the way C. In this way
5. Many people sell and buy things _____ the fall festivals every year.
A. in B. on C. at
6. Great ideas _____ come from surprising places.
A. some times B. sometimes C. sometime
7. —Who invented the Flowvee
— The Flowbee was made by an American man ______ built things with wood.
A. who B. whom C. whose
8. —Where is the post office
—It is over there, ____ the library.
A. next to B. next C. besides
9. Computers ____ in our school many years ago.
A. are used B. were need C. were used
10. — Excuse me, sir. Which would you like better, apple juice or orange juice
—I_______.
A. prefer apple juice B. like apple juice best C. prefer apple juice better
三、完形填空
The bicycle is one of the simplest yet most useful inventions in the world. What is most surprising is that it was not ___1__ earlier, although the great inventor Leonardo Da Vinci had drawn pictures for bicycles and also for flying machines and some other things. Those things were not produced___2___ long after he died.
　　A person riding a bicycle uses ___3___ energy to make the bicycle move, and there is no pollution at all when you are riding. Even so, in developed ____4___ , most people don’t travel to work by bicycle. It is not because the bicycles are expensive or people feel___5____ if they ride to work. It’s because __6___ cars on the roads becomes largest. It certainly becomes ___7___ to ride a bicycle. As a result, more people put their bicycles away and go to work ___8___ their cars, and in this way, the situation is made more serious .___9___ the best way to make riding safer and more popular is to create paths (开设通道) only for bicycles, and to make ___10___ so difficult and expensive for drivers to take their cars into the city that they will go back to use their bicycles.
( )1. A. invent B. inventing C. invented D. to invent
( )2. A. before B. when C. since D. until
( )3. A. much B. quite a lot of C. very little D. many
( )4. A. world B. countries C. land D. earth
( )5. A. lucky B. glad C. sorry D. tired
( )6. A. the number of 　　B. a number of
　　　 C. this kind of D. all kinds of
( )7. A. safer B. more dangerous C. much dangerous D. safe
( )8. A. by B. in C. use D. drive
( )9. A. Hardly B. May be C. Perhaps D. Nearly
( )10. A. it B. them C. us D. that
四、任务性阅读
Some special parts 1 to a common vacuum. In this way, the first Flowbees were built. These first Flowbees 2 out of Hunt’s home. Then, a fall festival was held near Hunt’s home. He 3 all of his Flowbees there, and a lot of people bought 4! Next, Hunt 5 on television with the Flowbee. More and more Flowbees were sold.
Lesson 3
学习点拨
被动语态
一、英语中有两种语态：主动语态和被动语态。
主动语态表示主语是动作的执行者。巧记为：主动、主动、主去动。
被动语态表示主语是动作的承受者，即行为动作的对象。巧记为：被动、被动、主被动。
主动态和被动态指的是动词形式，是词法概念；而主动句和被动句则指的是句子结构，从而是句法概念。所谓主动句就是由主动态动词（词组）作谓语动词的句子，而被动句则是由被动态动词（词组）作谓语动词的句子。
二、被动语态的构成
被动语态由“助动词be＋及物动词的过去分词”构成。人称、数和时态的变化是通过be的变化表现出来的。现以teach为例说明被动语态在各种时态中的构成。
一般现在时：am／is／are＋p．p．
一般过去时：was／were＋p．p．
一般将来时：shall ／will be ＋p．p．
现在完成时：have ／has been ＋p．p．
现在进行时：am／is／are＋being＋p．p．
过去将来时：should ／would be ＋p．p．
含情态动词的被动结构：情态动词＋be＋p．p．
三、被动语态的用法
（1）不知道或没有必要说明动作的执行者是谁。
（2）强调动作的承受者，而不强调动作的执行者。
歌诀：谁做的动作不知道，说出谁做的没有必要；动作承受者需强调，被动语态运用到。
四、主动语态变被动语态的方法
（1）把主动语态的宾语变为被动语态的主语。
（2）把谓语变成被动结构（be＋过去分词）
（根据被动语态句子里的主语的人称和数，以及原来主动语态句子中动词的时态来决定be的形式）。
（3）把主动语态中的主语放在介词by之后作宾语，将主格改为宾格。
名师授课
1. I was made _____ by Tom.
A. cry B. to cry C. cried
解析 选B。句型make sb. do sth.变为被动语态时，需补出不定时符号to，即sb. be made to do sth.
2. Someone saw him swim in Qianling Lake yesterday．（变被动语态）
He ______ ______ ______ swim in Qianling Lake yesterday．
解析 填was seen to。 含有复合宾语的主动结构变被动结构时，通常将宾语变为被动句的主语，而宾语补足语就成为主语补足语。注意：省略to的不定式作宾补时，不定式符号to必须补上。
课后作业
一、词汇 单词释义
1. Linda is my ____ classmate. (person preferred above all others)
2. The ____ is a strange man. (person who invented sth.)
3. The party was _____ at our house. (took place)
4. I love my _____. (a machine with which people can take photos)
5. She is a _____ girl. (quick in understanding things)
二、单项选择
1. It’s hot here. The food _____ in a cool place.
A. must keep B. must be kept C. must be keeping
2. This kind of radio _____ the factory behind our school.
A. was made by B. was made of C. was made in
3. I prefer coffee _____ milk.
A. to B. with C. than
4. —Where are the books
—Don’t worry. They _____ here in no time.
A. have sent B. will be sent C. are sending
5. Alice, you _____ on the phone.
A. want B. are wanted C. need to be wanted
6. Many trees and flowers ____ in our city last year.
A. were planted B. plant C. have planted
7. The little girl was made _____ every day.
A. have the piano lesson B. having the piano lesson
C. to have the piano lesson
8. This dress makes you _____ cool!
A. looks B. look C. look like
9. — Where did you go this afternoon
—I _____ to go to uncle’s birthday party.
A. asked B. am asked C. was asked
10. Which stress of the following words is different from the others
A. describe B. picnic C. admire
三、完形填空
Who designed (设计) the first helicopter (直升飞机) Who __1__ of the most famous pictures in the world Who knew more about the human body than most __2__ There is an answer __3__ all these questions --- Leonardo de Vinci (达芬奇).
Leonardo may have been the greatest genius (天才) __4__ have ever known. He lived in Italy around the year 1500, but many of his inventions seem modern to us today. For example, one of his notebooks has drawings of a helicopter. Of course, he couldn’t __5__ a helicopter with the things he had. But scientists say his idea would have worked.
But Leonardo __6__ an inventor. He was one of the greatest artists of his day. By the time he was twenty years old, he was called a master ( 大师) painter, and as he got older he became __7__ more famous. Sometimes he drew a hand ten different ways __8__ he was ready to paint.
Many of Leonardo’s wonderful paintings are still with __9__ today. You may know one of his most famous works the __10__ woman known as the Mona Lisa.
1. A. took B. made C. painted D. invented
2. A. artists B. doctors C. painters D. people
3. A. to B. of C. for D. from
4. A. the scientists B. the artists C. the world D. people
5. A. draw B. paint C. work D. build
6. A. was just B. wasn’t just C. wasn’t D. was no longer
7. A. less B. no C. even D. very
8. A. before B. after C. because D. when
9. A. him B. us C. them D. you
10. A. interesting B. crying C. smiling D. surprising
四、阅读理解
(A)
An invention in front of your eyes
　　What is the most important invention of all time Is it the written word that helps us to record information Is it the telephone that lets us talk to people from all over the world Is it the car that let us travel at great speeds to meet others Umberto Eco, an Italian writer, thinks it is something quite different. He says the most important invention might be bright in front of your eyes. He is talking about a simple pair glasses.
　　Modern eye glasses were invented around 1000 years ago. They were more than just a convenient way to read. Before glasses, writers, scientists or teachers who could not see properly had to memorize everything. After about ten years of poor eyesight, they could not remember well enough and could not work. Glasses meant that people could work in their old age.
　　People who wanted to remember some information could write it down and read it. Eye glasses are one of the world’s greatest inventions and were probably worn by the people who designed the first telephones and cars.
　　1. The invention of the written word is important because___________.
　　A. we need it to listen
　　B. we need it to record information
　　C. we just need it to read
　　2. The author thinks _______ is the greatest invention of all time in his passage.
　　A. the telephone　　　　　　　　　　　　　 B. the car　
　　C. a simple pair of glasses
　　3. Before glasses were invented, writers, scientists and teachers had to_________.
　　A. memorize everything
　　B. write down everything
　　C. read everything
　　4. What happened after glasses were invented
　　A. people could not remember well enough.
　　B. people could not work.
　　C. people could write down some information and read it.
　　5. From this passage, we can know __________.
　　A. modern eye glasses were invented 100 years ago
　　B. people who designed the first telephones and cars probably wore those glasses
　　C. the author of this article is an American
(B)
Scientist has told us so much about the moon that it's quite easy to tell what it would like to go there. It's certainly not a friendly place. As there is no air or water, there can be no life of any kind. Mile after mile there are only plains (平原) of dust（土） with mountains around them above, the sun and the stars shine in a black sky. If you step out of the mountains shadows (阴影)it will mean moving from terrible (非常) cold into great heat(热).
　　The moon is also a very silent (安静) world, for sound waves (波) can only travel through air. But from the moon , you can see a friendly sight (景象). Our earth is shining more brightly than the stars. It looks like a very large ball, colored blue and green and brown.
（ ）1. What kind of place is the moon
A. It is a friendly place.
B. It is a lively place.
C. It is a nice place for man to live
D. It is a lifeless place.
（ ）2. Temperature on the moon _______.
A. are usually the same B. are always very low
C. can be very different D. are usually very high
（ ）3. The moon is a silent world because _______.
A. there is no life there B. there is no air there
C. there is no green tree there D. there is no water there.
（ ）4. When we look from the moon, the sky is _______.
A. blue B. black C. green D. brown
（ ）5.“…there are only plains of dust with…”,the word “dust” means ____.
A. ground B. dry earth C. land D. field
Lesson 4
学习点拨
与科技发明有关的英文素材
1. Inventions are used in many ways.
2. Our society has changed a lot with these inventions.
3. They bring us a lot of benefits.
4. Thanks to all these inventions, our country develops so quickly.
5. They can not only save us much time but also bring us a lot of momey.
名师授课
1. He came to work late________ up late.
A. because getting B. because of get C. because of getting
解析 选C。because是连词,所以后边跟句子；because of后边加名词或者动名词短语。
2. This bike is _____ of the two.
A. cheapest B. cheaper C. the cheaper
解析 选C。由于是两者比较，用比较级。加上the表示特指，强调两者之一。
课后作业
一、词汇 单词释义
1. You can ____ all the candles on the cake alone. (be moved or carried by the wind)
2. Do you have a _____ (question)
3. This machine was invented by a ____. (person in Japan)
4. I like the ____ chair. (not common, unusual)
5. Don’t push the door, you can ____ it. (use force to draw towards one)
二、单项选择
1. Who can work out this math problem ____ a new way
A. in B. by C. on
2. The Olympic Games ______ every four years.
A. is held B. was held C. will be held
3. _____ was _____ by _____ in 1890.
A. The inventor, invented, the invention
B. The invention, invented, an inventor C. An invention, invent, the inventor
4. Hunt’s clever way ____ really works.
A. cut hair B. to cut hair C. of cut hair
5. She sent me a picture of ____ that ____ five years ago.
A. my, taken B. her, is taken C. us, was taken
6. This kind of machine is _____ only through the Internet.
A. selling B. sold C. selled
7. If you have ____ question, please _____ your hand.
A. any, put up B. some, put up C. any, pull up
8. If you can’t push the door open, you may ____ it.
A. pull B. make C. take
9. I want to make a flower pot _____ a waste milk carton.
A. use B. used C. using
10. Many inventions were made ____ a problem.
A. because B. because of C. due
三、把下列句子变为被动语态
1. The teacher told him to return the books to the library on time.
He _____ ______ to return the books to the library on time.
2. People should plant many trees every year.
Many trees _____ ______ ______ every year.
3. The boss made the boy work 18 hours every day.
The boy ______ _____ _____ _____ 18 hours every day.
4. I heard Lucy play the piano in the next room just now.
Lucy ____ ____ _____ _____ the piano in the next room just now.
5. They grow vegetables on the farm.
Vegetables ____ ______ on the farm.
四、阅读表达
In Canada and the United States, people enjoy entertaining(请客) at home. They often invite friends over for a meal, a party or just for coffee and conversation.
Here are the kinds of things people say when they invite someone to their homes:
"Would you like to come over for dinner this Saturday night " "Hey, we're having a party on Friday. Can you come "
To reply to an invitation, either say thank you and accept, or say you're sorry and give an excuse. "Thanks, Fd love to. What time would you like me to come " or "Oh, sorry. I've tickets for a movie. "
Sometimes, however, people use expressions that sound like invitations but which are not real invitations. For example; "Please come over for a drink sometime. " "Why not get together for a party sometime " " Why don't you come over and see us sometime soon "
They are really just polite ways of ending a conversation. They are not real invitations because they don't mention a certain time or date. They just show that the person is trying to be friendly. To reply to expressions like these, people just say "Sure, that would be great!" or "OK. Yes, thanks. "
So next time when you hear what sounds like an invitation, listen carefully. Is it a real invitation or is the person just being friendly
Title. 1. ________
Situations Answers
Canadians and Americans often invite friends for meals at home. Because they 2. ______
Someone says "I've two movie tickets, can you go with me after supper " You want to go, and your answer should be "Thanks, 3. ______"
Someone invites you to dinner, but doesn't mention the time and date. You'd better answer "Sure, 4. ________. "
Western people use "an unreal invitation" in their daily conversation. They really mean to be 5.______ .
So remember, next time when you hear something sounds like an invitation, you should pay attention to the 6 .
单元测试
一、单项选择
1. The barber is very great, he can cut hair _______ scissors only.
A. of B. use C. with
2. This machine is made ________ my father.
A. of B. by C. from
3. My brother stands _______ the door, so he can catch the key first.
A. besides B. far from C. next to
4. I _______ to cut hair the old way ________ the fast way.
A. prefer, to B. prefer, than C. prefer, better than
5. ________ hamburgers are sold in America every year.
A. Million B. Millions of C. A million of
6. You are late. We started our class about 10 minutes _______.
A. ago B. before C. after
7. People are cutting down more and more trees. A lot of ______ used to make furniture.
A. woods are B. wood is C. wood were
8. Some special parts _______ a common washing machine.
A. add to B. were added with C. were added to
9. The old man was very happy. He ______ all the toys made by his wife.
A. sold on B. sold for C. sold out
10.“Yesterday Once More” was _______ by Carpenter.
A. sings B. sang C. sung
11. The Wright brothers built the first ______ airplane.
A. work B. working C. worked
12. Tables and chairs are made ______ wood.
A. from B. of C. with
13. The machine ______ two years ago, which ______ cutting glasses.
A. was invented B. has been invented, used to C. invented, is used for
14.—Have you _______ Shanghai —Yes, I think Shanghai is a very good city.
A. been in B. been to C. gone to
15. —Why not come _______ alone —I feel ______ afraid.
A. here, a little B. to here, a bit C. there, a little
16. The question can be _______ answered by us. We needn’t ______.
A. easy, think of it B. easier, think it about C. easily, think it over
17. I want to know if Tom was made _______ because he often helps neighbours ______ flowers
A. speak high of, water B. to speak highly of, to water C. to speak highly, watering
18. Hellen said she knew the _______.
A. inventer B. inviter C. inventor
19. Which stress of the following words is different
A. receive B. amaze C. journey
20.—What do you think _______ this coat
—I think this coat is ______ than that one.
A. of, beautifuler B. of, more beautiful C. about, more beautifully
二、完形填空
The computer plays an important part in our everyday life. It is one of the great __21__ in the world in the __22__ century. It works for us not only at home, in the offices, in big shops, __23__ at schools. Today it is used __24__ many ways. It really __25__ the world large wealth (财富) and happiness.
The first computer in the world was __26__ Enid. It was built in America in 1946. It was __27__ and heavy. __28__ it was born, it has been developing very fast. Until now it has gone __29__ four periods（时期，阶段）and changed a lot. There’re many kinds of puters are getting smaller and smaller and computing faster and faster. It becomes more and more __30__.
21. A. inventions B. discoveries C. robots D. inventors
22. A. twenty-first B. twenties C. twelfth D. twentieth
23. A. also B. but also C. too D. either
24. A. in B. to C. by D. over
25. A. takes B. helps C. gets D. brings
26. A. found B. invented C. called D. bought
27. A. easy B. small C. large D. light
28. A. For B. Until C. When D. Since
29. A. by B. across C. through D. against
30. A. serious B. harmful. C. dangerous D. helpful
三、阅读理解
(A)
He was born in Atlanta, Georgia, on January 15, 1929. He was black. He died in his thirties, but he became world-famous during that short time. He grew up in the southeastern part of the United States. He studied at Morehouse College, where he met many outstanding men whose ideas he found important and exciting. There he read the writings of Thoreau, which gave him many ideas about freedom.
After he finished studying in Morehouse, he went on to study at the University of Pennsylvania, Harvard University, and Boston University. At Boston University, he met his wife, Coretta. In 1954, after he got his Ph. D. degree , he became a minister (牧师) of a small church in the South. Then he became the leader of the black people, who were poor and powerless. He gave speeches and led parades. For his ideas and actions, he was in prison for a short time.
Many years later, in Washington D.C. he spoke to a crowd of 250,000 people. He told them "I have a dream". That speech is still famous today. In 1964 he won the Nobel Peace Prize. His work was not finished when he died on April 4. 1968. Who was he He was Martin Luther King Jr..
31. Where did Martin Luther King Jr. get the ideas of freedom
A. In the University of Pennsylvania. B. In Harvard University.
C. In Morehouse College. D. In Boston University.
32. Why was Martin Luther King Jr. in prison
A. Because he was a minister of a small church.
B. Because he was black and world-famous.
C. Because he gave a speech called “I have a dream”.
D. Because he often gave talks in public and organized the parades .
33. How old was Martin Luther King Jr. when he died
A. Twenty-five years old. B. Thirty-five years old.
C. Thirty-seven years old. D. Thirty-nine years old.
34. How is Martin Luther King’s speech “I have a dream”
A. It is so famous that people today still remember it.
B. It was such a famous speech that he won the Nobel Peace Prize.
C. It was famous only before he died.
D. It didn’t become famous until he died.
35. Which of the following is NOT true
A. He grew up in the United States.
B. He fought against the black.
C. His work was not finished when he died.
D. He was world-famous.
(B)
Life in the twenty-first century will be very different from life today. Between then and now many changes will take place, but what will the changes be
The population is growing fast. There will be a large number of people in the world and most of them will live longer than people live now.
Computers will be much smaller and more useful, and there will be at least one in every home. And computer studies will be one of the important subjects in schools then.
People will work fewer hours than they do now and they will have more free time for sports, watching TV and traveling. Traveling will be much easier and cheaper. And many more people will go to other countries for holidays.
There will be changes in our food, too. Maybe no one will eat meat every day. Instead they eat more fruits and vegetables. People will be much healthier.
Work in the future will be different, too. Dangerous and hard work can be done by robots. Because of this, many people will not have enough work to do. This will be a problem.
36. There will be _________ in the future.
A. small population B. few changes C. more people D. few people
37. In the future more people will _________.
A. go to other countries for holidays B. study at school
C. will go earlier D. work for many hours
38. People will prefer _________ to _________ in the future.
A. fruits and vegetables; meat B. meat; fruits and vegetables
C. fruits and meat; vegetables D. meat and vegetables; fruits
39. The robots will do _________ in the future.
A. all the work B. the dangerous work
C. only housework D. the easy work for people
40. Which of the following sentences is TRUE about the computer
A. It will be much bigger, so few people will use it.
B. It will be much smaller and more useful for people.
C. It will be smaller and not many people will use it.
D. It will be bigger and a lot of people will use it.
(C)
ADVERTISEMENTS
FASHION SHOW A fashion show will be held on Friday, 16th April at Silver Sea Hotel, from 7:30 p.m. to 11:00 p.m. charming modelsBeautiful clothesAmazing show XINHUA SUPERMARKETFISH from ZHANJIANGWe have some kinds of special delicious FISH from Zhanjiang at seafood e and find out all you need.
ZHONGSHAN SCHOOL OF HOTELWANTED! English teachers for waiters and hotel workers. Teaching qualification（资格）and hotel experience are essential（必要的）. Good pay.Tel: 0755-84869855 for further information TEACHERS NEEDEDTeachers needed for a small private school. Experience with young children is necessary. English speakers preferred. Apply to: Zhaoyang Primary School, BeijingTel: 010-23678893
41. A fashion show will last ________ on Friday.
A. for two hours B. for two and a half hours
C. for three hours D. for three and a half hours
42. According to the ads, a qualification is needed if a person wants to work __________.
A. at Zhongshan School of Hotel B. at Zhaoyang Primary School
C. at Xinhua Supermarket D. at Silver Sea Hotel
43. Maria has a lot of experience working with children. She is looking for a new job. She may call ___________.
A. 0755-84869855 B. 0755-84889655 C. 010-23678893 D. 010-23768893
44. Mr. White has a restaurant, he wants to find some new delicious food for his customers（顾客）. He can go to __________.
A. Xinhua Supermarket B. Zhongshan School of Hotel
C. Silver Sea Hotel D. Zhanjiang
45. Which of the following is NOT mentioned in the four ads
A. Show. B. Fish. C. Music. D. Pay.
(D)
Alfred Nobel, the great Swedish inventor and industrialist, was born in Stockholm on October 21, 1833, but moved to Russia with his parents in 1842, where his father, Immanuel, made a strong position for himself in the engineering industry. Immanuel Nobel invented landmine and made a lot of money from the government during the Crimean War, but went bankrupt soon after. Then, the family returned to Sweden in 1859, where Alfred began his own study of explosives in his father’s lab. He had never been to school or university but had taught himself, and by the time he was twenty, he became a skillful chemist and excellent linguist, speaking Swedish, Russian, German, French and English. He built up over 80 companies in 20 different countries. He was always searching for a meaning to life. He spent much time and money working on how to end the wars, and the peace between nations, until his death in Italy in 1896. His famous last will, in which he left money to provide prizes for outstanding work in physics, chemistry, physiology, medicine, literature and peace, is a memorial to his interests and ideas. And so, the man is remembered and respected long after his death.
46. Where was Alfred Nobel born He was born in ________.
A. Sweden B. Stockholm C. Russia D. Moscow
47. What did Immanuel Nobel invented during the Crimean War
A. The engineering industry. B. A strong position. C. Landmine.
D. Study of explosives.
48. Why did Alfred Nobel return to Sweden Because his father ________.
A. went bankrupt B. was put in prison C. was ill D. died
49. How many companies did Alfred Nobel build up He built up ________ companies in different countries.
A. 20 B. 40 C. 60 D. 80
50. What was Alfred Nobel always searching for ________.
A. More time and more money B. A meaning to life
C. How to end the war D. The peace between nations
四、任务性阅读
(A)
Do you know how ____51___ a game called “Musical Chairs” 52 is easy to play and most people enjoy it. All you need are some chairs, some people and some way of 53 music. You may use a piano or any other musical instrument, if someone can play it. You may use a tape recorder. You can 54 use a radio.
Put the chairs in a row. The chairs may 55 in twos, back to back. A better way is to have the chairs in one row with each chair facing in the opposite direction to the chair next to it.
(B)
People all over the world eat rice. 1_______ (million) of people in Asia, Africa and South America eat it every day of their lives. Some people eat almost nothing but rice.
　　Rice is a kind of grass. T here are more than 7000 kinds f the United States and in eastern Australia.
　　No one really knows where rice came from. Some scientists think that it started to grow in two places. They think that one kind of rice grew in southern Asia thousands of years ago. Someone in China wrote about it almost 5000 years ago. Another kind probably grew in West Africa. Other scientists think that rice came from India, and Indian travelers took it to other parts of the world.
　　There are two main ways to grow rice. Most rice grows in wet soil. People in many countries do all of the work of growing rice by hand. This is the same way farmers worked hundreds of years ago. In some countries, people now use machines on their rice farms.
　　People use every part of the rice plant. They make animal feed and rice oil from it. They burn dry rice plants for cooking.
　 阅读短文，完成下列问题。
　　任务一：请在1处所给单词的适当形式填空
　　56.__________________________________________
　　任务二：根据短文内容完成句子，每空一词
　　57. There are _____ _____ kinds of rice in the world.
　　58. Farmers grew rice_______ ________ hundreds of years age.
　　任务三：把文中黑体部分译成汉语
　　59._______________________________________________________________________
　　任务四：将划线的句子变成被动语态
　　60._______________________________________________________________________
五、交际运用
(A)
请从方框中选择恰当的句子补全对话，有两项多余。
　　A. I have no idea. What about you 　　B. Would you like to go with me？　　C. That’s right.　　D. I would like to go to Beijing.　　E. If I were you, I’d go by car.　　F. How will you travel 　　G. Then where will you tour
Jim: Hey! Where are you going to spend your summer vacation
　　Tom: ___61__
　　Jim：I want to have a camping trip.___62____
　　Tom: I’d love to. But how long will you travel
　　Jim: For about two weeks.
　　Tom: Oh, that’s too long.___63__
　　Jim: We can go to the countryside or even to another city.
　　Tom: Great! But it is too far away .___64___
　　Jim: I’m going to travel by car.
　　Tom: That sounds much more interesting and exciting.
　　Jim: Really We’re sure to have fun.
　　Tom: __65___
(B)
A: Hi, Alice! A nice day, isn’t it
??B: Yes. Spring is coming. (66)____
??A: Tomorrow Tomorrow is not a good day for planting trees!
??B: (67)._________________
??A: I listened to the weather report. It says it’s going to be rainy and windy.
??B: (68). _______________! If it rains, we have to stay at home and do some reading.
??A: Why not come to my home to play computer games My father bought different parts of the computer and put them together. He made our own computer last week.
??B: Great! But (69). _______________
??A: My home is near our school. It’s a white building. I live on the fourth floor.
??B: OK! (70). __________________.
??A: See you.
六、阅读表达
(A)
Tom was very weak and often ill, so his parents wanted him to learn Chinese Kungfu. But no one liked to take him as a student because he looked very ugly.
One day, a teacher from a Kungfu school came to his village. Tom wanted to be his student. The teacher said nothing, kicking away a small stone.
Three years later, the teacher came to the village again. On his way back from the village, some young men wanted to fight him. At the moment, Tom came and said, “Let’s fight them together, Mr. Smith.” He kicked a small stone away and hit a man heavily with the sound of “Go away”!
The teacher looked at Tom carefully and said, “You saved my life. Thank you very much. But how do you know me ” Tom said happily, “You taught me to kick stones three years ago.” After that, the teacher never judged（判断）a man by his looks.
Answer the following questions according to the passage. （10分）
71. Why did Tom’s parents want him to learn Chinese Kungfu
__________________________________________________
72. Why didn’t the teacher take Tom as a student
__________________________________________________
73. What did Tom learn
__________________________________________________
74. Where did the teacher find himself in danger
__________________________________________________
75. What can we learn from the story
__________________________________________________
(B)
根据所给材料写一篇日记
6月15日 星期天 阴
今天下午我的同学们去了动物园,他们玩的很开心,但我没去,因为我姑妈病了,正住院,我在医院照顾她.她感到比以前好多了.我祝她早日康复。
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
七、书面表达
　请根据下表的内容，以How was the ball-point pen invented 为题写一篇80词左右的短文，表格内容必须全部用上。
who John Loud, an American tanner
when in 1888
Advantages help write faster, make life easier
disadvantages need refilling, sometimes leak
where to be used many fields(领域) – writing, drawing ….
Price low (about 1-5yuan)
Changes become smaller and lighter
Notes: ball-point pen圆珠笔 tanner制革工人 refill再充填 leak 漏
How was the ball-point pen invented
____________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Unit 7 答案
Lesson 1
一、（A） 1.barber 2.scissors 3.vacuum 4.prefer 5.way
（B）1.invention 2.cutting 3.built 4.millions 5.using
二、1. A 由before可知，要用现在完成时； have been to 去过，have gone to去了，没回来。
2. B这是我理发的地方。表示地点用where。
3. A 提建议的方法之一。Why not 后接动词原形。
4. B in front of是指在物体外部的前面, in the front of是指在物体内部的前面。
5. C 理发师正在用机器理发。由题意知，应填介词。
6. B
7. B由did可知，后面应该用动词原形。
8. B被用来做某事有两种表达法;be used to do sth.和be used for doing sth.
9. A make sb. do sth.是固定用法；dust和 suck是被动的关系。
10. C prefer to do… rather than do… 宁愿干……而不愿干……。
三、（A）b f e g c
（B）1.Where 2.barber 3.cut 4.job 5.way
Lesson 2
一、1.invent 2.haircut 3.nobody 4.mess 5.suck
二、1. B后接of时，million 用复数；前有数字时，million用单数。
2. B能看出原材料用be made of；看不出原材料用be made from。
3. B比较级+and + 比较级，表示越来越。
4. C by the way顺便问一下； on the way在路上； in this way就这样。
5. C at the fall festivals 在中秋节。
6. B some times很多次； sometimes有时； sometime在某个时候。
7. A所填关系词在定语从句中作主语。
8. A next to紧挨着； besides除……之外。
9. C一般过去时的被动语态。
10. A prefer=like better更喜欢。
三、1 C be invented被发明，被动语态。
2 D not… until…直到…才…。
3 C由上下文可知，骑自行车需要较少的能量。
4 B由上下文可知，意思是指在发达国家。
5 D由上下文可知，如果骑自行车上班人们会觉得很累。
6 A小汽车的数量变得很多。
7 B骑自行车会变得比以前更危险。
8 B开汽车，in one’s car或by car。
9 C perhaps或许。
10 A it 作形式宾语代替真宾语to不定式。
四、1.were added 2.were sold 3.took 4.them 5.went
Lesson 3
一、1.favourite 2.inventor 3.held 4.camera 5.clever
二、1. B 含有情态动词的被动语态结构：情态动词+be+及物动词的过去分词。
2. C表示生产地，用be made in。
3. B prefer sth. to sth.比起……更喜欢……。
4. B它很快就会被送到这儿来。一般将来时的被动语态。
5. B 日常用语。应该用被动语态。
6. A一般过去时的被动语态。
7. C be made to do sth.被使得干某事。
8. B make sb. do sth. 使得某人干某事；cool是形容词，前面加look。Look like后接名词。
9. B由题意知，应该用一般过去时的被动语态。
10. B
三、1．C.为了引出话题人物━━达 芬奇，这里引用了设问手法，问题应表示“是谁画了世界上最著名的画”，故选择动词painted。
2．B.对人体比较了解的莫过于医生了，将达 芬奇与医生相比才能显示其对人体的精通。故选择doctors。
3．A.介词to常表示一一对应的关系，“问题的答案”习惯表达为an answer to a question。
4．D.达 芬奇应是世人所知道的天才中最伟大的人，the world 一般指每个人，相当于第三人称单数，故people为正确选项。
5．D. draw和paint不合文意, work为不及物动词，不能直接接宾语。在那个时代，达 芬奇所不能做的应是制造飞机，故选择build。
6．B.这一句起承上启下的作用，意为“达 芬奇不仅仅是一名发明家”，故选择 wasn’t just。
7．C. less和no不合文章，very不能用来修饰比较级，而even常用来修饰比较级，意为“甚至更……”，故为正确选项。
8．A.为了使自己的画达到最高境界，应在画这幅画之前去尝试不同的画法，所以应选before。
9．B.达 芬奇的画今天依然保存在世，为本文作者以及读者所共享，所以应选us。
10．C. 达 芬奇的名作━━Mona Lisa以画中人物面部神秘的微笑而名扬天下，故选smiling。
四、(A) 1 B由第一段第二句可知。
2 C由第一段最后一句可知。
3 A由第二段第三句可知。
4 C由第三段第一句可知。
5 B由第三段最后一句可知。
(B) 1 D由第一段可以看出。
2 C由第一段最后一句可知。
3 A由第一段第三句和第二段第一句可知。
4 A由第一段第四句可知。
5 B earth 土的意思，一词多义。
Lesson 4
一、1. blow 2. problem 3.Japanese 4. special 5.pull
二、1. A in a new way 用一种新方法。
2. A由每四年举行一次可知，应该用一般现在时的被动语态。
3. B这项发明是在1980年被发明家发明的。
4. B动词不定式作后置定语。
5. C 他送给我一张五年前拍摄的照片。照片和拍摄是一般过去时的被动关系。
6. B机器和卖是被动的关系。Sell的过去分词是sold。
7. A如果你有任何问题请举手。Any任何的意思。
8. A如果不能推开门，你可以拉。Pull拉的意思。
9. C动名词作伴随状态。
10. B because of 由于，因为。
三、1.was told 2.should be planted 3.was made to work 4. was heard to play 5.are grown
四、1. Real invitations or not 2. enjoy entertainment/enjoy entertaining at home
3. I’d love/like to 4. that would be great/nice 5. friendly/polite 6. time and date
单元测试
一、1. C用剪子理发。
2. B be made by 后接动作的发出者。
3. C由题意知，他紧挨着门站着。
4. A prefer sth. to sth.比起……更喜欢……。
5. B后接of时，million 用复数；前有数字时，million用单数。
6. A由题意知，是指10分钟之前。Ago一般用在过去时； before一般用在现在完成时。
7. B很多木头被用来做家具。Wood是不可数名词。
8. C很多特殊的零件被添加到一台普通洗衣机上。Add to添加。
9. C sell out 卖完，卖光。
10. C歌曲和唱是被动的关系。sing的过去分词是sung。
11. B动词的 -ing 形式作定语，相当于一个形容词。
12. B be made of 是由……材料制成的。能看出原材料用be made of；看不出原材料用be made from。
13. A由题意知，第一个空应该用一般过去时的被动语态。Be used for doing sth. 被用来做某事。
14. B由题意知，是问你曾经去过上海吗。Have been to曾经去过； have gone to去了，没回来。
15. A here, there是地点副词，前面不能加介词。
16. C修饰动词要用副词。
17. B be made to do sth.被使得去做某事； help sb. (to)do sth.帮助某人干某事。
18. C此题考查单词拼写。Inventor发明家。
19. C
20. B beautiful的比较级要在前面加more。
二、21. A. one of 后要用可数名词的复数形式，根据文章意思，可知答案是A。
22.D.要表达第几个世纪，应该用“序数词＋century”，而根据常识，计算机是二十世纪的产物，A项“二十一世纪”与实际不符合。
23.B.固定搭配not only…but (also)… 意思是“不但……而且……”。所以答案是B。
24. A. in many ways为一固定用法，表示“在许多方面”。
25.D.根据文章大意，可知答案是D，表示“给人们带来财富和快乐”。
26.C.因为Enid是名字，故用called。
27.C.根据常识可知老式计算机庞大而笨重，故填large。
28.D.该句句意为“自它诞生之日起，它的发展就非常迅速”，since在意思和时态上与主句呼应，为正确选项。
29.C.动词短语go through表示“经历……”。
30. D.
三、(A)31 C由第一段第三行可知。
32 D由第二段第五行可知。
33 D由第一段第一句和第三段第五句可知。
34 A由第三段第三句可知。
35 B由第三段第三行可知。
(B)36 C由第二段可知。
37 A由第四段最后一句可知。
38 A由第五段可知。
39 B由最后一段可知。
40 B由第三段可知。
(C)41 D由第一个广告可知。
42 A由第三个广告可知。
43 C由第四个广告可知。
44 A由第二个广告可知。
45 C通读四个广告可知。
(D)46 B由第一行可知。
47 C由第四行可知。
48 A由第五行可知。
49 D由第九行可知。
50 B由第十行可知。
四、(A) 51.to play 52. It 53. making 54.even 55.be put
(B) 56 Millions 57 over 7000 58 by hand 59 一些人几乎只吃大米 60 Animal feed and rice oil are made from it
五、(A) 61-65ABGFC
(B) 66. Shall we plant trees tomorrow/What about planting trees tomorrow
?? 67.Why/How do you know
?? 68. What a pity
?? 69. Where is your home/How can I get your home
?? 70. See you tomorrow
六、(A) 71. Because he was weak.72. Because Tom looked ugly.73. He learned to kick stones.
74. On his way back from the village.75. We can’t judge a man by his looks.
(B) June 5th Sunday Cloudy
All my classmates went to the zoo this afternoon. They had a good time there. But I didn’t go with them, because my aunt was ill and she was in hospital. I went to look after her. She felt much better than before. I hope she will get well soon.
七、(略)
go sell they take add
put make play even it期末测试题
一、单项选择(20分)
1.—You look _______ . What’s wrong
—I lost my wallet just now.
A. be worried B. worry C. worried
2. _______ Li Lei, I finished my work on time.
A. Thanks B. Thank you C. Thanks to
3. At the beginning of learning English, I had a lot of trouble _______ with other people in it.
A. communicate B. to communicate C. communicating
4. The food in the restaurant _______ delicious and the music sounds _______.
A. look, beautifully B. smells, beautiful C. tastes, is beautiful
5. There is _______ salt in the dish, it tastes _______ salty.
A. so many, too B. too much, much too C. too many, many too
6. My son is only four years old, so it is hard _______ him _______ dress himself every morning.
A. for, to B. to, for C. to, to
7. I really _______ people who can keep on doing things until they _______.
A. think, success B. respect, successful C. admire, succeed
8. The weather in summer in Harbin is _______ than that in Guangzhou.
A. more cooler B. much cool C. much cooler
9. This book sells well, more than 1,000 copies _______ yesterday.
A. sold B. are sold C. were sold
10. Do you think I get up _______ catch the early bus
A. early enough to B. enough early to C. early enough for
11. My mother _______ a player, her leg was broken in one game, she has given up ever since.
A. is B. use to be C. used to be
12.—We’ll do what we can _______ English well this term.
—It’s high time for you to work hard.
A. study B. to study C. be studied
13.—Have you finished your work yet
—No, not yet. I think it’ll take _______ ten minutes.
A. another B. other C. more
14.—I’m sorry to have kept you waiting long.
—Never mind. I _______ here for only a few minutes.
A. have been B. have come C. have arrived
15.—He has the ability _______ to do the work well.—I agree with you.
A. to read B. reading C. of read
16.—Will you please show me how to operate the new machine
—Sure. It’s a piece of cake. Now let me tell you _______ to do first.
A. what B. how C. whether
17.—How does she take online classes —By _______ the Internet.
A. use B. to use C. using
18.—What will you do if it _______ tomorrow
—I’ll stay at home and watch the match on TV.
A. rain B. rains C. will rain
19. Volunteers don’t get any money, for they help people _______ show love and care to the people in danger.
A. so that B. in order that C. in order to
20. These radios need repairing, _______
A. don’t they B. needn’t them C. need they
二、完形填空(10分)
It is very important to get lots of exercise. I like exercise and especially enjoy 21 very much. Last summer, I went to the beach every day. I plan to go there this summer, too, but I am not 22 to.
I have a new job. Sometimes I have to work 23 late at night. I now work more hours than I 24 before. However, I can receive a larger salary（薪水）.To tell the truth, I like the new job, but it has really taken up（占用）so much of my spare（业余的）time. I 25 doing more exercise to staying at home.
Riding a bike is a kind of good exercise. Maybe I will save enough 26 to buy a new bike. My neighbor, Mrs Wilson, has a bike that she can 27 it to me, but I would rather use my own bike. If I use 28 , I would worry about damaging（毁坏）it. It is really a good 29 to get a new bike. I think while I am riding 30 work, I will be getting exercise once more. It is easy to get to the beach by bike, too. I might be able to go swimming after all.
21.A.running22.A.will23.A.until24.A.decided to25.A.try26.A.time27.A.lend28.A.mine29.A.hope30.A.to B. boatingB. ableB. afterB. planned toB. hopeB. jobsB. borrowB. hersB. informationB. from C. swimmingC. gladC. throughC. didC. likeC. thingsC. buyC. a new oneC. ideaC. to and from D. skatingD. pleasedD. toD. got toD. preferD. moneyD. useD. the other,sD. matterD. without
三、阅读理解(20分)
(A)
阅读下面的短文，判断短文后面的句子是否符合短文内容。符合的写（A），不符合的写（B）。
It was a cold night. The taxi driver didn’t take even one passenger（乘客） all day. When he went by the railway station， he saw a young man coming out with two bags in his hands. So he drove to him and asked， “Where are you going，sir ”
“To the Red Hotel，” the young man answered. When the taxi driver heard this， he didn’t feel happy any more. The young man would give him only three dollars because the hotel was near the railway station. But suddenly， he had an idea. He took the young man through many streets of the big city.?
After a long time， they arrived at the hotel. “Here we are! You should pay me fifteen dollars， please，” the taxi driver said to the young man. “What Fifteen dollars! Do you think I’m a fool Only last week， I took a taxi from the railway station to this hotel and I only gave the driver thirteen dollars. I know how much I have to pay for the trip.”
31. The driver was not happy before he saw the young man.
32. It is very far from the railway station to the Red Hotel.
33. The young man was cheated（骗）.
34. The two taxi drivers were both honest.
35. Maybe the taxi driver got thirteen dollars at last.
(B)
判断短文后面的句子是否符合短文内容。符合的写（A），不符合的写（B）。
Pearl S．Buck(赛珍珠·巴克)was a very popular American writer of her day．She was famous for her books about China．Pearl S．Buck was awarded the Nobel Prize for Literature(诺贝尔文学奖)in l938．
The writer was born in West Virginia，America．She spent almost half of her long life in China．Her youth was spent in Jiangsu Province，China．She learned to speak Chinese before she could speak English．
Her mother had traveled widely in her youth and liked literature very much．After being educated by her mother and by a Chinese teacher，Pearl S．Buck went to school in Shanghai at the age of fifteen．She continued her education in the United States at a Woman’s College to study psychology(心理学)．After graduating in 1914，she returned to China as a teacher．In the l920s her family moved to Nanjing．There she taught English and American literature at a university．
As a writer，Buck’s book，The Good Earth，appeared in l931 and sold quite well in its first Year．It has been translated into over thirty languages．In l938 she became the third American to win the Nobel Prize for Literature．By the time of her death，Pearl had published(出版)more than seventy books．Pearl S．Buck died in March，1973，just two months before her 81st birthday．
36．Before she went to school in Shanghai，Pearl S．Buck studied all by herself．
37．Pearl S．Buck was known to many people for her books about China．
38．In l914，Pearl S．Buck worked as a literature teacher at a university in Nanjing．
39．Pearl S．Buck went to study literature at a Woman’s College in America．
40．Pearl S．Buck won the Nobel Prize for Literature in l938 and published over seventy books in her life．
(C)
We moved to a new area when our son was in Grade Five．Before we moved，we took him to spend half a day at his new school．There he saw his new classmates and teachers．He enjoyed the visit．During the almost l50-kilometer drive home，he told us that he had told some of the students the date when we would move there．And he had also invited them to visit us.
The moving day，a Saturday，was a busy day．But we arrived at our new house at noon．About an hour later，kids began to come and soon one of them invited our son to his house to play for the afternoon．By the time he returned，he knew where most of the kids lived and all of their family histories．
On Monday morning，the door bell rang just before the time he would leave for schoo1．Then it rang again and again．By the time he was ready，we had eight young boys waiting to walk to school with him on his first day．They all lived near us．I asked them if their parents had sent them．The answers surprised and pleased me，“No，we just came so that he would have people to walk with.” and “It is the right thing to do.”
The starting of lasting(持续的)friendships were formed(形成)that day．We have lived here nearly six years and the same group of kids still plays together，goes to parties on weekends together，and surfs together．
I still get thinking how welcoming and kind those kids were．And how lucky my son is to have them as friends！
41．Before the family moved to the new area，the son was taken to his new schoo1 ______．
A．to invite the teachers to visit them B．to play with his classmates
C．to see if the school was far D．to get to know it
42．What did the son know about other kids after they played for the afternoon
A．Their living places and family histories．
B．Their family stories and their life．
C．Their school life and family histories．
D．Their living places and family members．
43．In the story，the son went to school ________ on his first day.
A．in his father’s car B．on a school bus
C．on foot with other kids D．in another kid’s car
44．Which of the following is Right according to the story
A．The family moved to the new house on Saturday afternoon．
B．The kids visited the house before the family arrived．
C．The son knew the kids well before he got there．
D．The son was invited to play in a kid’s house later that afternoon．
45．The passage shows us that ___________．
A．it’s easy to move to a new place
B．it’s kind of people to help a new comer
C．it’s difficult to make new friends
D．it’s better to live in the same place
(D)
My parents taught me not to waste food. My mom always found ways to make leftovers (剩余食物) taste good. I went to Ilan to learn about some of their special foods. As I was there, I learned about the food and the history of the area. I learned that they don’t waste food, either, and they use leftovers!
Many years ago, there was not enough food for everyone. People learned to cook and eat almost everything. They had to think of ways to make special dishes. One of these dishes is kao zha. It’s made with leftovers like meat, soup, oil and fat. That might not sound very good, but it does taste good. Today, kao zha is a special dish at big banquets (宴会).
Another famous dish is called zao bing. It’s made with fruit, meat and other things. I really liked it! But I didn’t want to eat too much. It has a lot of fat in it.
I smelled something burning and I saw smoke, so I found another special food of the Ilan area─duck meat. The duck meat is put in a big oven (炉子) to cook it. Smoke keeps the meat fresh. I don’t usually eat meat, but this duck meat was delicious! It tasted sweet.
Ilan is a great place with delicious food. I hope I can come back again!
46. The writer learns from her parents __________.
A. not to eat leftovers B. to eat good food C. not to waste food D. to make good food
47. She finds that people in Ilan __________.
A. always waste food B. don’t use leftovers
C. don’t have enough food D. can cook special food
48. Kao zha is a good dish that is made with __________.
A. fruit, meat and other things B. fresh and sweet duck meat
C. some different leftovers D. meat, soup and fruit
49. There are __________ kinds of special foods mentioned in the passage.
A. two B. three C. four D. five
50. From the passage, we know that __________.
A. there was not enough food in Ilan long ago
B. leftovers can’t be used to cook delicious food
C. zao bing is a famous dish without any fat in it
D. the writer is interested in very big banquets
四、任务型阅读(10分)
(A)
at, change, before, happen, part
Life is not easy, so I’d like to say “When anything (51) , believe in yourself!” When I was a young boy, I was too shy to speak to anyone. My classmates often laughed (52) me. I was sad but could do nothing. Later, something happened, and it (53) my life. It was an English speech contest(比赛). My mother asked me to take (54) in it. What a terrible idea! It meant I had to speak (55) all the teachers and students of my school!
(B)
阅读短文,按要求完成短文后的各项任务。
Have you watched the dance Guanyin of 1,000 Hands during the CCTV Spring Festival Evening If you have, you must have enjoyed it. It is very beautiful. The dance was performed by 20 disabled girls. They cannot hear or speak, but they can dance! They use their bodies and hearts to dance.
Here is something about the lead dancer, Tai Lihua. She is 28 and from Yichang, Hubei Province. (1)在她两岁的时候，因为一次生病而失聪了。His father took her to many doctors, but nothing worked. At the age of seven, she went to a school for the deaf and dumb(聋哑人). In the school, she was good at her schools. (2)Her teacher said she used her mind more than the other students and enjoyed expressing her feelings through dance. She also began to love dance. She thought she could use dance to express what she thought about life.
When she was 15 years old, she began to learn to dance. At first, she couldn’t dance well. But she worked harder than the ___(3)___. She also spent more time learning. Her efforts ___(3)___ her a very good dancer. She has been to many countries to perform and many foreigners like her dancing. She now lives a happy life with her family.
56. 将(1)句译成英文。____________________________________________________________
57. 将(2)句译成中文。____________________________________________________________
58. 在(3)句的空白处填入适当的词使句意完整、上下文通顺
____________ _____________
59. 写出与此句意思相近的句子.
She saw many doctors, but she didn’t get well at all.
__________________________________________________________________
60. 找出最能表达该短文主题的句子：
_____________________________________________________________________
五、交际运用(10分)
(A)
从对话后的选项中选择适当的选项补全对话,并将其正确答案写在题后的方框内。
Bob: Hi, Bob, this term is over.
Lisa: Yeah! _______61______
Bob: Me, too. But we’re supposed to have P.E. to stay healthy.
Lisa: Yeah, you’re right. ______62 _____
Bob: Of course! He always understands us when we have a problem. I want to be a teacher like him in the future. _____63_____.
Lisa: I want to be a reporter.
Bob: ______64______
Lisa: Because I like meeting and talking with different people.
Bob: _______65_______
Lisa: I hope so!
Do you like our P.E. teacher Mr. Li I’m so happy that I don’t have to have P.E. any more!What about you D. Why do you want to be a reporter Being a reporter is very interesting. F. Do you know our P.E. teacher Mr. Li I think our dreams will come true.
61. ___________ 62. ___________ 63. ___________ 64. ___________ 65. ___________
(B)
根据对话内容和所给的首字母, 在每个空缺处填入一个适当的词,使整段对话意思完整。 (每空限填一词)
A: Hi, Tim! Who is your b 66 friend
B: My best friend is Lana.
C: What do you like a 67 her
B: Well, she is a good listener, and she can k 68 secrets- that’s important to me.
C: Is she a lot like you
B: Some people say that we l 69 the same. We’re both tall, and we both have a long curly hair. But Lana is m 70 quieter than me, and she is also smarter. I’m more outgoing.
66. 67. 68. 69. 70.
六、阅读表达(10分)
(A)
There was a blind girl who hated herself because she couldn't see anything．She disliked everyone，except her loving boyfriend．He was always there for her．She told her boyfriend，“If I could see the world，I will marry you．”
One day someone donated a pair of eyes to her．When the bandages（绷带）came off，she was able to see everything，including her boyfriend．
He asked her，“Since you can see the world，will you marry me ” The girl looked at her boyfriend and saw that he was blind．The sight of his closed eyelids shocked her．She hadn't expected that．When she thought she would live with the blind boy all her life，she refused him．The girl would not like to marry him at all．
Her boyfriend left in tears，and days later he sent her a note，saying，“Take good care of your eyes，my dear，for before they were yours，they were mine．”
We should not forget those people who once helped us when we are in trouble．If not，we could not live a peaceful life．Without them，life will be meaningless．
阅读短文，完成下面句子，每空一词。
71．Except her boyfriend，the girl loved __________ else when she was blind．
72．After an eye __________，the girl could see everything，including her boyfriend．
73．Finally，the boy was __________ because he donated his eyes to his girlfriend．
74．The girl __________ to marry the boy in the end．
75．In our life，we should __________ those people who once helped us when we are in trouble．
(B)
假如你是三明麒麟山公园风景区的管理人员，请你用英语为游客订出一些参观须知，内容包括：环境卫生保护、森林防火安全、乱涂乱刻(crave)、树木保护、人身安全等，至少5句。
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
七、书面表达(20分)
六月六日是“全国爱眼日”。为此，某中学生英文报拟组织一次征文活动。请你结合生活实际写一篇题目为《如何保护眼睛》的征文稿，内容要点包括：
1、眼睛的重要性；
2、保护眼睛的措施：
（1）不要长时间看书报；
（2）不要在太强或者太弱的光线下看书；
（3）坚持做眼保健操；
……
注 意：词数：80～100；不要逐条翻译，可适当发挥。
How to Protect Our Eyes
_____________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
期末测试题答案
一、1. C look是系动词，后接形容词作表语。
2. C Thanks to幸亏，由于。
3. C have trouble doing sth.做某事有麻烦。
4. B由题意知，饭店的食物尝起来可口，音乐听起来优美。
5. B too much太多，修饰不可数名词； too many太多，修饰可数名词；much too太，修饰形容词。
6. A It’s hard for sb. to do sth.对某人来说做某事很难。
7. C until后接句子，所以第二空要用动词。
8. C比较级不能用来more修饰，可以用much。
9. C由题意知，应用一般过去时的被动语态。
10. A adj.+ enough +to do sth.做…… 足够……。
11. C我的妈妈过去曾是一名运动员。Used to do sth.过去常常做某事。
12. B用动词不定式表示做某事的目的。
13. A另外10分钟有两种表达法：ten more minutes 和another ten minutes。
14. A有一段时间出现时，动词要用延续性动词。
15. A have the ability to do sth.有能力做某事。
16. A现在让我告诉你先做什么。句中缺少逻辑宾语，所以填what。
17. C by +doing通过做某事，表示方式方法。
18. B在if引导的条件状语从句中，用一般现在时代替将来。
19. C so that为了，后接句子； in order that为了，后接句子； in order to为了，后接动词原形。
20. A反义疑问句的变化规则：前肯，后否；前否，后肯。所选代词必须是主格的人称代词。
二、21 C由下文可知。
22 B be not able to不能做某事。
23 A until 直到……为止。
24 C比以前多干几个小时的活，用一般过去时。
25 D prefer doing to doing比起……更愿意……。
26 D由buy看出，是攒足够的钱。
27 A lend it to me把它借给我。
28 B由上下文可知。
29 C买辆自行车是个好主意。
30 A ride to work骑车去上学。
三、 (A) 31 A由第二段第二行可知。
32 B由第二段第三行可知。
33 A由第二段第二行和第三段可知。
34 B由第二段第二行和第三段可知。
35 A 由上下文可以猜出。
(B) 36 B由第三段第二句可知。
37 A由第一段第二句可知。
38 B由第三段第五句可知。
39 B由第三段第四行可知。
40 A由第四段第三、四行可知。
(C) 41 D由第一段第二行可猜出。
42 A由第二段最后一句可知。
43 C由第三段第三、五行可知。
44 D由第二段第二行可知。
45 B由文章最后一句可知。
(D) 46.C由第一段第一句可知。
47.D由第一段可知。
48.C由第二段第三行可知。
49. B kao zha， zao bing， duck meat。
50. A由第二段第一句可知。
四、 (A) 51. happens 52. at 53. changed 54. part 55. before
(B) 56. When she was two years old, she lost her hearing because of being ill.
57. 她的老师说她比其他同学会动脑并喜欢通过舞蹈来表达她的情感。
58. others, made
59. His father took her to many doctors, but nothing worked.
60. Here is something about the lead dancer, Tai Lihua.
五、 (A) 61—65：BACDG (B) 66.best 67.about 68.keep 69.look 70.much
六、 (A) 71．nobody 72．operation 73．blind/sad/unhappy/disabled 74．refused 75．remember/thank
(B) Notice to the Tourists
1. Please keep the place clean and tidy.
2. Don’t throw rubbish onto the ground.
3. No smoking is allowed.
4. Don’t use fire on the mountains.
5. Don’t cut down the trees
6. Don’t crave on the trees.
7. Please be careful when you climb up and down the mountains.
七、One possible version：
How to Protect Our Eyes
Eye is the window of our mind. We use our eyes to see everything around us. Without eyes, nothing is left beside you but darkness.
How to protect our eyes It’s not right to keep your eyes working for a long time. You’d better not read in a strong or poor light. Don’t read in bed or on a moving bus. Remember to keep your books away from your eyes for about a foot and do eye-exercises every day. What’s more, a balanced diet is necessary.
Follow my advice and form a good habit. It’s time to say goodbye to thick glasses.Unit 2
单元词汇导学
1.look through her glasses透过她的眼镜看 2.thousands of different things数千个不同的事情3. be different from 不同于 4.as smart as和……一样灵敏
5.taste like bitter medicine尝起来像苦药 6.some…others… 一些……另一些……
7.find out发现，找到 8.a fifth taste另一种口味
9.at the same time同时 10．the same …as…和……一样
11.talk to sb. on the phone和某人打电话 12.too much太多
13.start with以……开始 14.take turns doing sth.轮流干某事
15.speak up大声说
Lesson 1
学习点拨
本课重点交际用语：当你接到别人来电话时，或者你听不清楚别人说话时，可用以下用语：
1. Speaking.
2. Sorry, I can’t hear you.
3. Could you speak up
名师授课
1.I am _____ a song.
A. hear B. listen C. listen to
解析 选C。listen, hear, sound 都表示“听”。Listen 是“倾听”，强调听的动作，为不及物动词，后接宾语时需接“to”；hear 是“听到”，强调听得结果；sound是“听起来”，为系动词，后跟表语。
2.My cat _____ soft.
A. feels B. looks C. feels like
解析 选A。feel和look都是感官动词，后面跟形容词。feel是“感觉”的意思，而look是“看起来……”。Feel like后面接名词。
课后作业
一、词汇
根据首字母及所给题意，填入恰当的词语
1. How does your ice cream t_________
2. Don’t be afraid. You may p______ the dog.
3. The b_________ looks beautiful.
4. Those flowers s________ good.
5. The child l_______ the spoon clean.
二、单项选择
1.—How does your cat feel
—It ________ soft.
A. is felt B. feel C. feels
2. Because of looking after three children, the father ______ older.
A. looks B. looks at C. looks like
3. —What about playing basketball this afternoon
—Your idea ______ very great.
A. sounds B. hears C. sounds like
4. —_______ does this piece of cake taste
—Wonderful.
A. How about B. How C. What
5. This piece of music written by Mozart sounds _______, and it makes me _____ myself in it.
A. beautiful, lost B. beautifully, lose C. beautiful, lose
6. —What is Liu Chang doing outside
—She is looking ______ at a butterfly. It _______ beautiful.
A. happy, looks B. happily, looks C. happy, looks like
7. —Is Susan ______ my new cat, Mike
—No, she _______ a flower.
A. petting, is smell B. petting, sells C. petting, is smelling
8. —Susan, how does the song ________
—Very sweet.
A. hear B. sound C. listen
9. —Is that Mike speaking
—Sorry, I can’t hear you. Could you speak ________
A. more loudly B. much loud C. more up
10.—Who has trouble _______ on the phone
—Tim. I think the line is not good.
A. hear B. hearing C. to hear
三、交际运用
根据对话内容，用适当的句子补全对话，使对话意思完整，每空一句。
(A)
A：Hello，may I speak to Bruce，please
B：( 1) ．I’ll see if he is in．
(A few minutes later)
C：Hello! Bruce here．
A：Hello, Bruce! This is Bill speaking．It’s Sunday tomorrow． What are you going to do
C：( 2) ．Do you have any ideas
A: I hear many old inventions will be shown in the science museum tomorrow． ( 3)
C：Good idea．( 4)
A：Let’s meet outside the school gate at half past eight in the morning．
C：How shall we go there
A：(5) ．
C：Sorry，my bike is broken．Let’s go by bus，OK
A：All right．See you!
C：（6） ．
(B)
Mr Brown: Hello! Could I speak to the headmaster, please
Teacher: 　(1)　 I'm sorry he isn't here right now. May I help you
Mr Brown: 　(2)　 But I want to speak to him about my son, Mike Brown. We are going to Hainan Island on Friday. I hope to see him as soon as possible. Teacher: Are you free later today, Mr Brown
Mr Brown: 　(3)　
Teacher: Can you come tomorrow
Mr Brown: 　(4 ) 　 What time
Teacher: Between 8:30 and 9:30.
Mr Brown: Yes, that would be fine.
Teacher: 　(5) 　
Mr Brown: Many thanks. Goodbye.
　　A. I'll leave a message on his desk. B.I think so. C. Hold on for a moment, please. D. Have a good time, please. E. That's very kind of you. F. Yes, I'm free today. G. Sorry, I'm free every day except today.
Lesson 2
学习点拨
1.look more closely 更仔细地看 2.grow in the ground 长在地里
3.look through her glasses透过她的眼镜看 4.one thousand students 一千名学生
5.have/take some medicine吃药 6.blue running shoes 蓝色跑鞋
7.do the same thing做同样的事 8. be different from 不同于
9.thousands of different things数千个不同的事情 10.as smart as和……一样灵敏
11.taste like bitter medicine尝起来像苦药 12.some…others… 一些……另一些……
13.find out发现，找到 14.a fifth taste另一种口味 15.at the same time同时
名师授课
1. Most people can smell _______ different things.
A. thousand of B. two thousands C. thousands of
解析 选C。表示具体几千时，thousand用单数形式，前面加数字；表示不确定数目时，用thousands of，前面不能加数字。
2. However, scientists recently found out about _____ taste.
A. the fifth B. a fifth C. five
解析 选B。序数词前加不定冠词，不表示顺序，而表示“另外一个”的意思。
3. _____ do flowers smell
A. What B. How C. Which
解析 选B。 “smell”是感官动词，后面应接形容词，所以用“how”。
课后作业
一、词汇
根据英文及所给题意，填入恰当的词语
1.Orange candy has a different _______ (the taste and smell of food)
2.He touches a _________ ,it feels soft.(sth. that you put under your head when you are in bed)
3.Can you _________ the bag you lost (to say sb./sth. is like, or what happened)
4.—Would you like a cup of coffee
—________ coffee, please (having a sharp, unpleasant taste; not sweet)
5.He said that he was sorry but I don’t think he __________ meant it.(actually, in fact)
二、单项选择
1.—Pizza is ready now and it ________ nice. Would you like some
—Oh, delicious. You did quite well this time.
A. feels B. touches C. smells
2.—Oh, the milk _________ strange. Do you think it’s OK to dink
—No, no. It must be bad. The milk is easy to ________ bad on hot days.
A. is tasted, grow B. tastes, get C. is tasting, turn
3. I often hear Hen ________ in the nest room. His singing sounds ________,and I like it very much.
A. sings, beautiful B. singing, beautifully C. sing, beautiful
4.—Do you see that —Sorry, I can’t. Look ________ ,you can see a small bug.
A. close B. closer C. closely
5.—The old man is looking ________ her glasses, isn’t he —yes, he is.
A. through B. across C. in
6.—How many students are there in your school
—There are ________ students in our school.
A. thousand B. thousands C. thousands of
7.—When you smell a rose, does it smell ________ other flowers
—Yes! Our noses are very smart.
A. different in B. different from C. differently from
8.—Scientists recently _________ about a fifth taste. Is the fifth taste hard to describe —Yes. It’s the taste in meat. A food ________ cheese has this taste.
A. found, likes B. looked for, like C. found out, like
9. We wanted to see a movie. ________ ,the movie theater was closed.
A. However B. But C. While
10.Aperson’s mouth is not _________ his nose.
A. smart as B. as much as C. as smart as
三．完型填空：
Mr Harris lived in a small house by himself. He was always 1 about what he ate and drank, and he never 2 when the weather was cold. He was always afraid that he was getting terribly ill, 3 he often went to his doctor, and the doctor was getting very 4 of him, because he had more other work 5 .
Then one day Mr Harries hurried 6 the doctor’s office and told him he was sure he had a terrible illness, which he had 7 about in the newspaper. He showed the doctor the 8 . The doctor read it 9 and then said, “But, Mr Harris, people don’t know when they have this illness! And they feel just well. ”
“Oh, my goodness, ”said Mr Harris. “I thought so. That’s just 10 I feel! ”
（ ）1. A. careful B. worried C. worry D. care
（ ）2. A. went by B. go by C. goes out D. went out
（ ）3. A. because B. and C. so D. though
（ ）4. A. enjoying B. enjoy C. tired D. tiring
（ ）5. A. to do B. do C. doing D. did
（ ）6. A. into B. from C. out of D. at
（ ）7. A. see B. read C. look D. write
（ ）8. A. photo B. book C. article D. informations
（ ）9. A. careful B. carefully C. doubtful D. quick
（ ）10. A. what B. all C. the same D. how
四、根据短文意思，用方框中所给词语的适当形式填空，使文章通顺、完整(其中有两个多余选项)。
at, hard, change, up, before, win, happen, down, choose, practise, come, part
Life is not easy, so I’d like to say “When anything (1) , believe in yourself!” When I was a young boy, I was too shy to speak to anyone. My classmates often laughed (2) me. I was sad but could do nothing. Later, something happened, and it (3) my life. It was an English speech contest(比赛). My mother asked me to take (4) in it. What a terrible idea! It meant I had to speak (5) all the teachers and students of my school!
“Come on, boy. Believe in yourself! You are sure to (6) .” Then mother and I talked about many different topics. At last I (7) the topic “Believe in yourself”. I tried my best to remember all the speech and (8) it over 100 times. With my mother’s great love, I did well in the contest. I could (9)______ believe my ears when the news came that I had won the first place. I heard the cheers from the teachers and students. Those classmates who once looked (10) on me, now all said congratulations to me.
Lesson 3
学习点拨
感官动词
表示说话人所感知的主语的特征或状态的系动词被称为感官动词；不能独立做谓语，必须和表语一起构成谓语。如：look, feel, sound, taste, smell 等，后接分词，形容词等作表语。用法如下：
一、see, hear, feel, watch, look,这五个动词均可作连系动词，后面接形容词作表语，说明主语所处的状态。其意思分别为"看/听/闻/尝/摸起来……"。除look之外，其它几个动词的主语往往是物，而不是人。例如： hese flowers smell very sweet.这些花闻起来很香。
二、这些动词后面也可接介词like短语，like后面常用名词。
例如： Her idea sounds like fun.她的主意听起来很有趣。
三、这五个感官动词也可作实义动词,除look(当"看起来……"讲时)只能作不及物动词外,其余四个既可作及物动词也可作不及物动词,此时作为实义动词讲时其主语一般为人。
例如: She smelt the meat.她闻了闻那块肉。
四、taste, smell作不及物动词时,可用于"taste / smell + of +名词"结构,意为"有……味道/气味"。
例如: The air in the room smells of earth.房间里的空气有股泥土味。
五、它们(sound除外)可以直接作名词,与have或take构成短语。
例如: May I have a taste of the mooncakes 我可以尝一口这月饼吗？
六、其中look, sound, feel还能构成"look / sound / feel + as if +从句"结构，意为"看起来/听起来/感觉好像……"。例如： It looks as if our class is going to win.看来我们班好像要获胜了.
注意：系动词不用进行时，也无被动式。
名师授课
1.I was nervous ______my first day.
A. in B. on C. at
解析 选B。指具体某一天时，用介词 “on”。
2._____ does your porridge taste
A. What B. How C. Which
解析 选B。taste 是感官动词，后面接形容词。
课后作业
一、词汇
根据英文及所给题意，填入恰当的词语
1. We didn’t like the ______ of the music show. (big noise)
2. I talked to him on the phone. He sounded ______. (anxious or unhappy)
3. Look _____. What color are her socks (carefully, well)
4. It’s a great day for a _____ . (a meal that you eat outdoors)
5. The police asked us not to ______ anything. (to put your hand or fingers onto sb./sth.)
二、单项选择
1.—I don’t like rock music at all.
—Me neither. I think many people don’t like the _____ of this kind of music.
A. loud B. loudest C. loudness
2.—May I help you Do you like strawberries or apples
—Strawberries tastes different ______ apples, I like both of them.
A. in B. to C. from
3. The beef tastes _____. How do you cook it Do you have a secret method Tell me, quickly!
A. well B. good C. fine
4.—________! What can you ______
—Nothing, why
A. Listening, hear B. Listen, hear C. Listen, listen
5. I like the shoes. They_____ pretty. Can I _____
A. look, try on them B. see, try them out C. look, try them on
6. Don’t _____ the machine. It may ____ you.
A. touch, hurt B. touching, hurt C. touch, be hurt
7.—What are you doing, John
—My mom made some cookies. I’m _____ one.
A. tasting B. taste C. smelling
8. Look! Tom is _____ a book _____ the big tree.
A. seeing, in B. reading, under C. looking, on
9. The silk _____ soft. It must be made in China.
A. feels B. touches C. looks
10.—Is her bag the same color ____ her sweater
—No. The color of her bag is different from ____ of her sweater.
A. as, it B. to, one C. as, that
三、完形填空
Can you make a telephone call Of course you can make it __`1__ Chinese. But the __2__in English is quite different __3__ the one in Chinese. If you want to ask somebody to answer the telephone, you can not say, “Please __4__Mr… to answer the telephone.”__5__, you must say, “May I __6__to Mr… ” If you want to ask who is answering the telephone, you should say, “Who is __7__ ” or “Is that Mr… __8__ ”, instead of “Who are you ” If you want to tell the__9__one who you are, you should say, “ __10__ … (speaking)” instead of “I’m…”.
1. A. on B .in C. for D. with
2. A. call B. telegraph C. TV D. radio
3. A. to B. from C. with D. in
4. A. ask B. say C. speak D. talk
5. A. But B. Instead C. While D. Yet
6. A. talk B. speak C. say D. tell
7. A. this B. it C. that D. one
8. A. talking B. speaking C. saying D. telling
9. A. another B. others C. other D. else
10. A. It is B. I an C. That is D. This is
四、阅读理解
(A)
How young can a teacher be A teacher can be any age .Just ask Chrissie Mckenney .She was only 10 when she started teaching.
How did Chrissie get the job It was not easy. Chrissie wanted to help children who cannot hear .But the school had never had such a young helper. Could Chrissie do it
First, Chrissie learned to sign. Signing is a way of talking with your hands .Soon it was easy for Chrissie to talk to the children. So the school let her help. Now Chrissie visits the school almost every day. The children love their young teacher. She is their friend.
1. Chrissie wanted to help children who can't __________.
A. hear B. see C. play
2. This story tells about a __________.
A .special class B .young teacher C. silly person
3. In the third part of the story, what does the word “learned” mean __________
A. forget B .found out how C .stooped
4. The school let Chrissie help because she__________.
A. was too old B. could sigh C. could not hear
5. You can guess from the story that most teachers__________ Chrissie.
A. are older than B. do not like C. are just like
(B)
The earth moves round the sun, and the moon moves round the earth. When our part of the earth turns to the moon, it is night.
The sun is much bigger than the moon. But sometimes the moon looks bigger than the sun, because it’s much nearer to the earth.
The sun is very bright. It gives a very strong light. The moon looks quite bright, too.
But it doesn’t give any light at all.
The moon looks much bigger and brighter than the stars. But actually the stars are much bigger and brighter than the moon. They look smaller than the moon because they’re much farther away from us.
1. ____moves round________.
A. The earth; the moon B. The moon; the earth
C. The moon; the stars D. The sun; the earth
2. Sometimes the moon looks bigger than the sun, because_________.
A. it is much bigger than the sun
B. it comes out only at night
C. it is much nearer to the earth than the sun
D. it doesn’t give a strong light
3. The sun_______________.
A. is very bright, and it gives a very strong light
B. isn’t bright, but it gives a very strong light
C. is very big, but it doesn’t give any light at all
D. is very round, but it can’t move round
4. The stars______________.
A. look much bigger than the moon
B. look much bigger than the sun
C. are a lot brighter than the moon, but they are not bigger than the moon
D. are much farther away from us than the moon
Lesson 4
学习点拨
关于打电话的英语词汇
area code 区域号码 coin call 投币电话 conference call 会议电话 credit card call 信用卡电话
direct dial call 直拨电话exchange number 交换台号码 emergency call 急救电话 person-to-person call 叫人电话 public telephone 公用电话 long distance call 长途电话 local call 市内电话overseas call 国际电话 party line 同线电话 radio telephone 无线电话 telephone book 电话本
telephone booth 电话亭 telephone number 电话号码 telephone office电信局
名师授课
1. The CD ______.
A. isn’t work B. don’t work C. doesn’t work
解析 选C。想说某样事物坏了，用be broken或does(do) not work来表示。
2. There is ______ garlic in it.
A. too many B. much too C. too much
解析 选C。“too much”意为 “太多”，后面接不可数名词；“much too”意为 “太……”后面接形容词。 “too many”和 “too much”同义，只是 “too many”后面接可数名词。
课后作业
一、词汇
根据英文及所给题意，填入恰当的词语
1. The ground is very _____ after all that rain. (not hard or firm)
2. The doctor told the old man to take the ____ three times a day after meals. (pills, liquids)
3. ______ things are bad for our teeth. (sugar, candy)
4. I don’t know her very well, I only met her ______. (a short time ago)
5. Do you _____ that we should travel by train (to have the same opinion as sb./sth.)
二、单项选择
1.—How ____ your pizza taste
—It’s delicious.
A. was B. does C. did
2.—I’m sorry. The line is bad. Could you _____
—What Pardon What’s up
A. speak up B. speak down C. speak off
3. Please look ____ and tell the differences between the two pictures.
A. close B. closely C. closed
4.—The silk made in Hangzhou is very nice.
—You’re right. The silk there _____ soft.
A. is felt B. feel C. feels
5.—Do you want to taste the porridge made by my father
—Yes. Wow, it’s too strong. There is _____ garlic in it.
A. too many B. too much C. much too
6.—Could you describe the taste of it
—Oh, it _____ bitter medicine.
A. tastes B. tastes like C. tastes as
7.—What does the lady look like
—______.
A. She’s fine and well B. She’s really a nice lady C. She’s tall and thin
8.—Can I borrow your CD player
—I’m afraid you can’t. Mine _____.
A. is broken B. isn’t work C. doesn’t working
9.—Hello! May I speak to Mrs. Black, please？
—_______.
A. Yes, I’m Mrs. Black speaking B. Yes, who are you C. Hold on for a moment, please
10.Which stress is different from the other two
A. thousand B. describe C. however
三、句型转换
1.The ice cream tastes sweet.(对画线部分提问)
______ ______ the ice cream taste？
2.I am listening to a song. (对画线部分提问)
_____ _____ you doing now？
3.Roses grow in the ground. (对画线部分提问)
____ _____ roses grow？
4.This medicine tastes very bad.(感叹句)
______ ______ this medicine tastes!
5.Her socks are green. (对画线部分提问)
______ _____ are her socks？
四、阅读表达
Cambridge(剑桥)is one of the top universities in the world，and it’s a city as well．To the surprise of some visitors，there are no walls around the university．Classroom buildings，libraries and offices can be seen all over the city．Most of the members of the city are the students and teachers of thirty—one colleges(学院)．It got its name “Cambridge” from the river called Cam and a bridge built over it．Before the university was founded 800 years ago，Cambridge was a developing town．It developed faster because of the opening of the railway and became a city in 1 95 1．Now it has a population of more than one million．Many young students hope for the chance to study at Cambridge．Perhaps you’11 be a member of Cambridge one day．
8 6．______ 8 7．_______ 8 8．______ 89．______ 90．_______
单元测试
一、单项选择（20分）
1.—Tim, what are you doing now
—Come here and ________ ,you will see some small bugs.
A. looking closely B. look close C. look closely
2.—Yesterday I met your grandmother and said hello to her, but she didn’t respond to me.
—My grandmother is 79 years old, so you must _______ if you want to say something to her.
A. say up B. say loud C. speak up
3.—How nice your ________ shoes are! That must cost you a lot of money.
—Yes. but I think it worth every penny of it.
A. run B. running C. runny
4.—Do you know why food has different _______
—Quite easy, because they are different kinds of food. Haha…
A. flavor B. flavored C. flavors
5.—Mum, I often use my dictionary, so it is not _______ new _______ my classmates’.
—But the knowledge is not old, right I think you had better care for your book.
A. so, so B. so, as C. as, so
6.—Doctor, I have hurt my head, is it serious
—Don’t worry, you only need to ________ some medicine.
A. have B. take C.A and B
7.—How do the children learn the world
—They learn the world ________ five things: their eyes, ears, fingers, nose and mouth.
A. because of B. in C. through
8.—Doesn’t all the candy taste sweet
—I am not sure, But I am sure that ________ the candy tastes the same.
A. not all B. all not C. no all
9.—How many different things can most people smell
—About ________ things.
A. thousand of B. two thousands of C. thousands of
10.—What’s the news about
—It’s reported that scientists ________ found out a fifth taste.
A. recent B. recently C. recenty
11.—Please describe the taste of it, ok
—Ok, it ________ salt.
A. tastes B. tastes like C. taste as
12.—What is the food that ________ sour
—Lemons.
A. taste B. is tasted C. tastes
13.—I talked to him _______ . He _______ worried. Do you know what’s the matter with him
—Sorry, I don’t know either.
A. on the phone, looked B. by the phone, smelled C. by phone, sounded
14.—Why do you look so _______
—Because we are going on a trip. We all looked ________ at the teacher when he told us the good news.
A. happiness, happy B. happy, happy C. happy, happily
15.—Is that Chris speaking —Sorry, he isn’t in. He ________ abroad on business.
A. went B. goes C. has gone
16.—Is your headache getting better —No, it’s ________.
A. bad B. serious C. worse
17.—Amy, if you eat ________ chocolate, you’ll get _______ fat.
—Don’t worry, dad, I won’t eat so much chocolate next time.
A. too much, much too B. much too, much too C. too many, many too
18.—How nice the music ________
—It does. Peaceful music makes me feel ________.
A. hear, afraid B. sounds, relaxed C. listens, interesting
19.—Lin Ying, is it OK for you to go to your grandpa’s house alone
—No problem. I ________ you as soon as I ________ there.
A. call, get B. will call, get C. call, will get
20.—We don’t you like the ______ of the music. Please turn it off.
—Sorry. I will turn it at once.
A. loud B. loudly C. loudness
二、完形填空（共10分）
All living things on the earth need other living things to live with. Nothing lives 21 . Sometimes one living thing kills 22 . Each kind of life eats another kind of life 23 live, and together they form a food chain(食物链). Some food chains are simple, while others are not. But 24 food chains begin with the sun, and all food chains become 25 if one of the links disappears.
All life needs sunlight to live on. But only plants can use 26 directly(直接地). They make food from sunlight, water, air and so on. Animals can only use the sun’s energy 27 it has been changed into food by plants. Some animals feed directly on plants. Others eat smaller animals. Meat-eating animals are only 28 plants indirectly.
What about human beings We are members of many food chains. We eat wheat, rice, vegetables, fruit and so on. We also eat meat and drink milk. But 29 often break up the food chains. They kill wild animals. They also make rivers, lakes and seas dirty. When these rivers, lakes and seas are polluted, the fish in them 30 be eaten. If people eat the fish, they will get strange diseases.
Each form of life is linked to all the others. Breaking the links puts all life in danger.
21. A. alone B. lonely C. together D. happily
22. A. other B. the other C. another D. the others
23. A. for B. so that C. and D. in order to
24. A. any B. all C. some D. most
25. A. better B. broken C. stronger D. nicer
26. A. moonlight B. laser light C. sunlight D. bright light
27. A. after B. before C. until D. by the time
28. A. making B. catching C. eating D. feeding
29. A. sunlight B. animals C. plants D. people
30. A. can B. cannot C. must D. needn’t
三、阅读理解（20分）
A
Mary had some trouble in her head, so she went to see the doctor. He was a new doctor, and did not know her. So he first asked her some questions. One of the questions was, “What is your age ”
“Well...” Mary answered, “I don't quite remember, doctor, but I will try to think.” She thought for a while and then said, “Yes, I remember now, doctor. When I married, I was twenty-two years old, and my husband was thirty then. Now he is sixty, I know, and that is twice thirty. And so I am twice twenty-two. That is forty-four, isn't it ”
31. Mary went to see the doctor because _______.
A. she had a headache B. she had a fever
C. she had caught a cold D. she couldn't think well
32. At first the doctor _________.
A. asked her some questions B. examined her carefully
C. gave her some medicine D. asked her to have a rest
33. Mary got married when_______.
A. she was twenty years old
B. she was thirty years old
C. she was twenty-two years old
D. she was forty-four years old
34. Mary ________.
A. answered the doctor's questioned at once
B. answered the question after thinking for a while
C. just kept silent
D. refused to tell her age
35. Mary should be _______.
A. forty-four B. forty-five C. fifty D. fifty-two
B
Early to bed, early to rise, makes a man healthy, wealthy and wise.
This is an old English saying. Have you heard of it before It means that we must go to bed early and get up early in the morning. Then we shall be healthy. We shall also be rich (wealthy) and clever (wise).
This is true. The body must have enough sleep to be healthy. Children of young age should have ten hours’ sleep every night. Children who do not have enough sleep cannot do their work very well. They will not be wise and they may not become wealthy!
The body also needs exercise. Walking, running, jumping, swimming and playing games are all exercise. Exercise keeps the body strong. Exercise also helps the blood(血液) to move around inside the body. This is very important. Our blood takes food to all parts of our body. The head also needs blood. Exercise helps us to think better!
36. If we get up early and go to bed early, we’ll _________.
A. have enough exercise B. be healthy
C. think better D. have strong blood
37. If a child doesn’t have 10 hours’ sleep, maybe he _________.
A. becomes wise B. won’t do well in his work
C. goes to school in time D. has enough sleep
38. A person needs exercise because _________.
A. it makes him healthy B. he has a lot of homework to do
C. he is strong enough D. he does exercise
39. Exercise makes the _________ move quickly and smoothly(流畅).
A. body B. blood C. children D. head
40. Which of the following is NOT TRUE
A. Exercise does good to a person’s head.
B. A student should have 10 hours’ sleep.
C. It’s good for you to get up early and go to bed early.
D. If you have enough blood, you’ll be wise.
C
American children have exciting after-school life, a new study says. Many junior and senior students have lots of funny things to do in their free time. More than 57% have activities every day. 82% have activities at least four times a week. American students spend their free time doing sports, or enjoying arts, music and dancing. They like to have life outside school because they can make a lot of friends during their activities.
41. What are American children’s life like after school
A. Unhappy. B. Exciting. C. Boring. D. Unhealthy.
42. How many students have activities every day if there are 2,000 students
A. More than 570. B. More than 820.
C. More than 1,840. D. More than 1,140.
43. How often do 82% students have activities
A. Every day. B. Every weekend.
C. At least four times a week. D. Every Sunday.
44. American students ______, or enjoy arts, music and dancing in their free time.
A. do sports B. surf the Internet
C. have fun D. watch TV
45. American students like to have life outside school because______.
A. activities outside school are more interesting
B. they can make a lot of friends
C. they don’t like school life
D. they are free to do anything outside school
D
　　The brain is the boss of the body．Your eyes，ears，nose，and skin tell your brain what is going on around you．Other parts of your body tell your brain what is going on inside of you．Your brain takes in the signals．It tells your body what to do with them．When you touch fire，your skin tells your brain that your finger is too hot．Your brain tells you to move your finger．All these happen very fast．Your brain also controls your breathing，blinking(眨眼)，and heart beat．It controls your feelings and thoughts too．
　　Humans have the most developed brain of all animals．Yet it is not the largest brain．The human brain weighs three pounds．The brain of an elephant weighs 11 pounds．So the largest brain is not always the best brain．In people，a larger brain does not mean a clever person．
　　46．What is the main idea of this story
　　A．The human brain works very fast．
　　B．The largest brain is not always the best brain．
　　C．The brain controls the body．
　　D．The best brain is the largest brain．
　　47．What happens after the brain takes in the signals from the body
　　A．The brain grows faster and larger．
　　B．The brain tells the body what to do．
　　C．The body becomes more developed．
　　D．We don't know．
　　48．What does “the boss of the body” mean
　　A．The signals．
　　B．The most developed body part．
　　C．The main part of the body.
　　D．The centre of the body．
　　49．Which brain is the most developed
　　A．The largest brain．　　　　　　　　　 B．The human brain．
　　C．The smaller brain．　　　　　　　　　　D．Not too big brain．
　　50．What are the things that the human brain does
　　A．Takes in signals．　　　　　　　　　　 B．Controls breathing．
C．Controls feelings and thoughts．　　　D．A，B and C．
四、任务性阅读(10分)
(A)
You will find traffic noise disappearing as soon as you arrive in Venice (威尼斯). So as you walk down the narrow ( 狭窄的) streets, you only have to avoid crowds of people. About 19 million travellers visit Venice for the enjoyable environment, art and food each year.
Seeing Venice on foot is the best. You can walk through the city in about an hour. Look around St. Mark’s Basilica and the Doge’s Palace. But you should know walking along the streets isn’t as easy as travelling on the city’s canals(运河). The canals are Venice’s “streets”. And you can enjoy the Grand Canal, the Rialto Bridge and many wooden buildings.
Venice is fantastic. You shouldn’t miss it in your life. No matter how long you’re in Venice, it will leave a pleasant feeling on you.
任务 1 : 根据英文释义及首字母提示，拼写单词。
51. c________________ a large number of people
52. w_______________ made of wood
任务 2 : 同义句转换，每空一词。
Venice is fantastic. You shouldn’t miss it in your life.
Venice is 53 fantastic 54 you should visit it in your life.
任务 3 : 根据短文内容简答问题。
55. What will you find disappearing as soon as you arrive in Venice
(B)
As we know, Xiao Shenyang and Liu Qian did wonderful jobs in the CCTV Spring Festival Gala. Now many people are crazy about these two persons. But how much do you know about them
Xiao Shenyang was born in a poor peasant family which is in difficult family conditions. His real name is Shen He. He is an actor. He is good at Er Ren Zhuan. He learned acts, following Zhao Benshan. During the school life, he was very active in many activities. He looks like a simple man, but he never stops pursuing (追求) his artistic aspiration (渴望). More and more people like his style of performance, and we hope he can make great progress in the future.
Liu Qian is a young magician from Taiwan. At the age of 7, Liu saw a cute magic toy in a shop. At that moment he began to love and decided to learn magic. Liu didn’t go to any magic school. he practiced tricks every day to improve his skills, until one day he was able to put on a show for his class. He saw the surprise on everyone’s face, and he felt it was cool. He often does street shows for passers-by, police and farmers. He worked hard at it. Now he is a famous magician.
任务：请阅读这篇短文，根据短文内容完成下面表格中关于小沈阳和刘谦的信息。
Xiao Shenyang Liu Qian
Job An actor A young magician from 56.______
How to succeed He learned acts, following Zhao Benshan.During the school life, he 58.__________.He looks like 60.___________. But he never stops pursuing the artistic aspiration. He always learned magic 57.__________ at the beginning.At his show for his class, he found everyone 59._______________ and he felt it was cool.He often does street shows for people. He works hard at it.
五、交际运用（10分）
根据对话内容与上下文，在空白处填入适当的句子，使对话意思完整。（每空2分，共10分）
(A)
A: Hello, may I speak to David
B: _________________________________________.(61)
A: Hi, David! This is Lin Tao speaking.
B: Hi, Lin Tao . What’s up
A: What are you going to do next Sunday
B: _________________________________________.(62) Do you have
any ideas
A: Shall we go to the zoo I hear there’s a dolphin show
there.
B: A dolphin show Good idea! _____________________________________ (63)
A: By bike.
B: _____________________________________________________________ (64)
A: At half past nine.
B: _____________________________________________________________ (65)
A: Let’s meet outside the zoo gate.
B: All right .See you then.
(B)
A: Hello, 6817502.
B: Hello. ______________________________________________________ (66)
A: Sorry, _______________________________________ . (67) This is Jim’s mother, Mrs Green.
Can I take a message
B: That’s very kind of you. This is David, Jim’s friend. I ask him for some Chinese stamps. He told me he had got some last week.
A: OK. I will tell him about it. Would you like him to call you back later
B: Well, I won’t be at home today. My mother is ill, so I must go to the hospital to look after her. Would you please ask him to ring me tomorrow morning
A: Oh, ________________________________________________.(68)
I’ll let Jim know it. By the way, ______________________________________________ （69）
B: Oh. My phone number is 6877242.
A: 6877242, right
B: Yes, that’s right. Thanks a lot.
A: _____________________________________________________________ .(70)
六、阅读表达 （A）阅读短文，并按要求完成71—75题。（10分）
What’s your idea of a perfect mom In America, moms of the 1950s and 60s in the TV plays were the “perfect” examples. They always made freshly cooked meals and had a tidy house. It was their full-time job to care for the children and the home. It meant that the home was the real centre of mothers’ lives. But that was 40-50 years ago. Times have changed, and so have the roles of moms.
In the U.S., in 1960s, society began to change. The women’s liberation movement (妇女解放运动) caused women to question their traditional and solid roles. And women began leaving their homes to get jobs or go back to school. Society changed in Asia, too. Fifty years later, it becomes normal for mothers to work outside the home without the exception (例外). This is true in both America and Asia.
Mothers today serve as presidents, CEOs, university teachers and airline pilots. In fact, they can be found in every profession (职业). But most people will tell you, their most important job is still being a mom.
71题为判断正误（“T”表示正确，“F”表示错误）；72—74题为简略回答问题；75题为英译汉。
71. Moms work outside the home in both America and Asia now.
__________________________________________________________________________.
72. Do mothers only work in some special professions today
__________________________________________________________________________.
73. When did women begin leaving their homes to get jobs in the U.S.
__________________________________________________________________________.
74. According to the passage, what is the most important job for a perfect mom
__________________________________________________________________________.
75. Put the underlined sentence in the passage into Chinese.
__________________________________________________________________________。
(B)
Smith先生将于1月9日晚7点到9点（星期六）在第一阅览室作关于美式英语与英式英语不同点的报告。 请你用英文写一个关于这一消息的口头通知，字数60~80个单词。
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
七、写作（20分）
请以“The Happy Life” 为题，根据以下的内容提示，写一篇短文来描述一下你心目中的最幸福的生活。
内容提示：
1、学校生活乐趣多，喜欢和可爱的同学们在教室里学习，同学们相处融洽，经常和同学们一起打球和唱歌；但有时候太多功课而没时间跟小宠物玩。
2、希望将来有一份自己喜欢的工作，有一间带花园的房子，和父母分享成功。
3、现在努力学习，使梦想成真。
要求：
1）语言准确得当，条理清晰。
2）词数：80词左右。
3）不得出现真实的人名、校名等相关信息。
4）参考词汇：与……分享…… share sth. with sb.
The Happy Life
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Unit 2 答案
Lesson 1
一、1. taste 2. pet 3. butterfly 4. smell 5. licked
二、1. C感官动词无被动语态。
2. A感官动词后接形容词作标语。
3. A sound 听起来，后面接形容词；hear, sound like后面接名词。
4. B由答语可知。
5. C sound为感官系动词，后接形容词作表语；make sb. do sth.为固定短语。
6. B要用副词修饰动词。
7. C由句意可知该用现在进行时。
8. B由句意可知。
9. A说话声音再大些可以吗
10. B have trouble doing sth.干……有麻烦，固定短语。
三、(A) 1. Hold on, P1ease．，Hold on for a moment, please．／One moment, please．
2. Nothing much．／I have no idea.
3 Shall we go and have a look ／Shall we go to visit it —／Would you like to go with me ／Why not go (there)and have a look
4. When and where shall we meet 5. By bike
(B) 1.C 2.E 3.G 4.B 5.A
Lesson 2
一、1. flavor 2. pillow 3. describe 4. Bitter 5. really
二、1. C感官动词后接形容词作表语。
2. B感官动词无被动语态，也没有现在进行时。
3. C hear sb. do sth.听见某人干某事，感官动词sound后接形容词作标语。
4. C用副词修饰动词。
5. A look through her glasses透过她的眼镜看。
6. C thousand 后接of 时，要用复数。
7. B (be) different from为固定短语，意为和……不同。
8. C look for是寻找，指找的过程； find 是找到，指找的结果；find out是经过努力查明；like在这里是介词，像的意思。
9. A however表示轻微的转折， but表示明显的转折。
10. C not as … as 是固定短语，不如的意思。
三、1. B be worried about担心，固定短语。
2. D天冷的时候他从来不出去。应用一般过去时。
3. C两句之间是并列的关系。
4. C get tired of 对……很厌烦。
5. A 动词不定式作后置定语。
6. A hurry to do sth.匆忙干某事。
7. B此处应用动词的过去分词。
8. C把报纸上的那篇文章指给医生看。
9. B此处要用副词来修饰东词read。
10. A那正是我所感觉到的。
四、1. happens 2. at 3. changed 4. part 5. before 6. win 7. chose 8. practised 9. hardly 10. down
Lesson 3
一、1. loudness 2. worried 3. closely 4. picnic 5. touch
二、1.C由题意可知，此处该填一个名词。
2. C(be) different from为固定短语，意为和……不同。
3. B感官动词后接形容词作标语。
4. B listen 表示听的动作，hear表示听的结果。
5. C try on 是试穿的意思，后接宾语是代词时，代词要放在中间。
6. A祈使句中动词用原形，hurt与主语是主动的关系。
7. A我正在尝。
8. B看书即为读书，用read。
9. A丝绸感觉起来很柔软。
10. C the same as 是固定短语；当比较对象是句子主语时，再次出现用that或those 来代替。
三、1. B用某种语言要用介词in。
2. A call名词，电话的意思。
3. B be different from 与……不同，固定短语。
4. A ask sb. to do sth.让某人做某事。
5. B instead相反的。
6. B speak to 和某人讲话。
7. C Who is that 你是谁？电话用语。
8. B 用现在分词构成进行时。
9. C the other one 两个中的另外一个。
10. D This is …我是……。电话用语。
四、 (1) 1. A由第二段第三句可知。
2. B 由文章可以很容易的看出。
3. B 联系上下文可知。
4. B由第三段前两行可以看出。
5. A由文章开头可以猜出。
(2) 1. B由文章第一句话可知。
2. C由第二段第二句可知。
3. A由第三段可知。
4. D 由最后一段可知。
Lesson 4
一、1. soft 2. medicine 3. Sweet 4. recently 5. child
二、1.B由题意可知，不能用过去时。
2. A由回答可知，请对方说话声音高一点。Speak up 固定短语。
3. B用副词修饰动词。
4. C丝绸感觉起来很柔软。感官动词无被动语态。
5. B too many太多，修饰可数名词；too much太多，修饰不可数名词；much too太，修饰形容词或副词。
6. B taste 后接形容词作表语，taste like后接名词。
7. C此句是问那位女士的外貌。
8. A只有A项符合语法结构。
9. C此处是考察打电话用语。
10. A
三、1. How, does 2. What, are 3. Where, do 4.How, bad 5. What, color
四、86．surprise 87．over 88．founded 89．reason 90．More
单元测试
一、1. C更近些看。Look和come并列都用原形。
2. C由题意可知，请对方说话声音高一点。Speak up 固定短语。
3. B running shoes 跑鞋。
4. C由题意可知，此处填名词，而且flavor是可数名词。
5. B not as … as 是固定短语，不如的意思。
6. C take/have some medicine吃药，是固定短语。
7. C通过五样东西了解世界。
8. A not all不是所有的，表示半否定。
9. C thousand前有数字时，用单数；后面有of 时，用复数；具体数字和of不能同时出现。
10. B由副词来修饰动词。
11. B taste 后接形容词作表语，taste like后接名词。
12. C 尝起来很酸的那个食物是什么。
13. C talk on the phone为固定短语，第二个空由句意可知。
14. C第一个look是系动词，后接形容词；第二个look是行为动词，后接副词修饰。
15. C has gone to 去了，还没回来。
16. C言外之意是比以前更糟糕了。
17. A too many太多，修饰可数名词；too much太多，修饰不可数名词；much too太，修饰形容词或副词。
18. B这首音乐听起来多好。它让我放松。
19. B我一到那儿就会给你打电话。As soon as 后面用一般现在时代替一般将来时。
20. C由题意可知，此处该填一个名词。
二、21. A没有东西能单独生存。
22. C一个生物杀害另一个生物。Another三个或三个往上，很多中的另一个。
23. D in order to 为了。
24. B所有的食物链都开始于太阳。
25. B 由句意和常识可知。
26. C联系上下文可知。
27. A只有太阳能被植物转化成食物后，动物才能使用。
28. C食肉动物只能间接吃草。
29. D由下文可以看出。
30. B里面的鱼不能被吃。
三、(A)31A由第一句可知。
32 A由第二行可知。
33 C由第二段第二行可知。
34 B由第二段第二句可知。
35 D细读第二段可算出。
(B)36B由第一句可知。
37 B由第二段第二行可知。
38 A由第三段第二行可知。
39 B由第三段第二行可知。
40 C血液流动得快而且流畅，人才可能聪明。
(C)41B由第一句可知。
42 D2000x57%即可。
43 C由第三行可知。
44 A由第四行可知。
45 B由最后一句可知。
（D）46C通读全文可知。
47 B由第五句可知。
48 D由第一段的描述可知。
49 B由第二段第一句可知。
50 D细读第一段可知。
四、（A）51. crowd 52.wooden 53. so 54. that 55. Traffic noise
（B）56. Taiwan 57. by himself 58. joined in / took (active) part in / was very active in many activities 59. (was) surprised 60. a simple man
五、（A）61. Speaking. / This is David speaking. 62. Nothing much. 63. How can we get there 64. When shall we meet 65. Where shall we meet
（B）66. May / Can / Could I speak to Jim, please 67. he isn’t in. 68. I’m sorry to hear that. 69. What’s your phone number 70. You’re welcome.
六、（A）71. T 72. No, they don’t. 73. In 1960s. / After the women’s liberation movement.
74. Being a mom. 75. 时代变了，妈妈的角色也变了。
（B）Attention, please.
　I'm glad to tell you that an English lecture will be given from 7：00 to 9：00 in the evening on January 9, Saturday. It will be held in the first reading - room. Mr. Smith will give you a talk on the differences between American English and British English. After the report, we will have a discussion on the subject in groups. I'm sure you will learn a lot from it.
Please attend the lecture on time. That's all. Thanks.
七、One possible version:
The Happy Life
My school life has a lot of fun. I like studying in the classroom with my lovely classmates. We get on well with each other. We play sports and sing songs together. But sometimes there is too much homework. I don’t have free time to play with my pet.
I wish to have a job I like and have a house with a garden. I will share my success with my parents. Now, I must study hard to make my dream come true.Unit 11 The 3 R’s
单元词汇导学
1. use …for… 用……来做…… 2. put …into… 把……放入……
3. in danger 处于危险中 4. be made of/from 由……制成
5. in the future 在将来 6. stop doing sth. 停止做某事
7. start by doing sth. 由……开始8. some tips for reducing 减少利用量的几条建议9. natural resources 自然资源10. ask sb. (not) to do sth. 让某人（不要）干某事11. at risk 冒险 12. There is no need to do sth.不需要做某事
13. get angry with sb. 生某人的气 14. follow the three R’s遵守3R原则
Lesson 1
学习点拨
本课交际用语：
1. Why do you need three recycling bins
2. What does your family recycle or reuse
3. Because we recycle many things.
4. Therefore, we have three bins.
5. Turn off the water.
名师授课
1. Where do you put things _____
A. recycle B. to recycle C. recycling
解析 选B。此句需要填不定式形式做目的状语。
2. Cans are made _____ metal.
A. from B. of C. by
解析 选B。be made of由……制成，强调能从外表看出原材料。
课后作业
一、词汇 单词释义
1. There is a _____ for keeping garbage. (large box)
2. We can ____ our exercise books. (use again)
3. We can ____ many things. (treat sth. used so that it can be used again)
4. How can get the _____ off the wall (sth. that isn’t clean)
5. They’re waiting for us _____. (on or to a lower floor)
二、单项选择
1. My father likes to put our recycling things into different groups. _____, we have three bins.
A. So B. Because C. Therefore
2. Why should we recycle things
A. We don’t have enough natural resources.
B. There is too much pollution.
C. We need to clean up our neighborhoods.
3. Cloth can ____ clothes.
A. be made into B. be made of C. be made from
4. I used old bottles _____ many things.
A. for B. at C. on
5. My parents _____ Shandong for ten years.
A. have been in B. have been to C. have gone to
6. The teacher gave me a piece of paper _____.
A. to write on B. to be written on C. to write in
7. Your father is sleeping now. Could you _____ the music a bit
A. turn up B. turn down C. turn off
8. Now most people know _____ is very important.
A. recycle B. recycling C. recycled
9. While I was sleeping, I heard someone speaking ____.
A. in the downstairs B. at downstairs C. downstairs
10. Which word of the following has a different stress from the others
A. plastic B. recycle C. reuse
三、交际运用
(A)
选出适当的句子完成下列对话
A) Certainly. B) Can I help you C) You’re welcome. D) When can I get my tickets E) Would you like me to try the later one F) How do you like Harry Potter films G) Can I take your name and telephone number, please
W: UCI booking line. 1
M: Hello…yes… I’d like to book two tickets for the new Harry Potter film, please.
W: 2 When for There are showings at 5:30 pm, 8 pm and
10:30 pm every day.
M: In that case, I think the 5:30 one on Friday, please.
W: I’ll just check. … Sorry, that showing is fully booked. 3
M: Er… yes, please. If you could.
W: Yes, there are seats for the 8 o’clock showing. Do you want them
M: Yes, please.
W: 4
M: Darren Brown. It’s 6398 0102. 5
W: You can collect your tickets from the box office any time from 5 pm today until ten minutes
before the start of the film on Friday.
M: Thank you.
W: 6 Goodbye.
(B) 根据对话意思和所给首字母，写出完整正确的单词。
Betty: Well, it's great to be here in Beijing.
Helen： Yes, it's exciting. Lots of 1. c______ take place every day.
Betty: And the Olympics are coming. I think Beijing is really the place to be right now.
Helen： Yes, 2. m________ people are curious about Beijing than before. They all want to see it themselves.
Betty: Beijing is really a great city. But there are also some problems, such as pollution and 3. c________ traffic.
Helen：You're right. There are a lot of challenges (挑战).
Betty: So our government has started "The Green Olympics Action Plan" to 4. b________ Beijing into a better place to live in. Helen; That sounds great. We all 5. h________ the Olympics will be a great success.
Lesson 2
学习点拨
1. in danger 处于危险中 2. be made of/from 由……制成
3. in the future 在将来 4. stop wasting so much 停止如此浪费
7. start by remembering the three R’s 通过记住三个R开始
8. some tips for reducing 减少利用量的几条建议
9. take more of anything than you need 多于你的需求
10. use oil to make our houses warm用油使得我们的家暖和
11. natural resources 自然资源
12. ask sb. (not) to do sth. 让某人（不要）干某事
名师授课
1. Who knows what will happen _________ ？
A. in future B. in the future C. on future
解析 选B。in future＝from now on 意为“今后，以后”，一般指从现在开始到今后，常指离现在较近的一段将来时间；in the future＝in time yet to come 意为“将来”，一般指真正意义上的将来，常指包括in future在内的较远的将来一段时间。
2. We must learn ways to stop ______ so much.
A. to waste B. wasting C. to wasting
解析 选B。stop to do sth 是停下手头的事，去做另一件事；stop doing sth 是停下正在做的事。
课后作业
一、词汇 单词释义
1. Don’t _____ water. (use sth. needlessly)
2. He has to _____his weight by 6 kilos.(make sth. smaller in size, number, price etc.)
3. There will be a robot in each family in the ______. (time that will come later)
4. My ____ has a recycling center. (area where one lives)
5. It’s _____ for us to protect our living environment. (that can’t be done without)
二、单项选择
1. _____ off your TV or computers when you are not using them.
A. Turn B. To turn C. Turning
2. Believe it or not, ____ three seconds a child in the world dies because there is not _____ food.
A. every, a lot of B. each, a lot of C. every, enough
3. There are many beautiful trees on ____ side of the road.
A. both B. either C. neither
4. We’d better walk to school or take a bus to _____ air pollution.
A. controlling B. controlled C. control
5. Your coat looks nice. What is it ____
A. made of B. made in C. made from
6. What does Zhang Wei’s family put ____ their _____ bin
A. into, recycling B. in, recycling C. into, recycle
7. We should reduce the water _____ we use.
A. who B. that C. what
8. We use oil ___ our houses warm.
A. to make B. make C. making
9. We can start by ____ the three “Rs”: Reduce, Reuse, Recycle.
A. remember B. remembering C. to remember
10. Which word of the following has a different stress from the others
A. necessary B. future C. reduce
三、完形填空
Charlie came from a poor village. His parents had __1__ money to send him to school when he was young. The boy was very sad. Mr. King lived next to him. He found the boy __2__ and had pity on him and lent some money to him. So the boy could go to school. He studied hard and __3__ all his lessons. When he finished middle school, the man introduced him to his friend in the town. And he began to work.
Once Mr. King was seriously hurt in an accident. Dying, he asked Charlie to take care of his daughter, Sharon. The young man __4__ and several years later he married the girl. He loved her very much and tried his best to make her happy. He often bought beautiful clothes and delicious food for her. He was good at cooking and he cooked __5__ for her. So she became very fat and she felt it difficult to walk. And one day she found there was something wrong with her heart. Her husband wasn’t at home and she had to go to __6__ at once. The doctors looked her over and told her __7__ eat meat, sugar, chocolate and things like these. She was afraid __8__ the doctor’s words and wrote all the names of the food on the paper. When she got home, she put the list on the table and __9__. When she returned home that afternoon, she found many kinds of food: meat, sugar and chocolate in the kitchen. Charlie was busy __10__ there. As soon as he saw her, he said happily, “I’ve bought all the food you like, dear!”
1. A. no B. some C. much D. enough
2. A. lazy B. clever C. careful D. hard
3. A. did well in B. was poor at C. was working D. was good for
4. A. was angry B. thought hard C. agreed D. said “No.”
5. A. a little B. a few C. many D. a lot
6. A. rest B. sleep C. hospital D. work
7. A. should B. would C. to D. not to
8. A. to remember B. to forget C. to catch D. to teach
9. A. slept B. went out C. cooked D. ate
10. A. reading B. seeing C. cooking D. writing
四、任务性阅读
Last December, we began 1 our yearbook. 2 , we chose the persons who had done something special, then some students interviewed(采访) them, some wrote down their 3 , others took photos of them. Everyone in our class had something 4 . Finally our teacher helped 5 to put the things together. We had our first yearbook.
Lesson 3
学习点拨
定语从句
修饰一个名词或代词的从句叫做定语从句。被修饰的名词,词组或代词叫做先行词。定语从句通常出现在先行词之后，由关系词（关系代词或关系副词）引出。
引导定语从句的关联词称为关系词，关系词有关系代词和关系副词。关系代词有that, which, who, whom, whose,等；关系副词有where, when, why等。关系词常有3个作用：①引导定语从句。②代替先行词。③在定语从句中担当一个成分。
注：关系代词有主语、宾语之分。一般whom作为宾语。
一、关系代词
1、who, whom, that
　　这些词代替的先行词是人的名词或代词，在从句中所起作用如下：
　　(1) Is he the man who/that wants to see you 他就是想见你的人吗？（who/that在从句中作主语）
　　(2) He is the man whom/ that I saw yesterday. 他就是我昨天见的那个人。（whom/that在从句中作宾语）
2、Whose 用来指人或物，(只用作定语, 若指物，它还可以同of which互换）
　　(1) They rushed over to help the man whose car had broken down. 那人车坏了，大家都跑过去帮忙。
　　(2) Please pass me the book whose (of which) cover is green.　请递给我那本绿皮的书。
3、 which, that 它们所代替的先行词是事物的名词或代词，在从句中可作主语、宾语等，例如：
　　(1) A prosperity which / that had never been seen before appears in the countryside. 农村出现了前所未有的繁荣。（which / that在句中作主语）
(2) The package (which / that) you are carrying is about to come unwrapped. 你拿的包快散了。(which / that在句中作宾语）
二、关系副词（在句中作状语）
　　关系副词=介词+关系代词
　　why =for which
　　where =in/ at/ on/ ... which (介词同先行词搭配)
　　when =during/ on/ in/ ... which (介词同先行词搭配)
1. when指时间，在定语从句中做时间状语
　如：I still remember the day when I first came to the school.
　　= I still remember the day on which I first came to the school.
2. where指地点，在定语从句中做地点状语
　如：Shanghai is the city where I was born.
= Shanghai is the city in which I was born.
3. why指原因，在定语从句中做原因状语
如： Please tell me the reason why you missed the plane.
= Please tell me the reason for which you missed the plane.
名师授课
1. This is the best way ____ has been used against pollution.
A. where B. that C. which
解析 选B。指事物的先行词前有“形容词最高级”修饰时，只能用关系代词that。
2. Is this the factory ____ your father worked
　　A. where　B. that　C. on which　D. the one
解析 选A。关系词的选择依据在从句中所做的成分，先行词在从句中做主、定、宾语时，选择关系代词 (who, whom, that, which, whose)； 先行词在从句中做状语时，应选择关系副词 ( where 地点状语，when 时间状语，why 原因状语) 。该句中主、谓、宾俱全，从句部分为句子的状语表地点，既可用副词where，又因 in the factory词组，可用介词in + which 引导地点状语。而此题中，介词on 用的不对，所以选A。　
课后作业
一、词汇 单词释义
1. We should do something ____ in our lives. (helpful)
2. The number of students is going to ____ from 2,000 to 800. (become smaller or fewer)
3. Please put the ____ in the recycling centre. (waste things, garbage)
4. The plan is strange but I don’t think it’s ____. (having a meaning important)
5. It’s so ____ out here in the country. (quiet)
二、单项选择
1. Are you sure that the girl with ____ they are playing is 13 years old
A. that B. who C. whom
2. Turn off the water while ___ your teeth.
A. brush B. brushing C. to brush
3. The earth is ____, we should try our best to protect it.
A. in bad B. in danger C. in order
4. She enjoys ____ to the music tape.
A. to listen B. listen C. listening
5. He is the person ____ I give my old newspapers to.
A. who B. whom C. A and B
6. We’ll never forget the day ____ we joined the League.
A. that B. which C. when
7. Canada is the place ____ I want to visit.
A. what B. where C. which
8. My mom is someone ____ I love best.
A. who B. which C. whom
9. Harbin is the place ____ I was born.
A. which B. who C. where
10. The book _____ he bought yesterday is very interesting.
A. that B. when C. what
三、完形填空
Last Tuesday I took my two daughters, aged five and seven, to town by car. It began to rain 1 so I decided I would leave the children in the car before I went quickly into a shop. I 2 the girls not to touch anything and told them I would be 3 within a few minutes. Then I locked all the doors and left 4 happily looking out of the window.
I returned to the car in less than five minutes but the girls had disappeared! I could hardly believe my 5 . The car doors were 6 locked, the windows were shut and on the back seat 7 only two coats. Being 8 , I ran to the corner of the street 9 there was no 10 of them .I rushed up to an old lady nearby and asked 11 she had seen two small girls but she said “No”. Feeling quick sick with fear, I sat on the driver’s seat, and 12 to stop trembling. Suddenly, I 13 a merry laugh behind me. I got out of the car, ran round to open the boot and there inside were two very red-faced and excited 14 . They had obviously pulled out the back seat, 15 behind it and then been unable to push the seat forward again. With tears in my eyes, I leaned forward and pulled their ears.
1. A. heavy B. hard C. hardly D. big
2. A. let B. warned C. allowed D. repeated
3. A. away B. out C. back D. alone
4. A. them B. her C. themselves D. herself
5. A. ears B. words C. eyes D. brains
6. A. too B. again C. already D. still
7. A. there B. sat C. seen D. were
8. A. excited B. proud C. frightened D. pleased
9. A. where B. which C. that D. when
10. A. warning B. sign C. body D. face
11. A. that B. when C. whether D. how
12. A. tried B. made C. tried not D. set
13. A. felt B. smelt C. saw D. heard
14. A. sons B. daughters C. women D. children
15. A. climbed B. flew C. threw D. landed
四、阅读理解
(A)
Many children love to play with snow in winter. But Long Chuan has come to hate it.
This year his hometown suffered from snowstorms (遭受暴风雪) for nearly a month. The heavy snow stopped cars and trains, broke the electricity (电) tower and turned tap water to ice.
Every day Long Chuan had to walk several kilometers to carry drinking water. “I couldn’t ride a bike and it took me 3 hours to walk to school. I can’t remember how many times I slipped (滑倒) on the hard ice, ” said Long Chuan.
Long is not alone. This year millions of people in central and southern China had a freezing winter without enough water and electricity. The biggest snowstorms in 50 years killed more than 100 people. They also cost the country 111.1 billion yuan.
Experts (专家) say a special type of climate condition (气候条件), La Nina, caused the storms. During a La Nina, the water in the Pacific Ocean (太平洋) near the equator (赤道) becomes colder than usual. It changes the weather around the world.
Besides China, Canada, the US and Middle Eastern countries also met with heavy snowstorms this winter. The special climate caused the recent flooding (洪水) in Australia, too.
However, experts say that people have destroyed the environment (环境). Global warming (全球变暖) may be causing these terrible weather events to happen more and more often.
1. What took place in Long Chuan’s hometown last winter
A. Earthquake. B. Flooding. C. Traffic Accident. D. Heavy snowstorms.
2. During the snowstorms this year, Long Chuan __________.
A. had to walk to carry drinking water B. had to ride a bike to school
C. couldn’t go to school on foot D. couldn’t play with snow
3. The heavy snow ____________ this year.
A. killed millions of Chinese B. cost China 111.1 billion yuan
C. used too much electricity D. lasted more than three hours
4. We can tell from the story that __________ .
A. China is the only country which suffered from the heavy snow
B. La Nina is said to have caused the snowstorms
C. La Nina also caused hot summer in Australia
D. the snowstorms have nothing to do with global warming
5. The passage tells people around the world ___________.
A. to wear more clothes in winter B. to stop riding bikes on the hard ice
C. to protect (保护) the environment D. to save water and electricity
(B)
If you knew a bottle of water had been recycled from urine (尿), would you drink it Astronauts at the International Space Station (ISS) may soon do so.
NASA (美国航空航天局) said it would use a high-tech machine (高科技机器) to recycle wastewater at the ISS. The machine will recycle everything from sweat (汗), the water for washing hands, shower water, water used for brushing teeth, and even urine, to make drinking water.
It will save NASA millions of dollars each year. At present, each ISS astronaut uses about 4.4 liters (升) of water every day. It costs about $24 million a year to transport water up to ISS. NASA says that a liter of water costs about $11,000.
The machine will be sent to the ISS in October 2008. NASA hopes it will recycle about 93% of all water used on the station.
Will the water be clean Scientists say the wastewater will go through a very complicated process (复杂的过程). For example, different chemicals will be put in the wastewater; the water will be heated to 130℃ to get rid of bacteria (细菌). The recycled water is thousands of times better than the water from a city tap, scientists say.
1. NASA will use a high-tech machine to recycle wastewater at the ISS to __________.
A. protect the ISS
B. make astronauts at ISS work harder
C. provide better water and food for ISS astronauts
D. save the cost of transporting water up to the ISS
2. At present it costs NASA about _________ dollars to transport water up to an astronaut at the ISS a day.
A. 4.4 thousand B. 11 thousand C. 48.4 thousand D. 24 million
3. Scientists plan to get rid of bacteria in the wastewater by ___________.
A. freezing B. heating C. shaking D. precipitating (沉淀)
4. The reading mainly tells us something about ___________.
A. water recycling B. the International Space Station
C. a high-tech machine D. the cost of NASA
5. Which of the following sentences is true, according to the passage
A. The recycled water is much better than that from a city tap.
B. The high-tech machine will recycle all the water used on the station.
C. At present, each ISS astronaut uses more water than the people living on the earth.
D. The high-tech machine can only recycle urine to make water at present.
Lesson 4
学习点拨
1． In doing we learn. （实践长才干。)
2． East or west, home is best. （东好西好，还是家里最好。)
3． Two heads are better than one. （三个臭皮匠，顶个诸葛亮。）
4． Good company on the road is the shortest cut. （行路有良伴就是捷径。）
5． Constant dropping wears the stone. （滴水穿石。）
6． Better late than never. （迟做总比不做好；晚来总比不来好。）
7． It's never too late to mend. （过而能改，善莫大焉；亡羊补牢，犹未晚也。）
名师授课
1. One _______ has nothing to fear for oneself dares to tell the truth.
A. that B. which C. who
解析 选C。先行词是one, ones, anyone和those时，定语从句中的关系词需用who。
2. My sister will go to school next year, _____ I like very much.
A. that B. which C. where
解析 选B。关系词在定语从句中作宾语，所以排除C。而且在非限制性定语从句中只能用which，不能用that。
课后作业
一、词汇 单词释义
1. You should drink ____ beer. (a smaller amount of)
2. The medicine has a good _____. (result)
3. We all should _____ the 3 R’s. (act according to sth.)
4. I was _____ with myself for making such a mistake. (filled with anger)
5. Bottles are often made of _____. (material you can see through)
二、单项选择
1. Now the environment is becoming dirtier and dirtier, so we should _____ pollution.
A. reuse B. reduce C. recycle
2. People should be more careful to stop _____ water.
A. to waste B. wasting C. waste
3. All of the people wish to live in a ____ world. Man run for ____ forever.
A. peaceful, peace B. peace, peaceful C. peaceful, peaceful
4. Look out! Playing football in the street is dangerous, you are _____.
A. in risk B. go risk C. at risk
5. Now people are told not to use plastic bags, which has a good ____ on our environment.
A. effect B. affect C. work
6. To help the earth, all the people should use _____ energy and do ____ useful things.
A. more, less B. less, more C. more, more
7. —When were you born
—It is the year of 1977 ____ I was born.
A. that B. when C. that
8. You are right. I’ll try _____ than before.
A. hard B. harder C. hardest
9. Keep ____ the lists until each group has its first list again.
A. pass B. passing C. to pass
10. I didn’t finish homework, so my teacher got ____ me today.
A. pleased B. angry with C. angry for
三、把下列句子合并成含有定语从句的复合句
1. This is the factory. We visited the factory last week.
This is the factory _____ we visited last week.
2. He lost his pen yesterday. Here is the pen.
Here is the pen _____ ______ lost yesterday.
3. The woman is Li Fang. She teaches us history.
The woman _____ ______ us history is Li Fang.
4. She moved to a town. A big recycling centre is in the town.
She moved to a town _______ a big recycling centre is.
5. We are the people. They call us volunteers.
We are the people _____ they call volunteers.
四、阅读表达
Each year，many Chinese people go abroad because of all kinds of reasons. They are becoming younger and younger year by year. Even some Chinese parents send their children to foreign countries when they are only in a middle school. They think their children can get a wider view, less academic(学业)competition or family honor. But life can be bad for young people there. At first, they have to face the culture differences and language problems. However, these are not always the most difficult things to overcome(克服).To best children, controlling(管理)themselves well is a big challenge when studying alone in strange country．
Yu Yang，a 15-year-old student from Guangdong Province studies in a high school in Toronto, Canada．To his surprise，his teachers there seldom push students to study abroad．And usually there isn’t too much homework．Students have lots of free time to do the activities．Some of his friends spend their whole year’s money in the first two months of the new term. So they have to ask their parents for some more money.
On the one hand, studying abroad can help students learn foreign languages quickly and en up their eyes, but on the other hand, some children may feel lonely, become bad，lose themselves，etc. Many problems may happen to them．These are different from their original thoughts．So parents should think them over before their children go abroad.
1．Why do Chinese parents send their children abroad
2．What do the students have to face in foreign countries at first
3．Controlling themselves well is a big challenge，isn’t it
4．Do students in Canada have more free time than those in China
5．What’s the article mainly about
单元测试
一、单项选择(20分)
1. —_____ wastes _____ good for our environment.
—What should we ______
A. Recycling, is, recycle B. To recycle, are, recycling
C. Recycle, are, recycling
2. I must study hard ____ because I want to be a teacher _____.
A. in the future, in future B. in future, in the future
C. in the future, in the future
3. We use coal to ____ our house warm. _____ warm is important in winter in Harbin.
A. keep, To keep B. to keep, To keep C. keep, Keep
4. Could you tell me _____
A. how I can spell the word B. how do I go to the nearest hospital
C. where is the bus station
5. There is ___ to help the boy. He is so selfish.
A. needn’t B. not need C. no need
6. She enjoys listening to the music _____ Jay Zhou wrote and sang.
A. that B. who C. whose
7. The girl who ____ with our English teacher is Susan.
A. talked to B. talks C. is talking
8. The school ____ he studied before is No.2 Middle School.
A. which B. that C. where
9. Lucy was very angry ____ his younger sister because she broke her glasses.
A. with B. at C. in
10. Important things from the Earth that we need _____ in danger.
A. are B. is C. have
11.—Where have you been —I have _______.
A. been downstairs B. gone downstairs C. been to downstairs
12.—The teacher often tells us bottles are made ______ glass.
—Yes, but plastic is made _______ bottles.
A. of, into B. from, of C. of, from
13.—What did you say
—You must remember it’s necessary _______ students ______ our earth.
A. of, to protect B. for, to protect C. for, protecting
14.—What does Zhang Wei think ______ recycling —She thinks it is important.
A. of B. about C. A and B
15. —Is this the room ______ I lived in many years ago. —Yes, we used to ____ here.
A. where, live B. which, live C. where, living
16.—I want to have a ______ bag.—Here you are.
A. clothing B. clothes C. cloth
17.—Don’t ______ more of ______ than you need.—Everyone should do.
A. make, something B. take, something C. take, anything
18.—What’s there in your hand
—That is the book _____ my sister bought me.
A. what B. which C. whose
19.—I don’t know the girl.
—This is the girl ______ mother works in a hospital.
A. which B. whose C. who
20. Which stress is different from the others
A. effect B. cotton C. wooden
二、完形填空(10分)
阅读下面短文，从各题A、B、C、D中选出一个能填入文章中相应空白处的最佳答案。
In the last 500 years, several million people have been killed by earthquakes. Among all the earthquakes, the 1976 Tangshan Earthquake is regarded as the 　21 one in the twentieth century.
On July 28, 1976, a terrible earthquake of 7.8 magnitude (级) 22 Tangshan City, Hebei Province. In just one second, the city with one million people was destroyed. The earthquake was 23 strong that even Beijing and Tianjin were seriously affected (受到影响). The shock was felt in 14 provinces and cities—one-third of the country.
The earthquake took place 24 midnight. Most people could not take any actions. Over 240,000 people 25 and about 170,000 were seriously injured. Water supplies, communications and traffic were completely cut off.
The people there needed 26 immediately. But they could not wait for help 27 . They formed groups to dig for others. They set up medical areas and tents. They searched for food and clean water. Recovery (恢复) was not easy with so much 28 . Yet, after a lot of care was given in time, the rebuilding of Tangshan began almost 29 . Though it took time, the whole city was rebuilt and is 30 home for over a million people, earning (赢得) Tangshan the name “Brave City of China”.
21. A. deadly B. deadlier C. deadliest D. dead
22. A. happened B. hit C. happen D. took place
23. A. such B. much C. so D. even
24. A. at B. in C. on D. with
25. A. killed B. kill C. was killed D. were killed
26. A. food B. water C. help D. tents
27. A. arrive B. arrived C. arrivies D. to arrive
28. A. people B. disaster C. death D. areas
29. A. soon B. quickly C. immediately D. now
30. A. too B. also C. again D. still
三、阅读理解(20分)
(A)
April 22 is Earth Day. Everyone on earth should care about and protect the earth!
The earth has warmed by about l°F(华氏度) over the past 100 years, but why and how
Well, scientists are not quite sure. Maybe the earth gets warmer and warmer on its own. But many scientists say that people are doing many things which make the earth warmer.
First, greenhouse effect is a very important reason for the change of the earth.
People give out too much energy into the air every year. It makes the earth warmer. Climate change is another important reason. Sometimes it becomes too hot and sometimes too cold. Sometimes there is too much rain and sometimes too little. The change of the climate makes the earth warmer. In turn, the warmth of the earth changes the climate, too.
When the earth becomes warmer, there may be more rain and a rise in sea level. It will affect the growth of plants, animals and people. On a Pacific island, 100 people have to move to higher ground because the sea is rising. These people can no longer live on the coast. Before that, two islands without people went underwater in 1999. Scientists say that the seas can rise by nearly one meter by 2100.
People can affect the earth's air, land and water. As for us, we can do many things to protect the earth. For example, we can use fridges less. We can tell more people about protecting the earth.
31. Earth Day is probably set for people to_____________.
A. learn more about the earth B. make full use of the earth
C. take better care of the earth D. study the warmth of the earth
32. We can infer from the passage that the reasons for the warmer earth are ___________now.
A. well known B. not very clear C. not given yet D. completely wrong
33. Greenhouse effect comes from ________________.
A. sea rising B. nature' s unbalance C. climate change D. people’s activity
34. According to the passage, _________ may affect each other.
A. climate and the warmth of the earth B. fridges and animals
C. animals and islands D. sea level and the growth of plants
35. The passage mainly tells us that_____________.
A. there is more rain now B. we must stop pollution
C. we should protect the earth D. sea level is getting higher
(B)
Big ocean (海洋) fish have almost disappeared from the world since the start of business fishing in the 1950s. The scientists found that the number of large fish has dropped by 90 percent in the past fifty years. The study took ten years. The researchers collected records from fishing businesses and governments around the world. The magazine Nature published the findings.
Scientists say the common way called longline fishing is especially harmful to large fish. This way includes many fishing lines that are connected to one boat. If these lines are joined together, they can reach one hundred kilometers long. They hold thousands of sharp metal hooks to catch fish. Longline fishing is especially common in the Japanese fishing industry. Records showed that Japanese boats used to catch about ten fish for every one hundred hooks. The study says longline fishing boats now might catch one fish per hundred hooks.
The scientists say business fishing can destroy groups of fish much faster than in the past. The study suggests that large fish can disappear almost completely from new fishing areas within ten to fifteen years. It could destroy ocean life systems.
It’s reported that the number of large fish is becoming smaller and smaller. That is not the only worry. What’s worse, they are smaller in size than their ancestors (祖先).
36. The underlined word published in the first paragraph means _______________________.
A.发表 B.发现 C.研究 D.调查
37. The number of big ocean fish has become smaller because _______________________.
A. the oceans are polluted B. the ways of fishing go into practice
C. the scientists pay little attention to them D. Japanese fishing boats catch one fish per hundred hooks
38. What do you think of business fishing
A. It should be encouraged. B. It needn’t be cared about.
C. It can balance ocean life systems. D. It may bring much harm to ocean fish.
39. Where is the passage probably taken from
A. A story book. B. A fashion magazine.
C. An environmental report. D. A sports newspaper.
40. Which of the following can be the best title for the passage
A. Longline fishing. B. Japanese fishing industry.
C. Modern fishing ways. D. Worrying situation of big ocean fish.
(C)
A popular shopping bag has been seen on the arm of some of the world’s most beautiful women. It sells at an official (官方的) price of ￡5, but as much as ￡400 online. The bag called “I’m Not a Plastic Bag” is made of cotton. It is so “hot” that now everyone wants to get one. It’s fashionable, and it’s green!
Supporters see the bag as a way to move away from throwaway (一次性的) plastic bags that are given away in large numbers by supermarkets every year.
When the bags were first sold, about 500 people waited in line to buy one. So far, 20,000 of the popular bags have been sold at the second largest supermarket in Great Britain. It is one of the ways to encourage shoppers to use the reusable (可再利用的) bags, rather than the plastic ones.
The bag has also become a must-have for many famous people who want to be fashionable, and at the same time care about the environment.
The designer of the bag has been asked to develop the bag by the “We Are What We Do” group. The group believes that each person in Great Britain uses about 167 plastic bags every year. It says that small lifestyle changes can have a strong effect on reducing waste and the environmental pollution. It also says that everyone should try his best to protect the earth from being polluted.
41. We can buy the popular bag at a price of ￡5 _______________________.
A. on the Internet B. all over Great Britain
C. at the designer’s home D. at the 2nd largest supermarket in Britain
42. According to the passage, the “We Are What We Do” group most probably means ______________________.
A. those who want to do something by themselves B. those who design the new bags
C. an organization that protects the environment D. an organization that helps others
43. The purpose of designing the popular bags is _______________________.
A. to make money B. to help famous people
C. to make women fashionable D. to reduce the environmental pollution
44. The last paragraph mainly tells us that _______________________.
A. the designer has been asked to develop the bag
B. it’s everyone’s duty to protect the environment
C. each person can use 167 plastic bags every year
D. the small lifestyle changes can’t affect the environment
45. When you go shopping, you’d better _______________________.
A. not use any bags B. use the reusable bags
C. use the cheapest bags D. use the throwaway plastic bags
(D)
This is a chart of a car’s fuel consumption during a certain day.
Time of day
Fuel consumption-燃料消耗 petrol- 汽油 litre-升
46. At what time does the car consume the most petrol
A. 9:00am B. 10:00am C. 2:00pm
47. How much petrol does the car consume at 3:00 pm
A. 25L B. 45L C. 10L
48. The above chart shows ______________.
A. how much petrol was needed to fill the tank
B. the speed the car was going
C. which trip used the most petrol
D. how far the car travelled
49. The driver bought petrol at ______________.
A. 8 a.m. B. 9 a.m.
C. 4 p.m. D. 6 p.m.
50. Throughout the day the car used_______________.
A.45 litres of petrol B. 40 litres of petrol
C. 35 litres of petrol D. 10 litres of petrol
四、任务性阅读(10分) (A)
I like winter best. 51 it is very cold, it is good for skating. I often go skating 52 Sundays with my father. When it snows, everything turns 53 . Trees and houses are covered 54 thick snow. How beautiful the world looks! My friends and I like to make snowmen. Sometimes we make snowballs and throw them 55 each other. That's a very interesting game. I like winter holiday very much because the Spring Festival is the happiest time of the year.
(B)
阅读短文，根据要求完成下面各小题。
58For those of us who are studying at school, the time of exams is very stressful and difficult. Some people find exam times so bad that they become ill, because they are afraid of failing; they are afraid of letting their parents and family down. If exams are really making you ill or worried, don’t hide your feelings. Talk to someone about it. Maybe you can speak to a friend, or someone in your family, or teachers at your place of study. If one person doesn’t help you, ask someone else.
How to get through exams Here are some advice:
Ask a teacher or tutor about how to review your lessons, and exam skills—how to work when you are in an exam.
Take short rests during your time of work. If your mind is tired, it will not remember well.
Plan your work: study at times when you know you will work at your best.
Get enough sleep, and eat healthy food.
You need exercise to work well. Walk, run, play sport—whatever you enjoy.
Stop thinking about the future and failing.
If you feel ill, talk to someone about your worries. But don’t be too relaxed! 59Some stress over exams makes you work hard for them.
If it upsets you to talk to your friends about an exam when it is finished, don’t do it! In fact, don’t even think about the exam you have finished. What is done is done. You cannot change what you have written!
To this advice, we could add:
If you are studying in the evening, don’t go straight to bed. Your mind will still be “going round and round”—thinking too much. Do something else, maybe walk or get exercise. Choose something that will relax you, and make you think of other things.
（一）根据短文内容简要回答问题。
56. Why do some students hate exams
57. What should you do if the exam upsets you when it is finished
（二）将短文中划线的句子译成汉语。
58. ______________________________________________________________________
59. ______________________________________________________________________
（三）请给短文拟一个适当的标题。
60. ______________________________________________________________________
五、交际运用(10分) (A)
阅读下面对话，从方框内7个选项中选择5个恰当的句子完成此对话，并将其番号填入其前括号内。
A：Are you free this week end
B： 61
A：Let’s go to Beijing Zoo!
B： 62
A：Because I hear eight pandas have just arrived there.
B：Really 63
A：They’re from Sichuan, and they will welcome the friends all over the world during the Beijing Olympic Games.
B：That’s great! 64
A：I also hear the eight pandas like to eat apples. Why not take some apples
B： 65 Can’t you see “No Feeding” in the zoo
A：Sorry, I forgot it. Well, remember to take a camera.
B：OK!
(B)
A: Morning! What can I do for you
B: We’d like to make a trip for a weekend holiday, please.
A: There are many travel paths.(66)
B: We’d like to choose Jinggang mountains.
A: It’s really worth visiting (67 ) .
B: We’re not sure. Which hotel do you think is comfortable
A: The Holiday Home is very good. What’s more important, (68 ) .
B: We don’t want to live in an expensive hotel. That’s what we’ll do.
A: (69)
B:OK .I’ll ask my wife to fill in this form. By the way, is it all right if we pay by credit card
A:(70) .Enjoy your weekend.’
B: Thank you.
六、阅读表达(10分) (A)
阅读短文，然后在文后表格内完成内容摘要。
Taohuayuan
It lies in Taoyuan County and is 23 km away from Changde. The temples here were built in the 10th century. During the reign (统治) of Guangxu (1875-1908) of the Qing Dynasty, a scenic spot (景点) appeared according to the article“On the Land of Peach（桃）Flowers”written by Tao Yuanming, a famous writer of the Jin Dynasty. The tour area today is made up of four parts－the Taohua Mountain, the Taohualing Hill, the Taoyuan Mountain and the Qinren Village.
Changde Poem Wall
Changde Poem Wall is a 3-kilometer-long riverbank alongside the Yuanjiang River, which is engraved (雕刻) with poems, handwriting and painting and it is listed as the longest wall with engraved arts in Guinness Record.
Tittle（标题）: 71. ______________ in Changde
Name Location (位置) For visiting
Taohuayuan in Taoyuan County the Taohua Mountain
74. __________
73. ______ away from Changde the Taoyuan Mountain
the Qinren Village
72. __________ alongside the Yuanjiang River poems
handwriting
75. __________
(B)
假设你是Joy Smith ，你现在住在中国海南省三亚市海边宾馆，邮编572000你想给住在美国Los Angeles 爱迪生街2876号的好朋友Henry White去信，邮编CA94403，请你为他写个信封。
七、书面表达(20分)
我国规定，从2008年6月1日起，所有的商场、超市和集贸市场不得免费提供塑料购物袋。对此，我市大多数商家都积极响应，但仍有一些店主不理不睬。请根据下面表格中的提示用英语写一篇短文，说明“白色垃圾’，的危害并就“限塑"提出你的建议。
项目 内容
塑料袋的危害 1．刮风时四处飘落，影响环境的美观；2．易被野生动物、家畜等误食，导致死亡；3．混杂在农田里影响农作物生长；4．燃烧时污染空气，等等。
你的建议 1．商家应遵守政府的规定有偿提供塑料袋；2．我们应……。(提出至少2条建议)
注意：1．短文应包括所给内容要点，可适当发挥。
2．词数为90左右，短文开头已给出，不计入总词数。
3．文中不得提及考生所在的学校及自己的姓名。
4．参考词汇：塑料袋plastic bags 农作物crops
It is required that from June 1, 2008, plastic shopping bags should be charged. Most malls and supermarkets are happy to obey the role, but still some shops ignore it. It is completely wrong. As we all know,________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Unit 11 答案
Lesson 1
一、1.bin 2.reuse 3.recycle 4.dirt 5.downstairs
二、1. C因此我们有三个垃圾箱。So后面不加标点。
2. B这是常识。
3. A be made into 被做成；be made of/from由……材料制成。
4. A 我用旧瓶子干很多事情。
5. A have been in 呆在某地；have been to去过某地； have gone to去了，没回来。
6. A 动词不定式作后置定语，a piece of paper是逻辑宾语，介词on 不能省。
7. B turn up调高； turn down调低； turn off关上。
8. B动名词作宾语从句的主语。
9. C downstairs在楼下，是地点副词，不和介词一块连用。10. A
三、(A) 1. B 2. A 3. E 4. G 5. D 6. C
(B) 1. changes 2. more 3. crowded 4. build 5. hope
Lesson 2
一、1.waste 2.reduce 3.future 4.neighborhood 5.necessary
二、1. A这是祈使句，用动词原形。
2. C每3秒钟，世界上就会有一个孩子因为没有足够的食物而死去。
3. B both两者都； either两个中的任何一个； neither两个中没有一个。Side用了单数，所以选B。
4. C to后加动词原形构成动词不定式，表示目的。
5. A be made of由……材料制成，能看出原材料； be made from由……材料制成，看不出原材料； be made in在什么地方制造，表示地点。
6. A put into放入；第二个空是动名词作定语。
7. B先行词是物时，定语从句的关系词用that或which。
8. A use sth. to do sth.用某物做某事。
9. B by+ doing通过某种方式。10. C
三、1. A。查理家境贫困，父母没有钱资助他上学，故选no。
2. B。根据下文，查理不负众望，说明他聪明好学，故选clever。
3. A。查理学习刻苦，并顺利完成了学业，说明他各门功课成绩较好，故选did well in。D选项介词用错，正确词组为was good at。
4. C。根据下文查理娶了金先生女儿为妻并精心呵护她，说明查理同意了金先生的请求，故选agreed。
5. D。根据下文妻子胖得不能走路，说明她食物吃得多。此外食物为不可数名词，因此只能用a lot of来修饰。
6. C。心脏不好，应去医院检查，下文指出为她检查的正是医生，故选hospital。
7. D。由于她的病是因营养过剩引起的，医生应让她不要吃肉，糖果之类的食物，故选not to。
8. B。她害怕忘了医生的指示，因此将其写在纸上，故选to forget。
9. B。与下文相对应，这里应填went out。
10. C。擅长烹饪的查理将菜买回之后，肯定要忙着为爱妻做饭，故cooking为正确答案。
四、1.to make 2.First 3.stories 4.to do 5.us
Lesson 3
一、1.useful 2.decrease 3.trash 4.significant 5.peaceful
二、1. C关系词在定语从句中作宾语，所以选C。
2. B现在分词形式，说明动作正在进行，表示伴随状态。
3. B由题意和经验可知，地球正处于危险中。
4. C enjoy doing sth.喜欢做某事。
5. B关系词在定语从句中作宾语，所以选B。
6. C关系词在定语从句中作时间状语。
7. C关系词在定语从句中作宾语，所以用which/that，不用where。
8. C先行词是人，而且关系词在定语从句中作宾语。
9. C关系词在定语从句中作地点状语，所以用where。
10. A先行词是物时，定语从句的关系词用that或which。
三、1. B形容雨下的很大，要用hard 这个副词，故选B。
2.B本题疑点在于let和warned这两个词，但若用let 后要加动词原形，而不是to do，故选B。
3.C根据句意选C，意为“我告诉他们说我一会儿就回来”。
4.Cleave oneself 意为“把某人单独留下”。
5.C主人公回来后发现孩子们不见了，她感到很惊讶，故她不敢相　信她的眼睛，选C 。
6.D意为“车门跟她走时一样还是关着”。
7.D这是一个倒装句,谓语动词应于后面的名词一致, 故选D。
8.C当发现孩子们不见后她感到很害怕, 故选C。
9.A根据句意，本句是一个由where引导的地点状语从句，选A。
10.B没有他们的踪影。
11.C根据下文可知答案选C，意为“问她是否看见过两个小女孩”。
12.A意为“尽力停止颤抖”。
13.D听到了后面发出一阵笑声，选D。
14.D根据前面的修饰词和上文可知选D。
15.A根据四个单词的意思和句意，可知选A。
四、(A)1 D由第二段第二句可知。
2 A由第三段可知。
3 B由第四段最后一句可知。
4 B由第五、六段可知。
5 C由最后一段可感受到。
(B) 1 D由第三段第一句可知。
2 C $11,000x4.4。
3 B由第五段第三行可知。
4 A通读全文可体会到。
5 A由第五段第四行可知。
Lesson 4
一、1.less 2.effect 3.follow 4.angry 5.glass
二、1. B我们应该减少污染。Reuse 再利用；reduce降低，减少； recycle循环，回收再利用。
2. B stop to do sth 是停下手头的事，去做另一件事；stop doing sth 是停下正在做的事。
3. A由题意知，第一空填形容词；第二空填名词。
4. C at risk 冒险，危险。
5. A effect效果，名词； affect影响，动词； work工作、起作用，动词。
6. B用较少的能源做较多有用的事。
7. B关系词在定语从句中作时间状语，所以用when。
8. B由than可知，要用比较级。
9. B keep doing sth. 保持一致干某事。
10. B get angry with sb.生某人的气。
三、1.that/which 2.that/which, he 3.who teaches 4.where 5. whom
四、81.Because they think their children can get a wider view, less academic competition or family honor．／Because they want their children to get a wider view，less academic competition or family honor．
82.The culture differences and language problems．／They have to face the culture differences and language problems．
83.Yes．it is．/Yes．
84.Yes，they do．／Yes．
85.The advantages and disadvantages of studying in foreign countries.／The problems of young students studying in foreign countries.／The good or bad points of studying in foreign countries(abroad).／The life and studying problems in foreign countries．
单元测试
一、1. A动名词和动词不定式作主语，谓语动词用单数。
2. B in future意为“今后，以后”，一般指从现在开始到今后，常指离现在较近的一段将来时间；in the future 意为“将来”，一般指真正意义上的将来，常指包括in future在内的较远的将来一段时间。
3. A use sth. to do sth.用某物做某事。
4. A宾语从句要用陈述句语序。
5. C There’s no need to do sth.没有必要干某事。
6. A先行词是物时，定语从句的关系词用that或which。
7. C由题意知，应用现在进行时。
8. C关系词在定语从句中作地点状语，所以用where。
9. A be angry with sb.生某人的气。
10. A 我们所需要的来自地球的重要东西正处于危险中。important things是句子的主语，是复数，所以谓语动词用复数。
11. A have been to去过某地； have gone to去了，没回来。downstairs在楼下，是地点副词，不和介词一块连用。
12. A be made of由……材料制成，能看出原材料； be made from由……材料制成，看不出原材料。
13. B It’s necessary for sb. to do sth.对某人来说做某事是有必要的。
14. C think of= think about认为，考虑。
15. B where可以用 in which来替换。Used to do sth. 过去常常做某事。
16. C clothing 和clothes 是服装、衣服的意思； cloth意思是布。
17. C任何东西都不要取过多的量，够用就行。
18. B先行词是物时，定语从句的关系词用that或which。
19. B关系词在定语从句中作定语，所以用whose。
20. A
二、21 C由题意知应用最高级。
22 B由题意知应用一般过去时。Happen 碰巧发生；take place按照计划发生。
23 C so… that… 如此……以至于……；so后接形容词或副词； such后接名词。
24 A at midnight 在午夜。
25 D 由题意知应用被动语态。
26 C由题意知需要帮助。
27 D等待帮助到来。
28 B disaster 灾难。
29 C唐山的重建工作几乎立即开始了。
30 C唐山又成了一百多万人的家。
三、 (A) 31 C由第一段第二句可知。
32 B由第一段第三、四行可知。
33 D由第二段第二句可知。
34 A由第二段最后两句可知。
35 C有文章开头和下面的分析可知。
(B) 36 A由magazine可以猜出。
37 B由后两段可知。
38 D由第一段前两句可知。
39 C通读全文可体会到。
40 D根据上下文可总结出。
(C) 41 C由第一段第二行可知。
42 C由第五段最后两句可知。
43 D由第五段第三句可知。
44 B通读最后一段可体会到。
45 B由第二段可知。
(D) 46 A由图可知。
47 A由图可知。
48 C由标题可知。
49 B由图可知。
50 B 45-10=35。
四、 (A) 51.Though 52.on 53.white 54.with 55. at
(B) 56. Because exams make them ill or worried.
Because they are afraid of failing/letting their parents or family down.
57. Don’t talk/think about it.
58. 对于我们这些在校学习的学生来说，考试的时候是最紧张、困难的时候。
59. 考试压力促使你为考试努力学习。
60. How to get through exams
五、 (A)61-65 BAEFC
(B)66．Which(path/one) would you like to choose
??67.Which hotel do you want to live/stay in
? 68.it’s quite/very)cheap/it’s not expensive
??69.Will/Could you please fill in this form
??70 .Sure/Certainly/Of course/Yes, it is quite all right
六、 (A)71. Places of interest/Scenic spots/Scenic area/Attractive places…
72. Changde Poem Wall
73. 23km/kilometers
74. (the) Taohualing Hill
75. painting
(B)
七、It is required that from June 1, 2008; plastic shopping bags should be charged. Most malls and supermarkets are happy to obey the rule, but still some shops ignore it. It is completely wrong. As we all know, plastic bags may fly with the wind and make the environment ugly. Worse still, animals may eat them by mistake and die. With plastic bags in the fields, crops can't grow well. Besides, burning plastic bags give out harmful gases ( pollute the air). So trying to use fewer plastic bags is important ( of great importance).
Personally (I think), all the shops should stop offering free plastic bags. We should try to use cloth or paper bags instead of plastic ones when shopping. What's more, whenever we see plastic bags in the streets or fields, we should pick them up and put them into dustbins. If every one takes an immediate action, we are sure to build our city into a more beautiful one.
story we one make do
Joy Smith stamp
Seaside Hotel
Sanya 572000
Hainan China
Henry White
2876 Edison St.
Los Angeles CA 94403
The USA
stamp
A．Why do you want to go to the zoo
B．Yes, what’s up
C．We’d better not.
D．Have a good time!
E．Where are they from
F．I’d love to go with you.
G．What about you
Though on white with atUnit 12 Review
一、单项选择(20分)
1. The students know the environment is very important, so they want to stop ______. The ______ is really serious now.
A. pollute, polluted B. polluted, polluting C. polluting, pollution
2. We were told on school that _____ is very important. We should put _____ things into recycling bins.
A. recycle, recycled B. recycling, recyclable C. recycled, recycle
3. —I love my teacher because of her ________.
—Yes, it is ______ of her to help us all the time.
A. kind, kindness B. kindness, kind C. kindly, kindly
4. My birthday is on April 21st. I’ll be fourteen _______ that day.
A. on B. in C. at
5. Why do you keep ______ to others in class, that’s a bad habit. Please keep _____.
A. to talk, quietly B. talk, quiet C. talking, quiet
6.—Where’s Egypt Could you show it to me on the map
—Here, it’s in ______.
A. Africa B. Asia C. Europe
7. Over the last year, I have helped at ______ the local hospital and at an elementary school as a volunteer.
A. both B. all C. every
8. It won’t rain today, you ______ take an umbrella with you.
A. need to B. have to C. don’t have to
9.—Do they _______ you for volunteer work
—No. I also give _______ lots of money to people in need.
A. cost, off B. pay, away C. spend, to
10. I will eat _____ food and do ______ sports to lose weight.
A. fewer, more B. less, more C. little, much
11. Our earth is _____. What can we do
A. in trouble B. at risk C. A and B
12. The man worked day and night, ____ he was able to buy the sports car.
A. because B. therefore C. but
13. I study hard all the time _____ be a nurse.
A. in order to B. so as to C. A and B
14. —Why have you dressed up beautifully
—There is a party tonight _____ our new leader.
A. in honor of B. for C. A and B
15. Do you know the girl ____ father is a doctor
A. who B. which C. whose
16. I’m going to the shop. There are _____ kinds of coats in the shop. But I only like the _____.
A. ninth, nine B. nine, ninth C. nine, nineth
17. So far, I ____ both at the local hospital and at an elementary school.
A. help B. helped C. have helped
18. Can you imagine ____ a volunteer What will you do
A. to be B. being C. be
19. Is this pen _____ you like
A. which B. who C. the one
20. I like my hometown in ____ I live.
A. where B. that C. which
二、完形填空(10分)
Tom grows the nicest vegetables and fruits and the most beautiful flowers in the village. Plants grow in Tom’s garden all through the __21__ and they are much __22__.
Tom cuts some flowers for his sitting room table, eats some fruits and vegetables, but he __23__ most of them in the market. His vegetables, fruit and flowers are so __24__ and beautiful that they sold much more __25__ in the market than those of other villagers.
How does Tom grow these beautiful things He is so __26__ that he just sits under his orange tree with his radio.
He __27__ the music all day.
That is quite true. Tom __28__ things in spring, summer, autumn and winter. After that he sits with his radio. And everything __29__. It is the music that does the work. Tom knows more clearly that music makes the biggest vegetables and the most beautiful flowers. Plants love __30__ as much as people.
21. A. week B. month C. season D. year
22. A. better B. worse C. less D. later
23. A. buys B. sells C. borrows D. lends
24. A. dear B. bad C. big D. small
25. A. politely B. quickly C. slowly D. carefully
26. A. angry B. busy C. tired D. lazy
27. A. listens to B. hears C. watches D. speaks
28. A. fills B. plants C. throws D. makes
29. A. does B. moves C. grows D. plays
30.A. work B. rain C. stories D. music
三、阅读理解(20分) (A)
One day Jack’s wife was cleaning out a closet（壁橱）.“Look at all these umbrellas,” she said to Jack. “There are eight and they are all broken.” “I’ll take them to the umbrella shop and have them mended,” Jack said.
Jack took the eight umbrellas to the shop and left them there. “They’ll be ready tomorrow,” the shopkeeper said.
That evening Jack went home from the office by bus as usual. He sat next to an old woman. She had an umbrella on the floor near her. When the bus reached his stop, he picked up her umbrella and stood up. “Hey!” the woman said. “That’s my umbrella!” “I’m sorry,” Jack said, and at the same time he gave the umbrella to her. “I wasn’t thinking. Please excuse me.”
The next day he got back the umbrellas from the umbrella shop and got on the bus. As he sat down, a voice behind him said, “You certainly have a successful day!”
He turned around and saw the woman whose umbrella had almost been taken by him the day before.
31. Jack’s wife found umbrellas in the closet.
A. eight broken B. broken eight C. eight new D. new eight
32. had the broken umbrellas mended in the umbrella shop.
A. Jack’s wife B. Jack C. The shopkeeper D. The old woman
33. That evening the old woman’s umbrella was almost taken by .
A. the shopkeeper B. Jack’s wife C. Jack D. the driver
34. The next day Jack saw the woman .
A. in the shop B. at home C. on the train D. on the bus
35. Which of the following is True
A. Jack had an umbrella shop.
B. The woman’s umbrella was Jack’s.
C. The woman thought Jack was a thief.
D. Jack bought eight umbrellas from the shop again.
(B)
The snow lasted until last Friday. I opened the window this morning and saw the sun but I felt much colder.
“You’d better go to work on foot , dear,”said my husband,“It is dangerous for you to drive.”
I thought him right and agreed. It would take me about forty minutes to go to my hospital. There was about an hour left, so I started, with a bag of sandwich for breakfast. In the streets there was thick snow and ice and the traffic was less than before and people walked carefully. Suddenly I saw a car going fast. The driver tried to pass the crossing before the lights turned red. Maybe he didn’t see two boys in the middle of the street. His car knocked down(撞倒)one boy and stopped just in front of the police box.
People crowded around the boy at once. I rushed out of the gathering crowd (聚集的人群)and was going to look him over. But a man pushed me aside and said,“Step back(向后退),please. I,ve had a course in first aid(急救).”
I had to stand and watch his ministrations(救助) for a few minutes. Then I said to him,“When you need a doctor, sir, I,m already here.”
36. It,s today.
A. snowy B. cloudy C. sunny D. windy
37. I left home this morning.
A. after breakfast B. before breakfast C. as usual D. too late
38. People walked carefully because .
A. it was very cold B. there was much traffic
C. they wore warm clothes D. there was much snow and ice in the streets
39. The driver knocked down the boy because .
A. he had something important to do B. he was afraid to be late for work
C. there was no policeman there D. he drove too fast past the crossing
40. The man thought .
A. only he could give the boy first aid B. the hospital was far from there
C. he was ready to help the police D. he had a lot of knowledge of medicine
(C)
Do you still get free plastic bags from the supermarkets Things have changed.
China has banned(禁止) free plastic bags at shops and supermarkets, and people have to pay for using plastic bags. The rule started on June 1. It came because our country tried to make litter less. Making super-thin(超薄) plastic bags has also been banned.
The Chinese once used about 3,000,000,000 plastic shopping bags a day, and they have caused pollution of the environment(环境污染). The bags have become a main cause of plastic pollution because they are easy to break and people throw them away here and there. So the Chinese people are encouraged to bring their own bags for shopping.
What kind of shopping bag is the best to bring Some students in Chongqing have a good idea. They make their own shopping bags. They used old clothes to make cloth bags(布袋), and send them to their parents as presents. They also ask their parents and friends to use cloth bags instead of plastic ones. They think it is their duty to protect(保护) the environment.
41. People in China have to now.
A. throw plastic bags here and thereB. collect plastic bags in the streetC. pay for using plastic bags at shops and supermarkets D. use free plastic bags at shops and supermarkets
42. China made this rule because plastic bags were bad for the .
A. environment B. litter C. shops D. supermarkets
43. The Chinese people are encouraged to bring for shopping.
A. no bags C. their own bags B. free plastic bags D. super-thin plastic bags
44. Some students in Chongqing .
A. ask their parents to make cloth bagsC. pick up plastic bags everywhere B. make cloth bags themselvesD. buy cloth bags for their parents
45. What’s the main idea of this article(文章)
A. Making super-thin plastic bags has been banned in China.
B. The bags have become a main cause of plastic pollution.
C. Some students in Chongqing begin to make their own shopping bags.
D. To protect the environment, free plastic bags have been banned in China.
(D)
Having Fun “Growing” and “Stealing”？
Recently, an Internet game has become a new fashion among young office workers and students．People can “farm” on a piece of “land” and “grow”，“sell” or even “steal” “vegetables”, “flowers”, and “fruits” on the Net . They can earn some e-money and buy more “seeds”, “pets” and even “houses”．
Joyce interviewed some young people．Here are their opinions．
Harold：I don't quite understand why they are so mad about the childish game. Maybe they are just not confident enough to face the real world.
Allan：I enjoy putting some “bugs” in my friends’ gardens and we’ve become closer because of the game．Having fun together is the most exciting thing about it．
Laura：You know, people in the city are longing for(渴望) the life in the countryside．It reduces my work pressure(压力)；besides, it gives me the exciting experience of being a “thief”．
Ivy： Well. it’s just a waste of time．Teenagers playing the game spend so many hours on it that they can not focus on (专注于)their study.
46．According to the passage, people can’t _______things in this game.
A．grow B. borrow C. steal D．sell
47．Among the people Joyce interviewed,______ likes the game while ____dislikes the game.
A. Laura, Allan B．Allan，Harold C．Harold, Ivy D. Ivy, Allan
48. From Laura’s words, we can guess that she’s most probably_________
A. a student B．an office worker C. a farmer D. a thief
49．Which is NOT the reason why people like the game
A. They are longing for country life．
B．They can have fun with friends．
C. The game can relax people and give them a new experience．
D．They are confident enough to face the real world．
50. Where can you find this passage
A. In a car magazine． B．In an advertisement．
C．In a newspaper D.In a science book
四、任务型阅读(10分)
(A)
On 26th January, the biggest earthquake (地震) in India took the 51 of 25, 000 people. In the morning, when everybody 52 holiday, earthquake began. It was about 7. 5 on the Ritcher scale. “There is nothing left between the sky 53 the earth any more. Everything has 54 down,” said one of the villagers alive. “There is no water, no food and no one has come 55 .”
(B)
Waste can be seen everywhere in the school. Some students ask for more food than they can eat and others often forget to turn off the lights when they leave the classroom. They say they can afford these things. But I don’t agree with them.
Waste can bring a lot of problems. Although China is rich in some resources (资源), we are short of others, for example, fresh water. It is reported that we will have no coal or oil to use in 100 years. So if we go on wasting our resources, what can we use in the future and where can we move Think about it. (3) I think we should say no to the students who waste things every day. Everybody should stop wasting as soon as possible.
In our everyday life, we can do many things to prevent (阻止) waste from happening, for example, turn off the water taps when we finish washing, turn off the lights when we leave the classroom, try not to order more food than we need, and so on. Little by little, everything will be changed. (4) Waste can be stopped one day, if we do our best.
任务1：根据要求答题。(请注意问题后的词数要求)
56. List the wastes mentioned in the first passage: (within 15 words)
_________________________________________________________________
57. What problems can waste bring (within 20 words)
(1) ______________________________________________________________
(2) ______________________________________________________________
任务2：将短文中划线的句子翻译成汉语。
58. ______________________________________________________________
594. ______________________________________________________________
任务3：请给短文拟一个适当的标题：(within 5 words)
60. ______________________________________________________________
五、交际运用(10分)
(A)
A) Who taught you how to play B) About three or four.C) Congratulations!D) Which is your favorite tennis club E) How long have you played tennis F) good luck to you.G) Here at the tennis club
Reporter: ___(6l)___You just won the first prize in the State Tennis Competition.
Michael: Thank you.
Reporter: Michael, how old are you
Michael: Seven.
Reporter: Seven! ___(62)__ _
Michael: Since I was three.
Reporter: __(_63_)_ _
Michael: My father. And I take private lessons, too.
Reporter: ___(64_)_ _
Michael: Yes, I’ve taken lessons here for two years.
Reporter: How many days a week do you play
Michael: __(_65)__ _ I want to practise every day, but my parents say three or four days is enough.
Reporter: Are you going to continue with your tennis
Michael: Uh-huh I want to be a professional tennis player when I’m older.
Reporter: Wish you greater success!
Michael: Thank you.
(B)
A: Excuse me. _____________________(66)
B: Certainly. Go along this street and turn left at the first crossing. The museum is next to the post office.
A: _________________________(67)
B: It’s about thirty minutes’ walk.
A: I see. ________________________(68)
B: Yes, you can. The No.9 bus will take you there.
A: By the way , _______________________ (69)
B: Over there. Look! The bus is coming.
A: Thank you very much.
B: _____________________(70) .
六、阅读表达(10分) (A)
Have you ever been ill When you are ill, your body becomes hot, and there are pains all over your body. You must be unhappy because of it. You don't want to work. You stay in bed feeling very sad.
What makes us ill It's germs.
Germs are everywhere. They are very small and you can't find them with your eyes, but you can see them with a microscope（显微镜）. They are very, very small and there could be hundreds of them on a very small thing.
Germs are always found in dirty water. When we look at dirty water under the microscope, we can see them in it. So your father and mother will not let you drink dirty water.
Germs aren't found only in water. They are found in the air and dust（灰尘）. If you cut your finger, and if some of the dust from the floor goes into the cut, some of the germs will go into your finger. Your finger will become big and red, and you will have much pain in it. Sometimes the germs will go into all of your body, and you will have pain everywhere.
71. Why is a person unhappy when he's ill
72. People can see the germs with .
73. Why don't parents let their children drink dirty water
74. Where are germs found？
75. If germs go into the cut of the finger, you will feel .
(B)
根据以下对话写一则电话留言：
(Today is May the fifth. It is 10:30 now. Li Lei’s mother is answering the phone)
A: Hi!
B: Oh, Can I speak to Li Lei, please
　A: Sorry, he isn’t in. Can I take a message
　B: Yes, please. This is Jim.
　A: Hi! Jim!
　B: Hi! Next Sunday is my birthday. Could you tell him to my party please
　A: OK. I’ll tell him.
　B: Thank you! Bye.
七、书面表达(20分)
请根据表格的提示，写一篇题为：“Saving the Earth”的英语短文。
注意：1、词数80左右。
2、标题和开头已给出，不计人总词数。
3、内容要点见表格。
人类的不明智之举 乱伐树木乱扔垃圾不加处理排放废物
导致的问题 1、土地沙化2、河水变脏3、空气质量差4、全球气温升高
建议 合理化建议至少三条
Saving the Earth
As time goes by, man is making the earth sick.
Unit 12 Review答案
一、1. C stop doing sth.停止做某事。由题意知，第二空应填名词。
2. B动名词作宾语从句的主语。由题意知，第二空应填形容词。
3. B由题意知，第一空应填名词，第二空应填形容词。
4. A具体到某一天用介词on。
5. C keep+ doing sth.保持一致干某事； keep后也可加形容词表示保持某种状态。
6. A由经验可知。
7. A both… and… 两者都。
8. C由题意知，没必要带伞。
9. B pay for为……付款； give away捐赠，赠送。
10. B 吃较少的食物，做较多的运动。Food 是不可数名词。
11. C in trouble有麻烦； at risk很危险。
12. B because因为； therefore 因此； but但是。
13. C in order to=so as to 意思都是为了。
14. B in honor of为……而庆祝； for为了。
15. C 关系词在定语从句中作定语，所以用whose。
16. B有9种外套，我只喜欢第9种。
17. C由so far可知，要用现在完成时。
18. B imagine doing sth.想象做某事。
19. C该句中缺少先行词和关系词，关系词在定语从句中作宾语时可以省略。
20. C where 可以用in which来替换。
二、
21. D根据下文汤姆春夏秋冬都会在园子里种各种植物，说明园子里一年到头都长着植物，故year为正确选项。
22. A很明显，汤姆的植物园比村子里其余人的应好得多，故应用比较级better。
23. B根据文意，汤姆到市场上去应是卖自己种植的花，水果及蔬菜，故选sells。
24. C这里应选择一个褒义形容词修饰汤姆的蔬菜水果，故只能选big。
25. B因为蔬菜水果长得好，所以在市场上卖得很快，故quickly为正确选项。
26. D根据下文汤姆没有花很多的时间去管理园子而是坐在树下听音乐，故选lazy。
27. A表示听音乐这一动作应用listen to 。
28. B根据文意，汤姆春夏秋冬在园子里是在种各种植物，故选plant。
29. C grows在这里表示园子里的一切在不断地生长。
30. D上文讲到音乐使得园子里的一切又大又美，说明植物也像人一样喜欢音乐，故选music。
三、 (A)31 A由第一段第二行可知。
32 B由第二段第二句可知。
33 C由第三段可知。
34 D由第四段第一句可知。
35 C由第四段第二行可知。
(B)36 C由第一段第二句可知。
37 B由第三段第三句可知。
38 D由第三段第四句可知。
39 D由第三段第五、六句可知。
40 A由第四段最后一句可知。
(C)41 C由第二段第一句可知。
42 A由第三段第一句可知。
43 C由第三段最后一句可知。
44 B由第四段第四句可知。
45 D 通读全文可体会到。
(D) 46 B通读第二段可知。
47 B通过这四个人的回答可以看出。
48 B 由It reduces my work pressure(压力)可以看出。
49 D由 Harold的回答可以看出。
50 D通读全文可体会到。
四、 (A) 51.lives 52.was enjoying 53.and 54.been pulled 55.to help
(B) 56. ask for more food，forget to turn off the lights
57. (1) We’ll be short of resources.(fresh water, coal or oil.)
(2) We’ll have nothing to use and nowhere to move./What can we use in the future and where can we move
58. 我认为我们应该对那些天天浪费东西的学生说不。
59. 如果我们都尽力的话，将来有一天浪费就不会发生了。
60. Stop wasting/No more wasting
五、 (A) 61-65 CEAGB
(B) 66.Can / Could you tell me the way to the museum ( Can / Could you tell me how I can get to the museum Can / Could you tell me where the museum is )
67.How long will it take me to get there 68.Can I take a bus / Can I go / get there by bus 69.Where is the bus stop 70.You’re welcome.
六、 (A) 71.Because his body becomes hot and there is pain all over his body.
72. a microscope
73. Because there are a lot of germs in it.
74. They are found everywhere, in dirty water, air and dust.
75. painful
(B)
七、 Saving the Earth
As time goes by, man is making the earth sick. People cut down too many trees and leave rubbish everywhere. Factories let out their waste without doing anything to it. This has caused some serious problems. For example, the land is sandy; the river is dirty; the air is less clean; even the temperature of the earth is rising, and she is shouting for help. What shall we do to save her My suggestion is that we should plant more trees, put the rubbish into dustbins and stop factories pouring waste into the air or rivers. We have only one earth, we should do everything to protect it, or we will regret.
enjoy help and life pull
Telephone Message
From:____ To: _____
Date: _______ Time: ________
Message:
Telephone Message
From: Jim To: Li Lei
Date: May 5th Time: Ten thirty
Message:
Come to Jim’s birthday party next Sunday.Unit 9 A Volunteer
单元词汇导学
1. some day 终有一天
2. take care of=look after 照顾
3. used to do sth. 过去常常be used to (doing) sth.习惯于…… be used to do sth./be used for doing sth. 被用来做某事
4. can’t wait to do sth.迫不及待做某事
5. It’s + adj.+ enough to do sth. 做某事足够……
6. in order to do sth./in order that/so that 为了……
7. do sth. for free 免费做某事
8. have a place to live in 有一个居住的地方
9. show sb. one’s love and care 向某人表示关爱
10. a great deal of 大量
11. get sth. done 让某人做某事
12. take away拿走
Lesson 1
学习点拨
本课交际用语
1. 询问Why were they doing that
2. 介绍The volunteers in India do more than just build houses.
3. 希望I want to be a volunteer like that some day.
名师授课
1. They will have a place to _____.
A. live B. live in C. living
解析 选B。to live in不定式作后置定语，place做逻辑宾语，in不能省略。
2. Susan didn’t watch the same show _____.
A. as they B. like them C. as them
解析 选C。the same…as是固定短语，介词后的代词要用宾格。
课后作业
一、词汇 单词释义
1. I hope to be a _______ to help more people. (person who offers to do sth. without being paid)
2. I got this ticker for _____ from somebody who didn’t want it. (for nothing)
3. I gave the poor boy some food, _____ he became happy. (for that reason)
4. His job is to ____ houses for the villagers. (make sth. by putting parts together)
5. He is the _____ age as his wife. (not different)
二、单项选择
1. Lucy! Do you know the person ____ the news
A. in B. at C. on
2. They are ____ the volunteers.
A. talking about B. talking to C. telling to
3. I think the ____ restaurant is my favorite restaurant.
A. India B. Indian C. France
4. The volunteers are building houses _____.
A. by free B. for free C. freely
5. The volunteers in Sichuan do more than ______ children.
A. teaches B. teaching C. teach
6. The volunteers often get _____ when they help people.
A. money B. food C. nothing
7. They’re building houses ____ the poor people in India.
A. help B. helping C. to help
8. —Please write down the words in your notebook.
— I have no pens to _____.
A. write B. write on C. write with
9. The workers have ____ a new bridge over the river.
A. build B. built C. building
10. I want ____ a volunteer ____ that ____ .
A. to be, like, some days B. being, likes, some day
C. to be, like, some day
三、交际运用
(A)
A: Excuse me. Could you tell me where the nearest museum is
B: Well, it's a bit far. You can go along the street, then take the first turning on the right. Walk on and you'll find one there. 　(1 ) 　
A: Oh, thanks. 　(2)
B: It should be open now. It opens at 8: 00 a.m.
　A: Good. 　(3)　
　B: Which bus I don't know. You may ask the policeman over there. 　(4)　
　A: OK, by the way, where's the nearest McDonald's, do you know
　B: Right behind you, sir. See that sign
　A: Oh, thanks a lot.
　B: 　(5)　
A. And can you tell me which bus I should take B. Do you know at what time it opens C. He must know that. D. You're welcome. E. What's wrong with you 　　F. You can't miss it. G. Let me help you.
(B)
A: Betty, we haven't been out for over a month. Let's go (1 ) this evening.
B: Fine. Where would you like to go To see a film or to watch a play
A: A (2 ) play is on this week. Let's go and watch it, shall we
B: The newspaper said it was the (3 ) play of the year.
A: How about the film "World Without Thieves" That should be (4.)
B: We've already seen it. Don't you r (5 )
A: (6) let's go to the neighborhood cinema. The film "Not One Less" is 7.
B: Good. What time does it ( 8 )
A: 15 minutes ago. We just missed it.
B: Well, I guess (9) we can do is to stay home and watch TV.
A: Now it will take me another month to get you (10 ) in going out.
Lesson 2
学习点拨
1. take care of 照顾 2. used to do sth. 过去常常
3. can’t wait to do sth. 迫不及待做某事4. be well known for 因……而众所周知
5. pay for 支付 6. be old enough to do sth.足够做某事的年龄
7. do volunteer work 做志愿者工作 8. both …and… 两者都
9. in order to 为了 10. show kindness to others 向别人表达善意
11. enjoy doing sth.喜欢做某事 12. at the local hospital 在当地医院
13. look forward to sth. (doing sth.)盼望某事（做某事）
14. like being a volunteer 喜欢做一名志愿者15. live close to 住在……附近
16. an elementary school一所小学
名师授课
1. My sister is ______ to go to school. She is very happy.
A. enough old B. old enough C. too old
讲解 选B。 enough修饰形容词或副词时,要放在所修饰词的后面，即adj./adv. +enough。C项不符合题意。
2. He got up early _____ catch the early bus.
A. in order that B. in order to C. so that
解析 选B。in order that和so that后面需要接从句，in order to后面接动词原形。
课后作业
一、词汇 单词释义
1. ______ we’ve no money, we can’t buy a new car. (because, as)
2. 15 minutes is _____ for you to have a cup of coffee. (as many/much as necessary)
3. His mother is a _____ in the hospital. (person who helps a doctor to look after the sick)
4. The beach is quite _____. (at a short distance from sb./sth.)
5. She always shows ____ to children and animals. (being kind)
二、单项选择
1. Zhai Zhigang is ____ to walk in space.
A. enough brave B. brave enough C. A and B
2. When I was a child, I ____ play with snowballs.
A. used to B. use to C. get used to
3. The teachers in our school are famous because of their _____.
A. kind B. kindness C. kindly
4. We live in the same _____, we are _____.
A. neighbor, neighborhood B. neighborhood, neighbors
C. neighborhood, neighbor
5. Which stress is different
A. amount B. nearby C. enough
6. —Have you ever been to Guilin
—Yes. I ____ there four months ago.
A. have been B. have gone C. went
7. —Please tell me who will take care of _____
—Nurses in the city hospital will.
A. sickness B. sick people C. being sick
8. —Do you know the writer of Harry Potter
—Yes, she is a teenage writer. She is known _____ his novel _____ the young.
A. for, to B. as, to C. to, for
9. —How long have you studied English
—_____ the last year, I have studied English.
A. In B. On C. Over
10. —I have no paper _____. Could you pass some pieces
—Of course. Here you are.
A. to write B. written C. to write on
三、完形填空
A thirsty bee went to a river to drink. As it was drinking, the bee was 1 away by the running water.
A kind bird saw that the bee was in 2 . It picked 3 off a tree and threw 4 into the water in front of the bee. The bee climbed 5 the leaf, and it was brought 6 to the land. The bee thanked the bee a lot and then 7 .
Not 8 that, the bird was sitting 9 the branch of a tree. It did not know that a man was shooting at it. But the bee saw 10 the man was doing. So it flew into the man’s 11 and stung(刺蜇) him. The 12 in the man’s eye was so great that he was not able to 13 the bird, and the bird flew away.
14 the bee, 15 life had been saved by the bird, was able to save the life of the bird.
1. A. flying B. brought C. flowing D. carried
2. A. trouble B. a trouble C. danger D. dangerous
3. A. a leaf B. leaves C. leaf D. the leaf
4. A. them B. one C. it D. this
5. A. onto B. on C. to D. at
6. A. safety B. safe C. saved D. safely
7. A. climbed away B. ran away C. flew away D. got away
8. A. long before B. before long C. after long D. long after
9. A. in B. on C. at D. by
10. A. that B. what C. which D. when
11. A. eye B. nose C. mouth D. ear
12. A. pain B. bee C. bird D. earache
13. A. shoot B. shoot at C. shoot to D. shoot on
14. A. In the way B. On the way C. In a way D. In this way
15. A. her B. the C. whose D. its
四、任务性阅读
Action star Jackie Chan is a whole hearted supporter of charities including UNICEF, Operation Smile and his own Jackie Chan Charitable Foundation. In 2007, he 1 much of his spare time to visit the 2 parts of China on his Dragon’s Heart Charity Missions. The Dragon’s Heart Foundation aims to meet the needs of poor 3 and the elderly in the hardest-to-reach areas of the country. Chan has made several 4 to these poor villages, bringing warm clothing, 5 and school supplies, and helping to build schools.
Lesson 3
学习点拨
现在完成时态
一、现在完成时由“have/has+过去分词”构成，主要有两个含义
①表示动作发生在过去，但与现在的情况有联系，也就是说动作或状态发生在过去但它的影响现在还存在。有时无时间状语，有时和一些表示不确定的过去时间状语连用，如：many times，just，yet，already，before，so far, by now等。如：
I have lost my wallet.(含义是:现在我没有钱花了.)
Michael has been ill.(含义是:现在仍然很虚弱)
He has returned from abroad. (含义是:现在已在此地)
②表示从过去某一时间开始一直延续到现在并还可能继续延续下去的动作，用于延续性动词，且句中常带有表示一段时间的时间状语，如：since，for two months, in the last few years, so far等。如：
Mary has been ill for three days.
I have lived here since 1998.
二、注意1：非延续性动词不能直接与for，since 等连用。要改变动词。
1.have代替buy
2、用keep或have代替borrow
3、用be替代become
4、用have a cold代替catch a cold
5、用wear代替put on
6、用“be＋形容词/副词/介词短语”代终止性动词
注意2：非延续性动词的否定形式可以与表示延续时间的状语连用。即动作不发生的状态是可以持续的。
名师授课
1. You don't need to describe her. I ______ her several times.
A. had met B. have met C. met
解析 选B。 首先本题后句强调对现在的影响，我知道她的模样，你不用描述。再次，several times告知为反复发生的动作，因此用现在完成时。
2.—I'm sorry to keep you waiting.
　—Oh, not at all. I ______ here only a few minutes.
　　A. have been B. had been C. was
解析 选A。 等待的动作由过去开始，持续到现在，应用现在完成时。
课后作业
一、词汇 单词释义
1. He studied harder to ____ his English. (become better)
2. I go to the _____ park on weekends. (nearby, neighborhood)
3. I went to _____ school before middle school. (primary, for young children)
4. They used to ____ English every morning. (do sth. again and again to improve)
5. Harbin is my _____ and I like it. (a place where sb. was raised)
二、单项选择
1. My son is 6 years old. He is ____ to go to school.
A. enough old B. old enough C. young enough
2. My grandma ____ near the river after supper, but now she is interested in dancing.
A. used to walking B. used to walk C. was used to walk
3. I helped people ____ show ____ our love and care.
A. so that, them B. to, they C. in order to, them
4. —______ to Japan
—Yes, and I will be back next month.
A. Had you gone B. Have you been C. Are you going
5. —_______ my dictionary I can’t find it anywhere.
—I _____ it on the shelf when I came in.
A. Did you see, have seen B. Have you seen, saw C. Did you see, saw
6. This is the second time you ___ here.
A. are B. have been C. have gone
7. She ____ here since she came here in 1995.
A. has lived B. have lived C. lived
8. —Where is Tom
—He ____ to the library.
A. has been B. goes C. has gone
9. I ______ my breakfast. I’m full.
A. have eaten B. ate C. am eating
10. How long ____ you _____ English
A. have, learn B. have, learnt C. have, to learn
三、完形填空
It is a thousand kilometers across that desert (沙漠). The road is 1 nearly all the way. Sometimes there is a deep sand. A driver must then put his foot down hard and drive through! There are three small 2 along the way. Vick reached the first place at ten o'clock p. m. He had his 3 in a little restaurant (餐馆) there. It was a warm 4 in August. Vick wanted to 5 through the night. The nights are warm enough in August, but the days are very, very 6 .
He left the restaurant at 11: 30 and drove over 7 hours. There wasn't a moon, but the 8 were wonderful. There was nothing else on die road. Vick thought, "It's an empty desert. No tree, house, man. " He could 9 the endless, white road in the car's headlights(车灯). A million stars looked down on him.
It was two o'clock in the morning. Vick stopped the car. He was two hundred kilo meters from the 10 town: "I'll light the cooker( 炊具)," he thought, "and make some tea. " He got out of the car.
He heard some sounds, ten or fifteen meters 11 . He could not see anything in the darkness(黑暗). A man said, "Good morning. It's a 12 morning, isn't it " The man came forward (向前),out of the darkness; out of the desert. Vick did not move. The man said, "You are going to 13 some tea, aren't you I often get a cup of tea at this time. It’s two o’clock. Cars always 14 near here at this time. Sometimes I get a 15 . Now listen, and I'll tell you a story. Then you'll give me…"
1. A. short B. good C. busy D. well
2. A. cities B. hotels C. villages D. towns
3. A. tea B. supper C. lunch D. breakfast
4. A. night B. day C. season D. month
5. A. live B. stay C. drive D. walk
6. A. cold B. cool C. hot D. warm
7. A. two B. seven C. ten D. fourteen
8. A. trees B. animals C. stars D. clouds
9. A. see B. ride C. pass D. find
10. A. home B. other C. next D. last
11. A. about B. from C. far D. away
12. A. noisy B. lovely C. sleepy D. sunny
13. A. eat B. make C. cook D. drink
14. A. leave B. stop C. meet D. run
15. A. bread B. car C. rest D. meal
四、阅读理解
(A)
Jill lived with her grandma. The old woman was strong enough that she could do everything herself at home.
As soon as Jill began to tidy the rooms or wash something, her grandma stopped her and told her to work hard at her lessons. Jill had to listen to her grandma and spent all her time on her study. So she went to collage at last.
Now the girl has left college. She did well in all her subjects and easily found work in Mr Brown’s company. She was sure Mr Brown would put her in an important position(位置).
On the first day the boss gave her a broom and said, “Your first work is to sweep the offices.”
“What ” the girl called out in surprise,“I’m a college student, you know.”
“I’m sorry I don’t know that. Here, give me the broom and let me show you!”
1. As Jill’s grandma was strong, .
A. the girl would live with her B. she did all the housework
C. she kept doing morning exercise D. she could help her with her lessons
2. Jill had enough time, so .
A. she put her heart into her study B. she had time to rest
C. she could play games D. she did not learn to do the housework
3. Jill easily found work because .
A. she was strong, too B. she knew Mr Brown
C. she could do everything D. she did well in her lessons
4. , so she was surprised.
A. Mr Brown didn’t know Jill was a college student
B. Mr Brown didn’t know Jill was good at her subjects
C. Mr Brown didn’t like Jill at all
D. Mr Brown told Jill to be a cleaner
5. Which of the following is WRONG
A. Jill hoped to have an important job. B. Jill couldn’t do any housework at all.
C. Mr Brown had to say sorry to Jill. D. Jill graduated from a college.
(B)
Are you looking for something fun and would you like to help others in your spare time Then join us to be a volunteer! We’re a non-profit (赢利的) organization. We have volunteer jobs of all ages. Anyone, from twelve-year-old children to people in their seventies can become a volunteer.
You can help people in many ways. Schools need help with taking care of children while parents are working. Hospitals need volunteers to look after children while their parents are seeing a doctor. Animal lovers can help take care of those dogs and cats without homes. There is something for everyone.
“As a volunteer, I don’t want to get anything. Seeing the children’s happy faces, I’m happy, too.” Said Carlos Domingo, an old woman of 62. “I often played computer games in my spare time before. Now I help older people learn how to use computers.” said another volunteer at the age of 18.
If everyone helps out a bit, we’ll have a better world to live in. Interested Call us 1-800-555-5756 or visit our website: www..
1. When do the volunteers help others
A. In their spare time. B. At weekends C. On weekdays. D. In the evenings.
2. _____ can be a volunteer.
A. Children B. Old women C. Anyone aged 12-70 D. Young people
3. Volunteers want to get _______ when they help others.
A. money B. computers C. everything D. nothing
4. Carlos Domingo does volunteer work with ______.
A. animals B. children C. computers D. older people
5. We can read such a passage ______.
A. in a newspaper B. in a storybook C. in a picture book D. in a textbook
Lesson 4
学习点拨
中考英语作文常用的名言和谚语
1. Better early than late.
宁早勿迟
2.It is never too late to learn.
学习永远不嫌晚。
3. Where there is a will, there is a way.
有志者事竟成。
4. Health is better than wealth.
健康胜于财富。
5. Parents are the first teachers of the children.
父母是孩子的第一任老师。
6. Time waits for no man.
时不待人。
7. Knowledge is power.
知识就是力量。
名师授课
1. Kate’s never seen Chinese films, ______
A. hasn’t she B. has she C. isn’t she
解析 选B。陈述句部分含否定词never，简略问句要用肯定式；又因Kate’s是 Kate has的缩写。
2. His uncle has already posted the photos to him. (改为否定句)
His uncle _________ posted the photos to him _________.
解析 already常用在肯定句中，yet常用在否定句、疑问句中，故填hasn’t, yet。
课后作业
一、词汇 单词释义
1. She is young and ______ very rich. (too, as well)
2. A _____ is coming. (weather with strong winds and rain or snow or thunder)
3. I _____ to buy a dictionary. (want)
4. He’s going to ____ all over the world. (make a journey)
5. China is in ______. (a place in the world that has countries like Thailand)
二、单项选择
1. She is ______ her kindness to the poor.
A. famous as B. known for C. A and B
2. My friend has taught it in this school ____.
A. since she come to this city B. two years ago C. for five years
3. Which other countries have you ever traveled _____
A. in B. / C. to
4. A big storm has _____ away many people’s homes.
A. take B. took C. taken
5. Tom _____ the CD player for two weeks.
A. has lent B. has borrowed C. has had
6. —This computer doesn’t work.
—Really I’ll have it _____ tomorrow.
A. repair B. repaired C. to repair
7. The poor boy’s father _____ since ten years ago.
A. has died B. has been dead C. died
8. I have _____ Stone Forest twice _____ I came here.
A. been in, for B. gone to, before C. been to, since
9. —Why do the people in this city remember him before
—Because he has done a great deal of _____ for the people and country in his ____ life.
A. works, both B. work, whole C. working, all
10. She has been to Hong Kong, _____ she
A. isn’t B. has C. hasn’t
三、同义句转换
1. John left his home ten minutes ago.
John has _____ _____ ______ his home for ten minutes.
2. I came here two days ago.
______ two days ________ I came here.
3. I was given a very special gift by an old friend.
An old friend _____ ______ a very special gift.
4. Mike told his friends that the stream was called the Golden Stream.
Mike told his friends that ______ ______the stream the Golden Stream.
5. Mike admires David Backham. I admire David Backham, too.
______Mike ______ I admire David Backham.
四、阅读表达
Cough MedicineShake well before use.Take three times a day after meals.Dose (用量): adults(成年人)—2teaspoonfulschildren(8-14)—1teaspoonfulchildren(4-7)—1/2teaspoonfulNot suitable(适宜的)for children below the age of 4.Store in a cold place.Use before Oct.2008.
1. Can a three-year-old girl take the medicine
2. How many teaspoonfuls of the medicine should a 10-year-old boy take in a day
3. Where do you think the best place for a family to keep this medicine in summer is
4. What will Mrs Smith most probably do with the medicine left after 10,2008
5. What should Mr White do before he takes some of the medicine
单元测试
一、单项选择(20分)
1. The volunteers are building houses ________ free.
A. for B. to C. at
2. —What do the volunteers do in India
—The volunteers in India do more than just _______ houses.
A. built B. building C. build
3. My mother ________ a story to me last night, it was very interesting.
A. tells B. speak C. told
4. Ton ________ go to that elementary school when he was a little boy.
A. was used to B. used to C. was used for
5. This math exam is very difficult, very ______ of them can finishes it ______.
A. a few, easy B. few, easily C. little, easily
6. —Do you know of Zhouzhou
—Of course, he is ______ known _______ his singing ability.
A. well, as B. good, for C. well, for
7. She is always ready to help _______.
A. the other B. other C. others
8. —Hurry up! We don’t have _______ , —I see.
A. enough time B. time enough C. A and B
9. —This is your present. —What’s this I can’t wait _____ it.
A. to open B. open C. opening
10. —_______ money are they getting for charity —A lot of money.
A. How many B. How much C. What
11. —Did you watch _______ on TV last night
—Yes, that is the program about some volunteers in Thailand.
A. a news show B. news show C. a sport show
12. —Where were you born
—I was born here. This is the place ______ I was ______.
A. where, rose B. in which, raised C. which, raised
13. —Do you know Susan’s mother
—Yes, I know. She was always helping others. She was well known _____ her kindness.
A. for B. as C. of
14. —I’m ______ to be a volunteer, don’t you think so —Sure you are.
A. old enough B. enough old C. too old
15. —________ other countries have you been a volunteer in
—India, Thailand and Canada.
A. Where B. Which C. How many
16. —Do they _______ you ______ volunteer work —No.
A. pay, for B. spend, on C. A and B
17. —We’d better buy some milk for Mary.
—I don’t think so, She has enough milk, She _____ any.
A. doesn’t need to buy B. needn’t buy C. A and B
18. —When did you ______ your hair ______
—Last night.
A. have, cutting B. have, to cut C. have, cut
19. —The little boy has been here for two years and he has ______ us.
—We love him very much.
A. made friends with B. make friends with C. made friends for
20. —What does he want to be
—He wants to be a musician. He is used to _______ _______ the piano.
A. practice, playing B. practicing, playing C. practice, play
二、完形填空(10分)
阅读下面短文，从短文后所给各题的A、B、C三个选项中，选出可以填入空白处的正确选项，并在答题卡上将该选项涂黑。
Dear Nancy,
Thanks for sending money to “Animal Helpers”. You have helped make ____21_____ possible for me to have “Lucky”, who has filled my live ____22_____ pleasure. Let me ____23____ you my story.
Being disabled people is something ____24_____ most people cannot imagine. Because I can’t use my arms or legs well, normal things like answering the telephone, opening and shutting doors or carrying things have been difficult for me. Then ore day last year, a friend ___25___ that she would like to help me out. She told me she would talk to “Animal Helpers” to see if I could get a specially trained ______26______.
After six months, I was able to bring my dog “Lucky” home. You see I’m only able to have a “dog-helper” _____27_____ your kind donation. “Lucky” has been trained to understand different instructions. For example, I say “Lucky! ____28____ my book,” and he does it at once. He is an amazing dog. Thank you again for supporting “Animal Helpers”. It’s very important that this organization doesn’t run _____29_____ money. Your donation is greatly appreciated and the money ____30_____ to help disabled people like me.
Best wishes,
Liz Smith
21.A. that B. this C. it
22. A. of B. with C. in
23. A. tell B. telling C. to tell
24. A. who B. that C. which
25. A. said B. spoke C. talked
26. A. cat B. monkey C. dog
27. A. without B. because of C. as
28. A. Take B. Bring C. Fetch
29. A. out of B. away C. off
30. A. used B. uses C. is used
三、阅读理解(20分)
(A)
From the first day he entered my junior-high classroom, James Crum lived in his own world. He was a student with few words.
Shortly after the Thanksgiving holiday, we started the Christmas collection of money for the poor people in our school. “Christmas is a season of giving,” I told my students. “By contributing(捐献) to our Christmas collection, you will help to buy food, clothes and toys for the poor people. We will start the collection tomorrow.”
When I called for the contributions the next day, I discovered that almost everyone had forgotten except James Crum. The boy walked slowly to my desk. Carefully, he dropped some money into the small box.
“I don’t need milk for lunch,” he said in a low voice. For a moment, just a moment, he smiled. Then he turned and walked back to his desk.
That night, after school, I took our contributions to the head teacher. And I told him the story. “I may be wrong, but I believe James might be getting ready to become a part of the world around him,” I said.
“Yes,” the head teacher nodded. “We must do something to help him. Look. Here is a list of the poor families in our school who most need help through the Christmas collection.”
To my surprise, James Crum and his family were the top names on the list.
31. What was James like
A. He was quiet. B. He was outgoing. C. He was confident.
32. What did they collect during the Christmas season
A. Money. B. Clothes. C. Toys.
33. Why did James say he did not need milk for lunch that day
A. Because he did not like milk.
B. Because he had no money for milk after his contribution.
C. Because he had given his milk to his classmate.
34. The teacher thought James _________ after his contribution.
A. was poor B. was a fool C. hoped to get along with others
35. Which of the following is TRUE according to the passage
A. The Christmas collection started before the Thanksgiving holiday.
B. Only James gave his money to the collection in his class.
C. James was not good at talking but he was kind.
(B)
Jealousy(妒忌) is a very common problem in daily life. It’s everywhere. For example, if someone does better than you, you will get annoyed because you want to be No.1. We may become jealous of a best friend’s top marks in an exam, or of the girl in art class who is praised by the teacher all the time. We get annoyed because these good things are happening to someone else but not to us.
It’s bad to feel jealous. We should be pleased with the things we have. But we still wish we had the money of this person and the talent of that person. Instead of sharing their happiness, we just feel jealous and unhappy with ourselves. And, too often, these feelings are expressed by speaking ill of the people we envy.
However, envy is also a kind of compliment to others. We see that other people’s styles and talents are not the same as our own. By comparing ourselves with others, we can know what we lack(缺乏). And we can turn this comparison, the envy of others, into a kind of power.
Therefore, being a bit jealous of others lets us know what we are like and what we want to be like. It can push us to become what we really want to be.
36. According to the first paragraph, why do you get annoyed
A. because you are an annoying person.
B. because others do something better than you.
C. because the teacher doesn’t’ like others.
37. From the passage we can know if you have good marks in the exam, a jealous person may ____.
A. make friends with you B. speak well of you C. speak ill of you
38. If we feel jealous, it shows that ________.
A. we aren’t pleased with the things we have
B. we wish we had little money
C. we get good marks in our exams
39. The Chinese meaning of the underlined word “envy” probably is “__________”.
A.赞美 B. 妒忌 C.崇拜
40. What should be the right attitude towards jealousy
A. It’s just a bad thing.
B. It’s a good thing.
C. It makes us know what we are like and what we want to be like.
(C)
Several years ago, a television reporter was talking to three of the most important people in America. One was a very rich banker, another owned one of the largest companies in the world, and the third owned many buildings in the center of New York.
The reporter was talking to them about being important.
“How do we know if someone is really important ” the reporter asked the banker.
The banker thought for a few moments and then said, “I think anybody who is invited to the Whiter House to meet the President of the United States is really important.”
The reporter then turned to the owner of the very large company. “Do you agree with that ” she asked. The man shook his head, “No. I think the President invites a lot of people to the White House. You’d only be important if while you were visiting the President, there was a telephone call from the president of another country, and the President of the US said he was too busy to answer it.”
The reporter turned to the third man. “Do you think so ” “No, I don’t,” he said. “I don’t think that makes the visitor important. That makes the President important.” “Then what would make the visitor important ” the reporter and the other two men asked. “Oh, I think if the visitor to the White House was talking to the President and the phone rang, and the President picked up the receiver, listened and then said, ‘It’s for you.’ ”
41. This story happened in _______.
A. England B. America C. Japan D. Australia
42. There are _______ in this passage.
A. two men and two women B. three men and one woman
C. three women and one man D. four women
43. The banker thought _______.
A. he was really important because he was a rich banker
B. the visitor to the White House was really important
C. the visitor who met the President of the United States
D. the reporter was really important
44. The owner of the very large company thought _______.
A. she was really important because she owned one of the largest companies
B. the banker was really important
C. the owner of many buildings in the center of New York was really important
D. the visitor would be really important if while he was visiting the President, the President would not answer any telephone call
45. The owner of many buildings thought _______.
A. he was really important because he owned many buildings in the center of New York
B. the owner of the very large company was really important
C. the visitor was really important if he talking to the President and the President received a telephone call for the visitor
D. the person who worked in the White House was really important
(D)
根据表格所提供的信息选择最佳答案。
46. ________has the largest population among these countries.
A. Italy B. Australia C. China
47. If you want to visit Big Ben(大本钟), you should travel to ______
A. Rome B. London C. Beijing
48. You can visit _________ in the country with the smallest population.
A. the Opera House B. the Great Wall C. the Leaning Tower of Pisa(比萨斜塔)
49. From the form, you can find ________ in Western Europe.
A. one country B. two countries C. three countries
50. Which of the following is TRUE according to the information in the form
A. Australia and Britain aren’t English—speaking countries.
B. Rome is a city in Southern Europe.
C. Canberra is the capital of Italy.
四、任务性阅读(10分)
(A)
After the 51 day, little Tommy came home with a very serious look on his face. He didn’t kiss his mother hello. Instead, he 52 straight to his room and started 53 . Books and papers were spread (铺开) out all over the room and little Tommy was hard at work. His mother was 54 . She called him down to dinner and as soon as he finished eating, he went back to his room, without a word. In no time he was back hitting the books as hard as before. This went on for some time, day after day while the mother tried 55 what was happening.
(B)
阅读短文，根据要求完成下面各小题。
Long ago, people did not need money. They lived on wild animals, fruits and other plants.
As time passed, people learned to raise animals and crops. Sometimes, families produced more than they needed, so they started to trade with other families. 58 Later, people began to use money as a means of exchange. However, it was not the kind of money we use today. They used shells, rice, salt, large stones, etc.
During the 600s B.C, people began using coins as money. They soon found that coins were easier to carry than goods and lasted a long time. Later, countries began to make their won coins.
The Chinese were the first to use paper money, probably as early as the 11th century. The Italian traveler Marco Polo saw the Chinese using money when he visited China in the 1200s. 59 However, European countries did not start using paper money until 1600s.
Today, we have many ways to pay for things. We do not use coins or paper money. Often, people prefer to pay for things by card. Paying with a card is easier and safer than carrying around a lot of “real” money.
（一）根据短文内容简要回答问题。
56. Why did people start to trade
57. When did people begin to use paper money
（二）将短文中划线的句子译成汉语。
58.
59.
（三）请给短文拟一个适当的标题。
60.
五、交际运用(10分)
(A)
Richard：Hi, Simon_________(61)Simon：Not too good． Richard：Well, the term exam is always more difficult．______(62)You’ll certainly do Better next timeSimon： But unluckily, I've never done well in the science exam.Richard: Come on, Simon! Let's talk about the football match tonight . It is much more interesting．Simon： __________ (63)Richard：Yes．It’s between the Chinese team and the Japanese team.Simon：Er … _________ (64)Richard：Why Everybody knows you are a football fan．Simon：The Chinese team has always played badly in the important matches, just as I have done in the important exams.Richard: Well，I think the team is making good progress．________(65)
(B)
A: Good morning, Doctor.
B: Good morning, my boy! ___________________ (66)
A: I’ve got a headache and a cough. I’m sure there’s something wrong with me.
B: _________________________ (67)
A: I’m feeling even worse now.
B: ____________________. (68) Oh, it’s a bit high. I’m afraid you’ve got a cold. How long have you been like this
A: Even since last night. Is it serious, doctor
B: No. ________________. (69) Did you eat anything for breakfast this morning
A: No, I didn’t feel like eating anything. What should I do, doctor
B: Well, don’t worry about it. Take the medicine three times a day. Stay in bed to have a good rest and drink more water. You’ll get well soon.
A: ______________________, (70) doctor. Goodbye.
B: That’s all right. Goodbye.
六、阅读表达(10分)
(A)
Children all over the world like to celebrate their birthdays. American children are not different. American children usually celebrate with a party. They invite their friends to join the celebration. The party may not be held on the date of their birthday if it comes on a school day. It may be held on the closest weekend instead.
Today two kinds of parties are the most popular. One is held at home. Parents make the house beautiful with balloons(气球)and colored paper. They prepare a special birthday meal. The children play games. Another kind is held away from home. Some are at a special restaurant. The children eat pizza and ice cream. The waiters also sing and tell jokes to the children. Other parties may be held at a park, or a movie theater, or some other places.
Every birthday party has a birthday cake with candles on top. There is one candle for each year of a birthday boy or girl,s age. When the candles are lighted, everyone sings the special birthday song: HAPPY BIRTHDAY TO YOU.!
As Americans grow older, their birthday parties change. In fact, many people stop having them. They say they would like to forget how old they are. Yet they like to remember the happy birthday parties of their childhood(儿童时代).
71. American children usually celebrate their birthdays .
72. If their birthday is on a school day, they will hold the party .
73. When they hold the party at home, who may be very busy
74. What will the waiters do if they hold the party at a restaurant
75. Why do many people stop having their birthday parties now
(B)
今天是5月4日青年节(Youth Day),你班晚上7:00 举办晚会,你下午4：30邀请赵老师参加,不巧她不在家,请根据上述内容给赵老师留一便条.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
七、书面表达(20分)
最近甲型HINI流感（A/HINI flu）流行,部分学校停课。你为你正在美国上学的笔友Mike的健康与安全担心。请立即给他写一封email询问他的情况，并给他提出防护建议。
要点：
一．询问
1.他的健康状况；
2.他们学校有无甲型HINI流感病例（A/HINI flu cases）；
3.他们是否还上学。
二．建议
1.尽量呆在家里，少去人多的地方；
2.勤洗手；讲卫生
3.多开窗，保持空气新鲜；
4.多吃水果蔬菜。
注意：
1.长度：60-80词；
2. 首尾已给出，不计入总词数。
Dear Mike,
From TV I know many A/HINI flu cases are reported recently in the United States, and many schools are closed as a result. I’m so worried about you.____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
So far the disease is not so deadly as it seems to be. Do be at ease! Take care and you’ll be OK.
Yours truly,
Li Hua
Unit 9 答案
Lesson 1
一、1.volunteer 2.free 3.therefore 4.build 5.same
二、1. C固定用法。
2. A talk to后接人作宾语； talk about后接谈论的内容； tell是及物动词，后接宾语时不需加 to 。
3. B印度餐馆。用形容词作定语。
4. B for free免费，固定短语。
5. C than是并列连词。所连接的动词形式要一致。
6. C由经验可知。
7. C动词不定式表示目的。
8. C动词不定式作后置定语。Pen是逻辑宾语，with 不能省。
9. B现在完成时的结构是：have+ done。
10. C want to do sth. 想要做某事；like是介词，像的意思；some day终有一天。
三、(A)1.F 2.B 3.A 4.C 5.D
(B)1. somewhere 2. new 3. worst 4. enjoyable/exciting 5. remember 6. Then 7. on 8. start 99. all 10. interested
Lesson 2
一、1.Since 2.enough 3.nurse 4.nearby 5.kindness
二、1. B enough 修饰形容词时，要放在形容词后面。
2. A used to 过去常常；get used to习惯于。
3. B由题意知，应填名词。
4. B neighborhood邻里，附近； neighbor邻居，指人。
5. B 6. C由four months ago可知，应用一般过去时。
7. B由题意知，是指照顾病人。
8. A be known for 因……而出名。
9. C over the last year在过去的一年里； 用在完成时态中。
10. C动词不定式作后置定语。paper是逻辑宾语，on 不能省。
三、1. D根据句意，蜜蜂是被水冲走了，所以选carried。
2. C in danger的意思为“处于危险之中”的意思。根据下文小鸟设法救蜜蜂的过程可以推断蜜蜂处于危险之中。
3. A一方面根据句意，从树上摘下的可能是“树叶（leaf）”,另一方面从下文The bee climbed __5__ the leaf，可以断定应选leaf。
4. C it指代上文所说的树叶。
5. A本题考介词的正确用法，climb onto是“爬到……上面”的意思，故选A。
6. D应用副词作状语，故选safely。
7. C根据文章的意思应为安全“飞走”之意。
8. D B、C显然不可选。根据上下文可知，事情发生在那件事情（that）之后，故选D。
9. B小鸟坐在树枝上，介词应用on。
10. B宾语从句中需要一个作宾语的连接代词，故选what。
11. A由下文可知它是飞向那个人的眼睛，使他无法射击小鸟。
12. A根据文章的意思应是疼痛使那人不能射杀小鸟。
13. A shoot是“射中、射死”的意思；shoot at是“瞄准、朝……射击”的意思，故选A。
14. D In the way是“挡路”的意思；On the way是“在路上”的意思；In a way是“从某种程度上”的意思；In this way是“以这种方式”的意思。
15. C 根据句子结构分析，此空后面是一个非限制性定语从句，故选关系代词whose。
四、1.used 2.farthest 3.children 4.trips 5.wheelchairs
Lesson 3
一、1.improve 2.local 3.elementry 4.practice 5.hometown
二、1. B enough 修饰形容词时，要放在形容词后面。
2. B used to 过去常常，后接动词原形；be used to习惯于，后接动词的-ing形式。
3. C so that为了，后接句子； in order to为了，后接动词原形。
4. C由题意知，是问你将要去日本吗。
5. B 你曾经见过我的钢笔吗？我进来的时候看见它在架子上。
6. B由the second time知，要用现在完成时。
7. A由since知，要用现在完成时。主语是She动词要用单数 has。
8. C由题意知，他已经去了图书馆，还没回来。
9. A过去发生的动作对现在产生了影响，要用现在完成时。
10. B由题意知，要用现在完成时。
三、1.A.沙漠中的路不可能好（从下文也可知）或繁忙，所以只有用short，well有语法错误。
2.D.从下文可知。
3.B.下午十点钟当然是吃晚饭。
4.A.上下文都可看出这时是夜晚。
5.C.从下文可看出他想趁着天不太热开车。
6.C.从常理和but一词可知白天天气很热。
7.A.从上文的11：30和下文的2：00很容易推断出。
8.C.天上没有月亮，但是有星星。其他选项天上不可能有。
9.A.除了天上的星星，他还能看到的那就是车灯下无边无际的白茫茫的路。不能用find，因为意思不符合。
10.C下一个城镇是他的下一个目标。
11.D fifteen meters away 距……远。
12.B.只有选lovely 。
13. B make tea 泡茶。
14.B.常有司机把车停在这儿。
15.D.有时不仅仅可以喝到茶，还能吃一餐呢。Bread是不可数名词。
四、(A)1 B由第一段第二句可知。
2 A由第二段第二句可知。
3 D由第三段第二句可知。
4 D由第四段前两句可知。
5 C由文章最后一句可知。
(B) 1 A由第一段第一句可知。
2 C由第一段最后一句可知。
3 D由第一段第三句和第三段第一句可知。
4 B由第三段第二句可知。
5 A 由文章开头可知，这是招聘职员者的广告。
Lesson 4
一、1.also 2.storm 3.need 4.travel 5.Asia
二、1. B be known for 因……而出名；be famous as作为……而出名。
2. C for+一段时间用于现在完成时； since后应该接过去时的句子。
3. C travel to 去……旅行。
4. C take的过去分词是 taken。
5. C for+一段时间出现，动词要用延续性动词。
6. B have sth. done 找人去干某事。
7. B since+过去时间点，用于现在完成时，动词要用延续性动词。
8. C自从我来到这儿，我已经去过石林两次了。
9. B work 是不可数名词。In his whole life 在他的一生中。
10. C现在完成时的反义疑问句，动词要选have 或has。句子前面是肯定，后面用否定。
三、1.been away from 2.It’s, since 3.gave, me 4.people, called 5.Both, and
四、1.No, she can’t. 2. Three. 3. In a fridge. 4. She will throw it away.
5. He should shake the medicine well.
单元测试
一、1. A for free免费，固定短语。
2. C than是并列连词。所连接的动词形式要一致。
3. C由题意知，应该用一般过去时。
4. B used to 过去常常，后接动词原形；be used to习惯于，后接动词的-ing形式。be used to后接动词原形，意思是被用来做某事； be used for意思是被用来做某事，后接动词的-ing形式。
5. B few修饰可数名词，表否定； a few修饰可数名词，表肯定；little修饰不可数名词，表否定；finish是动词，要用副词来修饰。
6. C be well known for 因……而很出名。
7. C others 别人。
8. C enough修饰名词时，可以放在名词的前面，也可以放在名词的前后面。
9. A can’t wait to do sth.迫不及待做某事。
10. B money是不可数名词，用how much提问。
11. A由题意知，是一个新闻节目。
12. B这就是我被养大的地方。关系词在定语从句中作地点状语，所以用where；raise 有抚养的意思。
13. A be well known for 因……而很出名。
14. A enough 修饰形容词时，要放在形容词后面。选项C不合题意。
15. B 你在另外哪几个国家当过志愿者？where 不能和介词连用。
16. A他们为你的志愿者工作付款吗？
17. C need作情态动词用时，用法是 need do sth.； need做行为动词用时，用法是 need to do sth.。
18. C have your hair cut 找人理发。
19. A make friends with sb.和某人交朋友。Make的过去分词是 made。
20. B be used to习惯于，后接动词的-ing形式。Practice doing sth.练习干某事。
二、 21 C it作形式主语代替真宾语to 不定式。
22 B fill … with…充满。
23 A let sb. do sth.让某人干某事，固定短语。
24 B先行词是something，关系词用that。
25 A said 后接说话的内容。
26 C由下文可知是一条狗。
27 B because of由于，因为；后接名词或名词性短语。
28 C fetch去拿来，是一个双向的动词。
29 A run out of 用完，用光。
30 C钱被使用，应用被动语态。
三、 (A) 31 A由第二段第二句可知。
32 A由第二段第一句可知。
33 B由下文可以猜到。
34 C由第五段第三句可知。
35 C由第一段和他以后的表现可知。
(B)36 B由第一段可知。
37 C由第一段和第二段最后一句可知。
38 A由第三段第三句可知。
39 B由第一段和第二段可猜到。
40 C由第四段可知。
(C) 41 B由第一段第一句可知。
42 B a television reporter ，three of the most important people in America.
43 B由第三段第二句可知。
44 D由第四段最后一句可知。
45 C由第五段最后一句可知。
(D) 46 C由表格第三行可知。
47 B由表格第五列可知。
48 A由表格第三列可知。
49 A由表格第五行可知只有一个。
50 B由表格第四列可知。
四、(A)51. first 52.went 53.studying 54.surprised 55.to understand
(B) 56. Because people produced more than they need.
57. In the 11th century.
58. 后来，人们开始用钱作为交换物品的方式。
59. 然而，在欧洲的一些国家直到17世纪才使用纸币。
60. Money
五、 (A)61-65 EDGCA (B) 66. What’the trouble with you / What’s the matter with you / What’s wrong with you 67. How are you feeling now 68. Let me take your temperature. 69. Nothing serious. 70. Thank you very much
六、(A) 71. with a party
72. on the closest weekend instead
73. Parents.
74. They will sing and tell jokes to the children.
75. Because they would like to forget how old they are.
(B) 　　　　　　　 4：30pm May 4
Dear Miss Zhao,
We are going to have a Youth Day Part in our classroom at 7:00. All of our classmates hope you can join us, I called on you at about 4:30 this afternoon. It happened that you were not at home. So I am leaving this note for you. Would you please come at 7:00 this evening You are sure to be warmly welcomed .
七、One possible version:
Dear Mike,
From the TV I know many A/HINI I flu cases are reported recently in the world and many schools are closed as a result. I’m so worried about you. Are you alright Are there any A/HINI flu cases in your school Do you still go to school everyday
To stay away from the disease, you’d better stay at home as much as possible and not go to places where there are many people. Wash your hands more often to keep them clean; Open the window to have more fresh air in the room; And eat more fruit and vegetable to keep yourself fit and strong.
So far the disease is not so deadly as it seems to be. Do be at ease! Take care and you’ll be OK.
Yours truly,
Li Hua
wheelchair child far use trip
one understand study go surpriseUnit 6 Silver and Gold
单元词汇导学
1.lonely和alone 2. grow up 长大
3.play with 玩…… 4. fly kites 放风筝
5. tell jokes开玩笑 6.go to the movies去电影院
7.keep in touch 保持联系 8.reply to回复
9.each other互相，彼此 10.be worried about 为……担心
11.all the time 一直 12. one… the other… 一个…… 另一个……
13.happy和unhappy 14.a piece of news一条新闻
Lesson 1
学习点拨
本课交际重在朋友之间的话题。
1. I miss her.
2. You should send her a postcard from China.
3. I’ll do that.
名师授课
1. ______ no one believed him.
A. Nearly B. Almost C. Hardly
解析 选B。almost可以与no, none, never等连用，表示“几乎没有，几乎从不”。 nearly与not连用，表示“远远不如，相差甚远”。Almost not=hardly,此句可以换成同义句为Hardly anybody believed him.
2. Tom likes making ______ models.
A. boat B. boats C. boat’s
解析 选A。名词boat作定语要用单数。例如，banana trees.
课后作业
一、词汇
（A）单词释义
1. It’s _____ time to start. (nearly)
2. Did you _____ up together (increase in height)
3. Look, they _____ the kites over there. (more through the air as a bird does)
4. You should _____ a card to her. (cause sb. or sth. to go or be carried without going oneself)
5. My mother is _____ cooking. (having much to do )
(B)词性转换
1. She _____ because she didn’t see her mother. (cry)
2. He _____ watching football match when he was young. (enjoy)
3. Kate is my ____ classmate. (three grade)
4. They are playing with _____ cars. (toy)
5. He ____ to the zoo once a week. (go)
二、单项选择
1. Jim is my best friend. We study and play together _____ every day.
A. most B. almost C. hardly
2. Which stress is different
A. almost B. neighbor C. material
3.—What did you usually do after school？
—We ______.
A. fly kites B. flew kites C. are flying kites
4.—Look! The children ____ toy cars.
—How happy they are!
A. playing with B. play C. are playing with
5.—Mom, I want to go abroad when I ______ . —Oh, really
A. grew up B. grow C. grow up
6.—Who _____ the letter to you —It’s _____ Mary, my neighbor.
A. sent, from B. send, to C. writes, with
7.—What an exciting match! Don’t _____ it. —I won’t.
A. lost B. miss C. lose
8.—I _____ broke it yesterday. —Be careful.
A. nearly B. almost C. both A and B
9.—_____ do you see your friend？—Once a week.
A. How often B. How long C. How soon
10.—I like Tom. He always _____ jokes. —Me, too.
A. say lot of B. speak a lot of C. tells lots of
三、交际运用
（A）?
A: Hello, Li Lei. Why didn’t you come to the picnic yesterday
??B: My pen friend Qiu Tian came to see me.?
??A: Qiu Tian What a nice name! (1)______________________________ ?
??B: He’s quite good, helpful and honest. He does well in his lessons. We’re getting on well with each other.?
??A: So you have the same interests
??B: Yes, he likes swimming, and so do I. Also, we both like computers, music and collecting.?
??A: That sounds great. (2)________________________________ ?
??B: He’s handsome, tall and strong. Easy to get on with.?
??A: (3)_______________________________ when he comes next time
??B: No problem. My friend is your friend. By the way, I heard your father was not well. (4)_____________________________ How is he ?
??A: His left leg was hurt in a car accident. Nothing serious now. He’s much better.?
??B: (5)_____________________________. I hope he’ll be better soon.
??A: Thank you.
??
(B)
A: What are reading, Susan
B: It’s a postcard from my oldest friend. Her name is Judy. __1__ I miss her. We often ate ice cream together after school.
A: 2 You should send her postcards from China.
B: 3
A: I’m lucky. My oldest friend is my neighbor.
B: When did you meet our friend
A: I met him almost ten years ago. 4
B: I guess you see him quite often.
A: 5 We are both very busy. I see him about once a week.
Lesson 2
学习点拨
1.keep in touch 保持联系 2.be lonely 孤独
3.each other互相，彼此 4.be worried about 担心，着急
5.all the time 一直 6.reply to 回复
7.be sure 确信 8.as…as 和……一样
9. be happy to do 很高兴感某事 10.hope that 希望
11. one… the other… 一个……另一个……
名师授课
1. She never _____ my e-mails.
A. reply B. reply to C. answer to
解析 选B。answer和reply都表示“回答”，answer可直接加宾语，而reply要加to。
2. The old man lives ____ , but he never feels _____.
A. lonely, lonely B. alone, alone C. alone, lonely
解析 选C。lonely是表示“孤独，寂寞”；alone是表示“单独，独自”。分析题意可知。
课后作业
1、 词汇 单词释义
1.______ is playing with him. He is very lonely. (no person)
2. “Time is money”. This is an old _____. (well-known phrase)
3. Linda likes wearing a _____ necklace. (valuable grey material from the ground)
4. Did you hear the _____ about Li Lei (information)
5. We study _____. (in company)
2、 单项选择
1. Gold is ____ than silver.
A. as expensive as B. more expensive C. less expensive
2. The poor man lives _____ in a village, but he doesn’t feel _____ because of his dog.
A. alone, alone B. lonely, alone C. alone, lonely
3. My father will _____ Hong Kong for further study, next Monday he will ____.
A. move away, move to B. move to, move away C. move, move to
4. There is an old _____ that “A friend indeed is a friend in need”.
A. said B. saying C. say
5.—You look unhappy. What are you ____
—My grandma is ill but my parents are not at home.
A. angry with B. tired of C. worried about
6. — She never _____ my e-mails after she went to Hong Kong.
— Maybe she was busy.
A. wrote to B. replied to C. heard from
7. —Would you like to say ____ about your best friend
—Sorry, I’m afraid I can’t.
A. something B. anything C. nothing
8. —Do you keep in touch ____ letters
— No, we often keep in touch ____ phone.
A. by, through B. by, by C. through, by
9. Liu Chang and Wang Tao are good friends. They studied together _____.
A. on time B. all times C. all the time
10. How do you greet _____ in your country
A. the other B. each other C. another
三、完形填空
Charlie came from a poor village. His parents had __1__ money to send him to school when he was young. The boy was very sad. Mr. King lived next to him. He found the boy __2__ and had pity on him and lent some money to him. So the boy could go to school. He studied hard and __3__ all his lessons. When he finished middle school, the man introduced him to his friend in the town. And he began to work.
Once Mr. King was seriously hurt in an accident. Dying, he asked Charlie to take care of his daughter, Sharon. The young man __4__ and several years later he married the girl. He loved her very much and tried his best to make her happy. He often bought beautiful clothes and delicious food for her. He was good at cooking and he cooked __5__ for her. So she became very fat and she felt it difficult to walk. And one day she found there was something wrong with her heart. Her husband wasn’t at home and she had to go to __6__ at once. The doctors looked her over and told her __7__ eat meat, sugar, chocolate and things like these. She was afraid __8__ the doctor’s words and wrote all the names of the food on the paper. When she got home, she put the list on the table and __9__. When she returned home that afternoon, she found many kinds of food: meat, sugar and chocolate in the kitchen. Charlie was busy __10__ there. As soon as he saw her, he said happily, “I’ve bought all the food you like, dear!”
1. A. no B. some C. much D. enough
2. A. lazy B. clever C. careful D. hard
3. A. did well in B. was poor at C. was working D. was good for
4. A. was angry B. thought hard C. agreed D. said “No.”
5. A. a little B. a few C. many D. a lot
6. A. rest B. sleep C. hospital D. work
7. A. should B. would C. to D. not to
8. A. to remember B. to forget C. to catch D. to teach
9. A. slept B. went out C. cooked D. ate
4、 10. A. reading B. seeing C. cooking D. writing
5、 任务性阅读
write, bright, something, into, but
It was Friday that day. The sun was shinning 1 . Mrs. Zhang went to buy a fish in a fish shop. She didn’t know how to cook it. So she asked the shopkeeper 2 down the way of cooking on a piece of paper. Then she put the paper 3 her pocket and left the shop happily with the fish.
On her way home, a white cat took the fish away from her and ran away at once. Mrs. Zhang ran after the cat 4 she couldn’t catch it. But suddenly she remembered 5 and laughed. She shouted to the cat loudly, “You don’t know how to cook the fish. The paper is still in my pocket!”
Lesson 3
学习点拨
一般过去时
一般过去时表示过去某个特定时间发生，也可以表示过去习惯性的动作。一般过去时不强调动作对现在的影响，只说明过去。 句式：主语+过去动词+其他
一般过去时常与表示过去的时间状语或从句连用，如：yesterday, last week, in 1993, at that time, once, during the war, before, a few days ago, when 等等。
1）　　 动词的过去式词尾变化如下：
一般情况 +ed
以e字母结尾的辅音 +d
以辅音字母＋y结尾 去y变i＋ed
重读闭音节结尾的单词，末尾只有一个辅音字母 双写词尾字母+ed
　　注：不规则变化：如：make-made， have/has -- had, eat--ate ,see—saw 等。
2）一般过去时态的肯定句、否定句和疑问句形式（以be和like为例）：
主 语 肯 定 式 否 定 式 疑 问 式
第一、二人称和第三人称复数以及名词复数 I was a student.We/You/ They were students.He/ She was a student. I / We/ You/ They/ liked music.Many people liked music. I was not a student.We/You/ They were not students.He/ She was not a student.I / We/ You/ They/ didn’t like music.Many people didn’t like music. Were you a student.Were you/ they students Was he/ she a student Did you/ they like music Did many people like music
名师授课
1． Mr. Mott is out. But he ______ here a few minutes ago.
A. was B. is C. will be D. would be
解析 选A。十分钟前发生的动作， 应该用一般过去时。
2．— Hi, Tom.
　— Hello, Fancy. I ______ you were here.
　　A. don't know B. won't think C. think D. didn't know
解析 选A。虽然句中没有明确的时间状语， 但是可以通过上下文语境判断出， 这句话指的是我这段时间并不知道， 你前一阵子在这儿。 所以应选A。
课后作业
一、词汇 单词释义
1. Things made of _____ are expensive. (valuable yellow material from the ground)
2. Are you _____ (sad, because of no friendship)
3. Her friend is moving. She is ______ . (not happy, sad)
4. I was sad, but I did not ____ . (have water fall from one’s eyes)
5. Please don’t _______ about me. (be troubled)
二、单项选择
1. When my mother _____ me the bad news, I ______.
A. tell, cry B. told, cried C. will tell, cried
2. I joined two teams. _____ is the baseball team, _____ is the basketball team.
A. one, the one B. one, another C. one, the other
3. I met John when I began the _____ grade in the primary school.
A. first B. one C. two
4. The _____ watch is so beautiful. Is it made of ______
A. gold, gold B. golden, gold C. golden, golden
5. _____ friends with others is good for us.
A. Making B. Make C. To making
6. I ______ to the Great Wall three years ago.
A. have gone B. went C. go
7. Where _____ you in July last year？
A. was B. are C. were
8. —Where did you _____ —We ______ the village at five in the afternoon.
A. arrive, got to B. arrived, got C. arrive at, got to
9. Jim ____ his coat and went out.
A. puts on B. put on C. wears
10. He spoke ____ slowly that all of us ____ understand him.
A. so, can B. as, could C. too, could
三、完形填空
Why do I want to go to college No one has ever asked me __1 _ a question. But many times I have asked myself. I have __2__ a whole variety of reasons. __3__ important reason is that I want to be a better man.
Many things make human beings different __4__ or better than or even superior to animals.
One of the most important things is __5__ . If I fail to receive higher education, my education __6__. As I want to be a fully __7__ man, I must get a well-rounded education, which good colleges and universities are supposed to __8__. I know one can get educated in many ways, but colleges and universities are __9__ the best places to teach me how to educate myself. Only when I am well-educated, will I be a better human being and __10__ fit into society.
1. A. quite B. so C. such D. another
2. A. come up with B. agreed with C. been fed up with D. got on well with
3. A. Most B. The most C. More D. Much
4. A. to B. around C. between D. from
5. A. education B. weather C. temperature D. science
6. A. finished B. don’t finish C. will not finish D. has finished
7. A. develop B. developed C. developing D. experience
8. A. improve B. graduate C. hear D. provide
9. A. between B. among C. inside D. outside
10. A. can good B. may better C. be able to better D. be able to best
四、阅读理解
(A)
Whenever the sun dropped and the blue sky came up, my father and I used to climb the mountain near my house. Walking together, my father and I used to have a lot of conversations through which I learned lessons from his experiences. He always told me, “You should have goals like climbing the mountain.” Without the mountain-climbing that we both enjoyed, we couldn’t have enough time to spend together because my father was very busy. I really got a lot from mountain-climbing. It gave me time to talk with my father and to be in deep thought as well as develop my patience (耐力).
Once we climbed a very high mountain. It was so challenging for me because I was only ten years old. During the first few hours of climbing, I enjoyed the flowers and trees, and the birds’ singing, but as time passed, I got a pain in both of my legs. I wanted to quit climbing. In fact, I hated it at that moment, but my father said to me, “You can always see a beautiful sky at the top of the mountain, but you can’t see it before you reach the top. Only there at the top, can you see all of the nice things, just like in life.”
At that time, I was too young to understand his words. But later after that, I got new hope and confidence (信心). I found myself standing at the top of the sky, which was as clear as crystal (水晶).
1. The passage tells us that mountain-climbing was ________ for Father and Son.
A. hard B. enjoyable C. painful D. comfortable
2. The word “quit” in the passage means “________”.
A. carry on B. put off C. give up D. pick up
3. Which of the following is similar in meaning to the father’s words in the second paragraph
A. You will get all you need at the top of the mountain.
B. The sky is always as clear as crystal.
C. You can find life is full of nice things.
D. Never give up half-way.
4. We can infer (推断) from the last paragraph that ________.
A. the writer was very successful in his life
B. the writer didn’t reach the top of the mountain
C. though the writer was young, he could understand his father
D. the writer used to stop half-way when he climbed the mountain
5. The best title for the passage is“________”.
A. Reaching the Top of the Mountain B. Enjoy the Beautiful Views
C. Conversations between Father and Son D. Father and I
(B)
If you live in the United States, the law says you can’t have a full-time job until you are 16 years old. At 14 or 15, you can work part-time after school or on weekends, and during summer you can work 40 hours each week. Does all that mean that if you are younger than 14, you can’t earn (赚) your own money Of course not! Kids who are between the ages of 10 and 13 can earn money by doing lots of things.
Valerie, 11, told us that she made money by cleaning up other people’s yards. Lena, 13, makes money by knitting (织) dog sweaters and selling them to her neighbors, and Reisa said she had started taking art classes and showing her work to people. People have asked her to draw pictures for them and they pay her for them. Jasmine, 13, writes articles for different magazines!
Earning is learning. By working to earn your own money, you are learning the skills you will need to succeed in life. These skills can include things like getting along with others, using technology (技术) and using your time. Some people think that asking for money is a lot easier than earning it; however, when you make your own money, you don’t have to depend on someone else. The five dollars that you earn will probably make you feel a lot better in your hand than the twenty dollars you ask for.
1. Kids can have full-time jobs at the age of in the USA.
A. 17 B. 14 C. 13 D. 10
2. If you are 15 years old, you can’t work ________.
A. after school B. on weekends C. during summer D. on weekdays
3. Reisa makes money by .
A. cleaning up other people’s yards
B. drawing pictures for others
C. writing articles for different magazines
D. knitting dog sweaters and selling them to her neighbors
4. According to the passage, which of the following is Not True
A. You are learning how to succeed by working in your teens.
B. Kids are encouraged to live independently in the USA.
C. Earning one’s money is better than asking for money from others.
D. Kids don’t need to get along with others when making money.
5. From the passage we know that ________.
A. parents won’t let their children earn their own money
B. it’s hard for kids under 14 years old to earn money in the USA
C. kids can learn skills if they try to earn money on their own
D. if kids try to earn money, they won’t have enough time to study
Lesson 4
学习点拨
关于朋友的写作素材
1. A friend in need is a friend indeed. 患难见真情。
2. A friend is easier lost than found. 得朋友难，失朋友易。
3. A friend is never known till a man has need. 需要之时方知友。
4. A friend without faults will never be found. 没有十全十美的朋友。
5. A hedge between keeps friendship green. 君子之交淡如水。
名师授课
1. I have ten rulers. Five of them are long, ____ are short.
A. the other B. the others C. others
解析 选B。others 是other的复数。 the others 是the other的复数。 加上定冠词the 是特指“其余的全部，余下所有的；（两个中的）另外一个”。不加the是范指“其它/余的，别的”。others和some对比使用时可译成“有些”。
2. Who can _____ the match
A. beat B. lose C. win
解析 选C。win和beat都可用作及物动词，作"赢"、"战胜"讲时，其区别主要在于宾语的不同：充当win的宾语的是比赛、战争、奖品、金钱等名词；充当beat的宾语的则是比赛的对手，即指人或球队的名词或代词。
课后作业
一、词汇 单词释义
1. The Greens will _____ to China (change from one place to another)
2. The first person to the top is ____. (a person who wins the game)
3. Please make a _____ answer. (right)
4. How often do you visit your _____ (parents of one’s parents)
5. We knew each other when we _____ first grade. (begin)
二、单项选择
1. I keep in touch ____ my friends _____ letters.
A. with, with B. with, through C. through, with
2. He met the teachers when he _____ his first grade.
A. start B. started C. starts
3. What happened _____ of the movie？
A. at the end B. in the end C. by the end
4. This Sunday, when I walked on the street, I _____ my English teacher.
A. happen to meet B. happened to meet C. happened meet
5. This term, I _____ the school basketball team and got new friends.
A. joined B. joined in C. join
6. —_____ did you study
—I studied for almost three hours.
A. How long B. How far C. How often
7. I wrote a postcard _____ my good friend best wishes.
A. to give B. gave C. giving
8. Lucy is new in our class. She doesn’t have _____ friend.
A. some B. any C. /
9. It’s raining. I won’t leave ____ it stops.
A. until B. since C. while
10. Which word has a different stress
A. another B. unhappy C. tennis
三、句型转换
1. Things made of gold are expensive.(同义句)
Things ______ _____ made of gold are expensive.
2. What were you worried about (同义句)
What ______ you ______ about
3. We will have to keep in touch _____ _____.(同义句)
We will have to keep in touch _____ _____.
4. Gold is more expensive than silver. (同义句)
Silver is _____ _____ than gold.
5. She was unhappy this morning.（反义疑问句）
She was unhappy this morning, _____ _____
四、阅读表达
阅读下列短文，完成短文后面的信息表（词数不限）。
If you are a teenager and looking for a way to make money, you may consider getting a job. Not sure what kind of exciting jobs may be out there Well, here are some jobs for teenagers that you may find fun to make some money.
Walking Dogs
Enjoy hanging out with your dog Well, there’s a way to make money and have fun too. Check with neighbors who have dogs. Ask if they need someone to walk their dogs. Many people are willing to pay to have someone else walk their dogs each day.
Using Your Drawing Skills
For those great artists, drawing skills may be able to bring some money. Check around with local businesses that may need artwork done or people looking for artwork done for parties. You can easily spend a few hours working on some artwork and make money.
Babysitting or Coaching
If you enjoy hanging out with children, babysitting or caching can be a fun way to make money. If you have neighbors or friends with families that have children, consider seeing if they need a babysitter or tutor.
Sports Instruction
Sports instruction is yet another fun job opportunity. If you’ve done well in a sport, you may be able to help others. Check with parents in your area to see if they may want their children to have some instruction in the sport you’re good at.
As you can see, there are a lot of fun jobs that you can do. You can make money and have fun.
1. __________________________ for Teenagers
2. _____________________ Check with neighbors with dogs and ask if they need someone to walk their dogs.
Using Your Drawing Skills Check with 3. ________________ that may need artwork done.
Babysitting or Coaching Ask neighbors or friends that have 4. _______________ if they need a babysitter or tutor.
Sports Instruction Teach children in the sport 5. _______________________
单元测试
一、单项选择（20分）
1. Lily and I are good friends. We ______ together.
A. grow up B. grew up C. has grown
2. My father bought my mother a ____ necklace.
A. silver’s B. gold C. gold’s
3. No news is good _____ sometimes.
A. news B. information C. message
4. “Where there is a will, there is a way.” is a famous English ______.
A. say B. saying C. story
5. You look so _____. What happened
A. worry B. worried C. worries
6. Susan will move ____ Shanghai because her father got a good job there.
A. in B. to C. at
7. It is easy for her to _____ friends in her class.
A. do B. become C. make
8. _____ new friends, but _____ the old. One is silver and one is gold.
A. Making, keep B. Make, keeping C. Make, keep
9. He had no money to pay for the house. So the landlord asked him to _____.
A. move away B. go C. go out
10. Which stress is different？
A. silver B. neighbour C. unhappy
11. We played together _____ every day.
A. almost B. nearly C.A and B
12. Although the old man lives _____ at home, he doesn’t feel ______.
A. alone, alone B. lonely, alone C. alone, lonely
13. Things made of ______ aren’t cheap.
A. golden B. golds C. gold
14. How did you keep in touch ____ Tom ____ e-mail.
A. with, By B. with, with C. on, By
15. This box is as ____ as that one.
A. heavy B. heavier C. heavily
16.—When did you _______ his e-mails —yesterday.
A. reply B. reply to C. answer to
17. I have two apples. One is red, ____ is green.
A. the others B. another C. the other
18. Kate ____ eating hamburgers.
A. enjoyed B. enjoied C. enjoy
19. —What happened _______ the end of the story —Sorry, I don’t know.
A. at B. in C. on
20. Lin Tao said Li Lei ____ Zhang Wei on the street.
A. meet B. met C. meeted
二、完形填空（10分）
根据短文内容，从A、B、C、D四个选项中选出一个能正确填入相应空格内的最佳答案, 并把答题卡上对应题目的答案标号涂黑。
A terrible earthquake(地震) happened in Wenchuan on May 12, 2008. 21 people lost their lives and homes. During those days a lot of stories about 22 could be heard. Here is 23 of them. After the earthquake, under a fallen building, some soldiers found that a 24 died in a very strange way. When they were ready to take her away, they were surprised to find that a baby in her arms was 25 alive. The baby was sleeping and 26 hurt at all. Between the dead mother 27 the living baby, there was a cellphone(手机) with a short 28 on the screen, “My dear baby, if you can survive(幸存), remember that I love you.” Everybody 29 when they read these words.
Besides this story, many other stories also moved us deeply. 30 these stories, we know more about love.
You’re lucky if you’re loved by others. You’re great if you love others when you’re in danger.
21．A．All22．A．home23．A．one24．A．mail25．A．still26．A．is 27．A．or28．A．story29．A．smiled30．A．From B．ManyB．1ifeB．noneB．womanB．oftenB．isn’t B．andB．filmB．shoutedB．On C．FewC．loveC．someC．boyC．neverC．wasC．alsoC．messageC．1aughedC．To D．NoD．hope D．eachD．girlD．notD．wasn’tD．butD．songD．criedD．With
三、阅读理解（20分）
阅读下列材料，从A、B、C、D四个选项中选出最佳答案
(A)
At school many things happen to us. We may feel excited when we have success in a school play. We may feel sorry if we lose an important game. We want to keep the memory for the rest of our lives.
How to keep the memory Our English teacher, Miss Wang, has taught us a good way of remembering things—to make our own yearbook. What is a yearbook A yearbook is a kind of book which is used to keep the memory of exciting moments. It’s usually made at the end of the year.
Last December, we began to make our yearbook. First, we chose the persons who had done something special, then some students interviewed(采访) them, some wrote down their stories, others took photos of them. Everyone in our class had something to do. Finally our teacher helped us to put the things together. We had our first yearbook.
All of us put a lot of love into making the yearbook. It is so wonderful that not only the students but also our parents and teachers will remember the special time for ever.
31. When we have success in a school play, we may fell .
A. sorry B. angry C. excited D. interested
32. Miss Wang’s good way of remembering good things is to .
A. buy a new book B. write down stories C. take a lot of photos D. make a yearbook
33. A yearbook is made to .
A. take notes B. keep the memory C. do our homework D. remember English words
34. Usually a yearbook is made in .
A. January B. February C. May D. December
35. We made our first yearbook .
A. without any help C. with the help of our teacher B. without putting our love into it D. with the help of our parents
(B)
SINA — In order to let people go our more easily during the 2008 Olympic Games, Beijing is going to start a special bus line and seven more night bus lines. 40% of the taxis will be in service for 24 ours. The subway will run longer hours, too. (December 27, 2007)
YAHOO— An old called Shen Yuanyan made five Fuwa toys with 6,000 pieces of paper. It took him a few months to finish them. Mr. Shen will make another five bigger Fuwa toys and send them to Beijing. (January 7, 2008)
BAIDU— The Olympic Flame(圣火) has arrived in Beijing, showing that the Olympic Games in China will soon begin. From today the torch(火炬) will carry the Flame across the world. (March 31, 2008)
XINHUA— Yang Yang, a famous Chinese skater, received the Beijing Olympic Torch from a leader in Sanya, May 4, 2008. Yang ran the first 200 meters during the torch relay(接力) in Sanya, the first leg in the Chinese mainland(大陆). (May 4, 2008)
36. isn’t mentioned in the news above.
A. The bus B. The taxi C. The subway D. The plane
37. The old man’s Fuwa toys were made of .
A. glass B. paper C. cotton D. silk
38. The torch has carried the Flame across the world since .
A. December 27, 2007 B. January 7, 2008 C. March 31, 2008 D. May 4, 2008
39. In the Chinese mainland, the first leg of the torch relay started in .
A. Beijing B. Chongqing C. Shanghai D. Sanya
40. There of news about the Olympic torch relay here.
A. is only one piece B. are two pieces C. are three pieces D. are four pieces
(C)
When I was about 12, I had an enemy, a girl who liked to point out my shortcomings(缺点). Sometimes she said I was thin. Sometimes she said I was lazy. Sometimes she said I wasn’t a good student. Sometimes she said I talked too much, and so on. I tried to put up with(忍受) her as long as I could. At last, I became very angry. I ran to my father with tears in my eyes.
He listened to me quietly, and then he asked, “Are the things she said true or not Mary, didn’t you ever wonder what you’re really like Go and make a list of everything she said and mark the points that are true. Pay no attention to the other things she said.”
I did as he told me and to my surprise, I discovered that about half the things were true.
I brought the list back to my dad. He refused to take it. “That’s just for you,” he said. “You know better than anyone else the truth about yourself. When something said about you is true, you’ll find it will be helpful to you. Don’t shut your ears. Listen to them all, but hear the truth and do what you think is right.”
Many years have passed. The situation often appears in my mind. In our life we often meet with some trouble and we often go to someone and ask for advice. For some advice you will treasure(珍惜) all your life!
41. Who is the writer’s enemy
A. Her father B. A boy C. A girl
42. What did the writer’s father do after he heard her complaints(抱怨)
A. He agreed with her “enemy”.
B. he let her continue to put up with her “enemy”.
C. He told her to write down all her “enemy” had said about her.
D. He told her not to pay attention to what her “enemy” had said.
43. The writer felt________ when she did the things as her father had told her.
A. surprised B. angry C. disappointed D. sad
44. Which of the following can we know from the passage
A. The “enemy” thought the writer was pretty.
B. The “enemy” thought the writer studied hard.
C. The writer and her “enemy” became best friends at last.
D. The writer is grateful to her father.
45. Which of the following can be the best title of the passage
A. My Parents
B. A Serious Criticism(批评)
C. What People Say About You Is Always Right
D. The Best Advice I Ever Had
(D)
Colors can be seen everywhere. We see them in the sky and in the sea. There are colors in rocks and in all plants and animals. Everything we see has colors. We see the colorful world. How can we see colors We see colors when light hits our eyes. Dogs and many other animals can’t see colors. But bees can. This helps them find flowers to fly to.
We sometimes use the means of colors to express our feelings. People may say that they see red when they are angry. Or you may say you feel blue. This means you are sad. We also use colors to tell us things. Red is the color of stopping signs. Green means that you can go.
Animals come in all kinds of colors. Many of these are very pretty. An animal’s color may say “Here I am.” or “Watch out.” Or it may help the animal to hide. Some animals can make their colors similar to their surroundings(周围的事物). Then they can’t be seen easily.
Some people can’t tell one color from another. They can see yellow and blue. But they can’t tell red from green. We say these people are color blind.
46. We can see colors ____________.
A. in the sky B. in the sea and rocks
C. in all plants and animals D. A, B and C
47. If your friend is sad, he may say “____________.”
A. I see red B. Watch out
C. I feel blue D. I feel yellow
48. According to the passage, why sometimes some animals can’t be seen easily
A. Because they have special colors.
B. Because they make their colors different from other animals.
C. Because they have bright colors.
D. Because they make their colors look like things around them.
49. The person who _____________ is color blind.
A. can see yellow and blue B. can’t tell red from green
C. can’t see yellow and blue D. can tell red from green
50. What’s the best title of the passage
A. Colors. B. Color Blind. C. We See Colors. D. Animals and Colors.
四、任务性阅读（10分）
（A）
The two-way radio is very (51) to people who live on those great Australian farms. It (52) much like a telephone. A person can listen (53) someone else talk and then give an answer. For example, people on the large farms can talk to a doctor far ___(54) . They can tell the doctor about someone who is ill, and the doctor can let them know how to (55) after the sick person.
(B) 阅读下面短文，按要求回答问题。
Fifteen is such an awful(糟糕的)age, I should know. I really wish I were eighteen. If you are an adult, you can be your own boss. People like my parents and my teachers are always telling me what to do. You know what I mean. "It's time for bed, Sandy." Or "Sandy, you've watched too much TV for one night." "Sandy, stand up straight." "Sandy, you must improve your handwriting." Sandy this, Sandy that. No one tells adults when they go to bed or not to watch TV. Besides, adults get to wear what they like... Now it's going to be great to be an adult. Don't you agree
I'm Sandy's mother. Having a fifteen-year-old daughter isn't always easy. Right now, we've got a problem. Our neighhour, Mrs White, wants Sandy to look after her pet dog for one week. Sandy really wants to do it, but (I ). She's too young and inexperienced. Well, I will never be able to relax knowing she is all alone with a dog. I've tried to explain my feelings to her, but she won't listen. She keeps telling me that the Whites live very near, so she can ask for help. She insists that Mrs White won't ask her to look after her pet dog if she doesn't think Sandy is old enough. She says I'm "babying" her and I hate to see her mad at me. What should I do
56. Sandy is fifteen years old and she wishes to be her own_______.
57. Sandy thinks her parents and her teachers are always telling her what to do. Give an example.
58．将文中括号内的英文句子补充完整。
59．将划线句子She says I'm "babying" her and I hate to see her mad at me.译成汉语。
60. Should Sandy look after Mrs White's pet dog Why or why not
五、交际运用（10分）
(A)
从A一G选项中选出能填入空白处的最佳选项补全对话。（选项中有两项是多余的）
A: What can I do for you, sir
B: 61
A: OK. We now have apples, grapes and bananas on sale.
A. Here’s the money.B. How much do they weigh C. Would you like to eat some grapes D. I want some drinks.E. What other things would you like F. I want some fruit.G. How much are the apples
B: 62
A: Five yuan a kilo.
B: I’ll take six apples. 63
A: Three kilos. 64
B: I’d like to buy some grapes for my grandparents.
How much are the grapes
A: Well, the green ones are three yuan a kilo and the red ones are four yuan a kilo.
B: Two kilos of the red ones, please.
A: All right.
B: 65
A: Thank you.
(B) 填入一个适当的词补全对话，每空一词。
A: Hello, Huiyan. Are you free this Saturday
B: Yes. What’s up
A: We plan to go out for a picnic. Why 66 come with us
B: Good idea! By the way, what need I take
A: Some useful things, 67 as foods, drinks, an umbrella and so on. Remember to wear sunglasses. They can protect your eyes.
B: It’s really kind 68 you. Besides, 69 and where should we meet
A: Let’s meet at 7:30 a.m. outside Harbin Amusement Park, shall 70
B: Great! See you tomorrow.
A: See you.
六、阅读表达（10分）
(A)
阅读下列短文，请根据题目要求，从短文内容中获取必要的信息
There are some differences between British and American English. In grammar, for example, speakers of British English say “in hospital” and “Have you a pen ” Americans say “in the hospital” and “Do you have a pen ” Pronunciation is sometimes different. For example, when a learner is used to the British pronunciation [da:ns](dance), he may not understand the American pronunciation[d ns].There are differences between British and American English in spelling. For example, “travelled” and “honour” are British, “traveled” and “honor” are American. However, for the most part, British and American English are the same language.
(71) Between British and American English
------------- British English American English
In grammar In (72) In the hospital
In (73) travelled traveled
Besides, (74) is sometimes different.
However, British and American English are the (75) language.
(B)
廉价出售广告
MAY CLOTHING 服装店要换季廉价出售一些毛衣和衬衫，请你设计一个广告。（字数30-40词左右）提示：廉价出售各种颜色的毛衣每件80元，各种型号衬衫每件50元。
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
七、书面表达（20分）
有一天，孩子坐船的时候，吉姆掉到了河里。李蕾迅速地跳到河里去帮他。最后，孩子们把吉姆拉了上来，吉姆非常感谢大家。
1. one day, the children, go boating, Jim, fall
2. Li Lei, into the river, quickly, help
3. at last, the children, up, from
4 Jim, thank, for
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Unit 6 答案
Lesson 1
一、（A）1. almost 2. grow 3. are flying 4. send 5. busy
(B)1.cried 2.enjoyed 3. third grade 4. toy 5. goes
二、1. B most是代词，大多数的意思； almost是副词，几乎、差不多的意思； hardly副词，几乎不的意思，具有否定含义。2. C
3. B由问句看出，应该用一般过去时回答。
4. C由look看出，孩子们正在玩玩具车，应该用现在进行时。现在进行时结构是am/is/are +doing。
5. C 在when引导的时间状语从句中，用一般现在时态表示将来。
6. A谁送给你的这封信？它来自玛丽。由题意可知，send应用过去式。
7. B由don’t 可知，应用动词原形。Lose it失去比赛，即输了比赛的意思。
8. C nearly和almost都是副词，几乎、差不多的意思。
9. A由答语看出，是提问频度。
10. C tell jokes讲笑话，固定搭配。
三、（A）1. How do you like him / What do you think (about) of him
?? 2. What does he look like
?? 3. Shall / May / Can I meet/know him.
?? 4. What’s the matter (with him) / What’s wrong (with him) / What’s his trouble
?? 5. I’m sorry to hear that
(B)BEAGF
Lesson 2
一、1. Nobody 2. saying 3. silver 4. news 5. together
二、1. B由than 可知，应用比较级。金比银要贵，这是常识。
2. C lonely是表示“孤独，寂寞”；alone是表示“单独，独自”。分析题意可知。
3. B move to 搬家去……；move away搬走。
4. B由题意可知，是一个古老的谚语。
5. C 由题意可知，是你在担心什么。Be worried about担心。
6. B由题意可知，他从不回复我的电子邮件。
7. A在表达委婉请求的一般疑问句中，用something而不用anything。
8. C固定用法。
9. C on time准时；all the time一直。
10. B greet each other互相打招呼。
三、1. A。查理家境贫困，父母没有钱资助他上学，故选no。
2. B。根据下文，查理不负众望，说明他聪明好学，故选clever。
3. A。查理学习刻苦，并顺利完成了学业，说明他各门功课成绩较好，故选did well in。D选项介词用错，正确词组为was good at。
4. C。根据下文查理娶了金先生女儿为妻并精心呵护她，说明查理同意了金先生的请求，故选agreed。
5. D。根据下文妻子胖得不能走路，说明她食物吃得多。此外食物为不可数名词，因此只能用a lot of来修饰。
6. C。心脏不好，应去医院检查，下文指出为她检查的正是医生，故选hospital。
7. D。由于她的病是因营养过剩引起的，医生应让她不要吃肉，糖果之类的食物，故选not to。
8. B。她害怕忘了医生的指示，因此将其写在纸上，故选to forget。
9. B。与下文相对应，这里应填went out。
10. C。擅长烹饪的查理将菜买回之后，肯定要忙着为爱妻做饭，故cooking为正确答案。
四、1. brightly 2. to write 3. into 4. but 5. something
Lesson 3
一、1. gold 2. lonely 3. unhappy 4. cry 5. worry
二、1. B由题意可知，动作都发生在过去。
2. C one… the other… 一个……另一个……，只能用在两者之间。
3. A 一年级有两种表达法：the first grade或Grade One。
4. B第一个空，名词作定语；第二个空，它是由金子制成的吗？也应该用名词。
5. A动词原形不能做主语，要么用动名词，要么用动词不定式。
6. B由three years ago可知，应该用一般过去时。
7. C由last year可知，应该用一般过去时；are 的过去式是were。
8. A get to, reach, arrive at/in(大地点用in，小地点用at)都表示到达；后面不接宾语时只能用arrive。
9. B吉姆穿上外套出去了。由后半句可知，应用过去式；put的过去式是 put。
10. C so… that… 如此……以至于……；固定搭配。
三、1. C。such常用在不定冠词或名词前修饰可数名词或不可数名词，表示“此类的”、“这种的”，故such为正确选项。
2. A。come up with意为“提出、找出”；agree with意为“同意”；be fed up with意为“对……厌倦”；get on well with意为“和……相处得好”。根据文意A为正确选项。
3. B。上文讲到我曾找到过各种各样的原因，其中最重要的原因应当是……，因此这里应用important的最高级，故选the most。
4. D。固定结构be different from 表示“不同于……”。
5. A。本段着重说明了教育在人的发展中的作用，以及大学在教育中的地位。作为总括句，本空应填education。
6. C。这是一个含有条件状语从句的复合句，意为“如果我不能受到更高等的教育，我就无法完成我的学业”，故选will not finish为正确选择。
7. B。这里只能选可作定语的选项。过去分词developed表示“成熟的”，为正确选项。
8. D。大学应是提供高等教育的地方, provide符合文意为正确选项。
9. B。介词among可表示”包括……在内”为正确选项。
10. C。与前半句相对应，这里仍应用比较级，而may better意思不对，因此be able to better为正确选项。
四、(A) 1 B由第一段最后两句可猜出。
2 C give up放弃。Quit 的意思由上下文可猜出。
3 D结合上下文和作者的语气可猜出。
4 A由最有一段可猜出。
5 A 细读文章很容易总结出。
(B) 1 A由第一段第一句可知。
2 D由第一段第二句可知。
3 B由第二段第三行可知。
4 D由第三段第三句可知。
5 C由第三段第二句可知。
Lesson 4
一、1. move 2. winner 3. correct 4. grandparents 5. started
二、1. B keep in touch with sb. through sth.通过…… 和某人保持联系。
2. B由met看出，应该用一般过去时。
3. A at the end of在……的末尾； in the end最后； by the end of 截止到……末为止。
4. B happen to do sth.碰巧干某事；由题意可知，应该用一般过去时。
5. A 加入一个团体，成为其中一名成员用join；由题意可知，应该用一般过去时。
6. A由答语看出，是提问多长时间。
7. A用动词不定式表示写明信片的目的。
8. B她没有任何一个朋友。Any是任何一个的意思。
9. A not … until…直到……时候才……。
10. C
三、1. which/that are 2. did worry 3. through phones 4. less expensive 5. wasn’t she
四、1. Fun Jobs 2. Walking Dogs 3. local businesses or people 4. children 5. you’re good at / you do well in
单元测试
一、1. B group up 长大；由题意知，用一般现在时。
2. B一条金项链。名词作定语。
3. A 没有消息就是好消息。News消息； information信息； message尤其指口信。
4. B由题意可知，是一个谚语。
5. B look是系动词，后接形容词作表语。
6. B move to 搬家去……，由题意可知。
7. C make friends交朋友。
8. C这是祈使句。都用动词原形。
9. A move away搬走，由题意可知是让他搬走。
10. C
11. C nearly和almost都是副词，几乎、差不多的意思。
12. C lonely是表示“孤独，寂寞”；alone是表示“单独，独自”。分析题意可知。
13. C金子做成的东西不便宜。由题意知应填名词。
14. A keep in touch with sb.和某人保持联系；by通过的意思。
15. A 这个盒子和那个一样重。As…as…中间要用形容词原形。
16. B reply to回复，answer是及物动词，后面直接加宾语，不需要to。
17. C one… the other… 一个……另一个……，只能用在两者之间。
18. A enjoy的过去式是直接加-ed，如果是一般现在时，则应该用enjoys。
19. B at the end of the story 在故事的末尾。
20. B如果主句用了一般过去时，从句中的谓语动词也相应的变成过去的某一种形式。Meet的过去试是met。
二、21 B由题意知，有很多人丧生。
22 C由下文可知，有很多关于爱的故事。
23 A这是他们中的一个。
24 B由下文可知，是一位妇女，一位母亲。
25 A still仍然。
26 D那个孩子没有受伤。用一般过去时。
27 B between… and … 在两者之间。
28 C有一则短信。
29 D有上下文和语境可感受到。
30 A从这些故事当中。
三、（A）31 C由第一段第二句可知。
32 D由第二段第二句可知。
33 B由第二段第三行可知。
34 D由第二段句末和第三段句首可知。
35 C由第三段第四行可知。
（B）36 D细读第一段可知。
37 B由第二段第一句可知。
38 C由第三段可知。
39 D由第四段可知。
40 B后面两段是关于火炬接力的。
(C) 41 C由第一段第一句可知。
42 C由第二段第二行可知。
43 A由第三段可知。
44 D由最后一段可体会到。
45 D由最后一段可总结出。
(D) 46 D由第一段前两行可知。
47 C由第二段第三、四句可知。
48 D由第三段最后两句可知。
49 B由最后一段最后两句可知。
50 A通读全文可知。
四、（A）51. useful 52. works 53. to 54. away 55. look
(B) 56. boss 或 master
57. It's time for bed. 或 Sandy, you've watched too much TV for one night. Sandy, stand up straight. 或 Sandy, you must improve your handwriting.
58. I'm worried. (凡是表明“我”持怀疑或反对态度的答案均可得分)
59.她说我总是把她看成孩子，而我也不想看到她朝我发火。
60.此题为主观题，凡合理的答案均可得分。例如：
No, I don't think so because she is too young and inexperienced.
或Yes, I think so. If she has problems, she can ask Mrs White for help.
五、 (A) FGBEA (B) 66. not 67. such 68. of 69. when 70. we
六、(A) 71. Differences 72. hospital 73. spelling 74. pronunciation 75. same
( B) MAY CLOTHING SALE
Do you like sweaters Do you like shirts Do you like them cheap We have sweaters in all colors at 80 yuan each! And we have shirts in different size at 50 yuan ！
Come to May Clothing!
七、(略)
A. I’ll do that.
B. She lives in England now.
C. Where does she live
D. How often do you meet each other
E. It’s nice to hear from old friends.
F. Not really.
G. We grew up together here in this town.
use, work, to, look, away